Commissioning and Configuration Guide(V100R003C01_01)

OptiX OSN 1800 Compact Multi-Service EdgeOptical Transport PlatformV100R003C01

Commissioning and ConfigurationGuide

Issue 01

Date 2011-10-20

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved.No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior writtenconsent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. NoticeThe purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and thecustomer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within thepurchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representationsof any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in thepreparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.Address: Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

Issue 01 (2011-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

http://www.huawei.com

mailto:[email protected]

About This Document

Related VersionsThe following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Version

OptiX OSN 1800 V100R003C01

iManager U2000 V100R006C00

iManager U2000 Web LCT V100R006C00

Intended AudienceThe intended audiences of this document are:

l Installation and Commissioning Engineer

l Data Configuration Engineer

Symbol ConventionsThe following symbols may be found in this document. They are defined as follows:

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if notavoided, will result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk which,if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if notavoided, could cause equipment damage, data loss, andperformance degradation, or unexpected results.

OptiX OSN 1800 Compact Multi-Service Edge OpticalTransport PlatformCommissioning and Configuration Guide About This Document


ii

Symbol Description

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or saveyou time.

Provides additional information to emphasize orsupplement important points of the main text.

GUI ConventionsConvention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are inboldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. Forexample, choose File > Create > Folder.

Update HistoryUpdates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document versioncontains all updates made to previous versions.

Updates in Issue 01 (2011-10-20) Based on Product VersionV100R003C01

This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 1800 V100R003C01. Compared with theOptiX OSN 1800 V100R003C00, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Update Description

ConfiguringProtectionSchemes

l Configuring ODUk SNCP Protection is added.l Configuring Port Protection is modified.

ConfiguringBoardParameters

l LDX Parameters is add.

Basic Concepts l Board Model is added.l ODUflex is added.

ConfiguringServices onBoards

l LQM Service Configuration is added.l LDGF2 Service Configuration is added.



iii

Update Description

TestingProtectionSwitching

l Testing ODUk SNCP Switching is added.l Testing SNCP Switching is modified.l Testing Port Protection Switching is modified.

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed.


This issue is the third official release for OptiX OSN 1800 V100R003C00. Compared with theissue 02, the manual of this issue for OptiX OSN 1800 V100R003C00 provides the followingupdates.

Update Description

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed.


This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 1800 V100R003C00. Compared withthe issue 01, the manual of this issue for OptiX OSN 1800 V100R003C00 provides the followingupdates.

Update Description

Whole manual l The topic "Commissioning and Configuring the Network" is replacedwith Basic Configurations.

l Some contents in the topic "Commissioning and Configuring theNetwork" are added to the new topic Service Configurations.

l Some contents in the topic "Commissioning and Configuring theNetwork" are added to the new topic Follow-up Operations(Including Data Backup).

l The ELOM board is added.

ServiceConfigurations

l Basic Concepts is added.l Configuring Services on Boards is added.l Configuring E-LAN Services is added.



iv

Update Description

ReferenceOperations fortheCommissioningandConfiguration

l Adding Ports is added.l Deleting Ports is added.l Changing Port Types is added.


The updated contents are as follows:

l New information:

– Configuring master and slave shelves

– Configuring OSI over DCC

– Connecting to the SCC board through a serial port

– Configuring the LEM18 board

– Configuring the Ethernet line services and the Ethernet LAN services

– Configuring WDM trails

– Configuring ERPS protection

– Testing ERPS switching

– Basic concepts regarding Ethernet services

– Creating a VLAN group

– Configuring the aging time for MAC addresses

– Configuring port mirroring

l Modification:

– Requirements on optical power commissioning

– User interfaces of the iManager U2000 and Web LCT

– Glossary



l The description of the GE(GFP-T) service supporting the LPT function is added.

l Some bugs are fixed.



v



l The section "Configuring the LDE Board" is updated.l Some bugs are fixed.



l The section "Configuring Board Parameters" is updated.l The section "Configuring PRBS Test" is deleted and the corresponding contents are added

in the section "PRBS Error Detection Function" in Feature Description.l Some bugs are fixed.


Initial commercial release.



vi

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

1 Guide to This Document..............................................................................................................1

2 List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment......................3

3 Preparations....................................................................................................................................83.1 Preparing Documents.........................................................................................................................................93.2 Preparing Tools, Equipment, and Materials.....................................................................................................10

4 Commissioning Optical Power.................................................................................................124.1 Commissioning a System Without Optical Amplifiers....................................................................................134.2 Commissioning a System with Optical Amplifiers..........................................................................................154.3 Checking the Optical Power Commissioning Results......................................................................................19

5 Basic Configurations...................................................................................................................205.1 Searching for and Creating NEs.......................................................................................................................225.2 Creating Optical NEs........................................................................................................................................255.3 Changing the ID and Name of an NE...............................................................................................................265.4 Configuring Master and Slave Shelves............................................................................................................285.5 Changing the IP Address of an NE...................................................................................................................335.6 Configuring Ethernet Extended ECC...............................................................................................................345.7 Configuring IP over DCC.................................................................................................................................395.8 Configuring OSI over DCC..............................................................................................................................405.9 Connecting to the SCC Board Through a Serial Port.......................................................................................435.10 Configuring Board Parameters.......................................................................................................................44

5.10.1 ELOM Parameters.................................................................................................................................445.10.2 LDE Parameters.....................................................................................................................................525.10.3 LDGF Parameters..................................................................................................................................565.10.4 LDGF2 Parameters................................................................................................................................595.10.5 LDX Parameters....................................................................................................................................635.10.6 LEM18 Parameters................................................................................................................................675.10.7 LOE Parameters.....................................................................................................................................745.10.8 LQG Parameters....................................................................................................................................795.10.9 LQM Parameters....................................................................................................................................835.10.10 LQM2 Parameters................................................................................................................................92

OptiX OSN 1800 Compact Multi-Service Edge OpticalTransport PlatformCommissioning and Configuration Guide Contents


vii

5.10.11 LQPL/LQPU Parameters...................................................................................................................1035.10.12 LSPL/LSPU Parameters....................................................................................................................1075.10.13 LSPR Parameters...............................................................................................................................1095.10.14 LSX Parameters.................................................................................................................................1105.10.15 LWX2 Parameters.............................................................................................................................1155.10.16 TSP Parameters..................................................................................................................................1195.10.17 SCC Parameters.................................................................................................................................123

5.11 Configuring Protection Schemes..................................................................................................................1245.11.1 Configuring SW SNCP Protection......................................................................................................1245.11.2 Configuring SNCP Protection.............................................................................................................1285.11.3 Configuring ODUk SNCP Protection..................................................................................................1285.11.4 Configuring Port Protection.................................................................................................................1295.11.5 Configuring ERPS Protection..............................................................................................................135

5.12 Synchronizing the NE Time with the NMS Time........................................................................................1385.13 Starting NE Performance Monitoring...........................................................................................................1395.14 Checking Configurations in the Commissioning Process............................................................................141

6 Service Configurations.............................................................................................................1436.1 Basic Concepts...............................................................................................................................................144

6.1.1 Overview...............................................................................................................................................1446.1.2 Cross-Connection Types........................................................................................................................1446.1.3 Cross-Connection Ability......................................................................................................................1466.1.4 Formats of Ethernet Frames..................................................................................................................1476.1.5 External Ports and Internal Ports...........................................................................................................1506.1.6 Auto-Negotiation...................................................................................................................................1506.1.7 Flow Control..........................................................................................................................................1516.1.8 Tag Attributes........................................................................................................................................1526.1.9 Bridges...................................................................................................................................................1536.1.10 VLAN Group.......................................................................................................................................1566.1.11 Board Model (Standard Mode and Compatible Mode).......................................................................1566.1.12 ODUflex..............................................................................................................................................157

6.2 Configuring Services on Boards.....................................................................................................................1596.2.1 ELOM Service Configuration...............................................................................................................1606.2.2 LEM18 Service Configuration..............................................................................................................1736.2.3 LQG Service Configuration...................................................................................................................1776.2.4 LQM2 Service Configuration................................................................................................................1826.2.5 TSP Service Configuration....................................................................................................................1966.2.6 LQM Service Configuration..................................................................................................................2026.2.7 LDGF2 Service Configuration..............................................................................................................209

6.3 Configuring WDM Services...........................................................................................................................2156.3.1 Configuring Cross-Connection Service.................................................................................................2156.3.2 Configuring Services in Service Package Mode...................................................................................217

6.4 Configuring EPL/EVPL Services...................................................................................................................220



viii

6.4.1 EPL/EVPL Service Overview...............................................................................................................2206.4.2 Configuring EPL Services.....................................................................................................................2226.4.3 Configuring EVPL Services..................................................................................................................224

6.5 Configuring EPLAN/EVPLAN Services.......................................................................................................2276.5.1 EPLAN/EVPLAN Service Overview....................................................................................................2276.5.2 Configuring EPLAN Services...............................................................................................................2306.5.3 Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.lq Bridge).........................................................................2326.5.4 Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.laq Bridge).......................................................................234

6.6 Configuring SDH Service...............................................................................................................................238

7 Follow-up Operations (Including Data Backup).................................................................2407.1 Creating Fibers...............................................................................................................................................2427.2 Configuring WDM Trails...............................................................................................................................243

7.2.1 Searching WDM Trails..........................................................................................................................2437.2.2 Creating WDM Trails............................................................................................................................2457.2.3 Managing WDM Trails.........................................................................................................................247

7.3 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board............................................................................................2487.4 Checking Optical Power of Boards................................................................................................................2497.5 Querying Bit Errors Before and After FEC....................................................................................................2527.6 Viewing Current Alarms on an NE and Removing Abnormal Alarms..........................................................2547.7 Testing Protection Switching..........................................................................................................................256

7.7.1 Testing SW SNCP Switching................................................................................................................2567.7.2 Testing SNCP Switching.......................................................................................................................2597.7.3 Testing ODUk SNCP Switching...........................................................................................................2617.7.4 Testing Port Protection Switching.........................................................................................................2647.7.5 Testing ERPS Protection.......................................................................................................................265

7.8 Querying and Saving the Networkwide Optical Power and Alarm Data.......................................................2667.9 Backing Up NE Data to the NMS Server or Client........................................................................................267

A Handling Common Commissioning Problems..................................................................269A.1 The Receive Optical Power Is Normal But the LDGF Board Reports an OTU1_LOF Alarm.....................270A.2 The Receive Optical Power Is Normal But the LDGF Board Reports a LINK_ERR Alarm........................271A.3 The Receive Optical Power is Normal But an OTU Board Reports an REM_SF Alarm.............................271A.4 The Optical Path Is Reachable But the NE Cannot Be Logged in Remotely................................................272

B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and Configuration.................................274B.1 Creating a VLAN Group................................................................................................................................277B.2 Configuring the Aging Time for MAC Addresses........................................................................................278B.3 Configuring Port Mirroring............................................................................................................................279B.4 Obtaining NE IP Addresses at the Site..........................................................................................................279B.5 Creating a Single NE.....................................................................................................................................280B.6 Checking the NE Software Version...............................................................................................................282B.7 Creating an NE User......................................................................................................................................282B.8 Switching a Logged-In NE User....................................................................................................................284



ix

B.9 Modifying the Optical NE Name...................................................................................................................285B.10 Modifying GNE Parameters........................................................................................................................285B.11 Changing the GNE for NEs.........................................................................................................................286B.12 Changing a GNE to a Normal NE................................................................................................................287B.13 Changing a Normal NE to a GNE................................................................................................................288B.14 Deleting NEs................................................................................................................................................288B.15 Enabling the Proxy ARP..............................................................................................................................289B.16 Configuring the IP Static Route for an NE..................................................................................................290B.17 Querying the OSPF Protocol Status.............................................................................................................291B.18 Configuring the NE Data.............................................................................................................................291

B.18.1 Configuring the NE Data Manually....................................................................................................291B.18.2 Uploading the NE Data.......................................................................................................................292

B.19 Configuring Boards......................................................................................................................................293B.19.1 Adding Boards....................................................................................................................................293B.19.2 Deleting Boards..................................................................................................................................294

B.20 Adding Ports................................................................................................................................................294B.21 Deleting Ports...............................................................................................................................................295B.22 Changing Port Types....................................................................................................................................295B.23 Configuring the Standard NTP Key.............................................................................................................296B.24 Synchronizing the NE Time with the Standard NTP Server Time..............................................................297B.25 Setting Automatic Synchronization of the NE Time with the NMS Time..................................................298B.26 Performance Management...........................................................................................................................298

B.26.1 Setting the Board Performance Threshold..........................................................................................299B.26.2 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of a Board....................................................................299B.26.3 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE......................................................................300B.26.4 Resetting Board Performance Registers.............................................................................................300

B.27 Modifying the Services Configuration.........................................................................................................301B.27.1 Activating Cross-Connections............................................................................................................301B.27.2 Deactivating Cross-Connection Service.............................................................................................302B.27.3 Deleting Cross-Connections...............................................................................................................303B.27.4 Converting an Unprotected Service to an SNCP Service...................................................................304B.27.5 Converting an SNCP Service to an Unprotected Service...................................................................305

B.28 Switching the Working Mode of the LQM2................................................................................................307B.29 Backing Up and Restoring the NE Data......................................................................................................309

B.29.1 Comparison of NE Data Backup and Restoration Methods...............................................................309B.29.2 Restoring the NE Database from the SCC Board...............................................................................311B.29.3 Recovering Device Data from the NMS Server or the NMS Client...................................................311

B.30 Creating Fiber Connections in List Mode....................................................................................................312

C Parameter Reference.................................................................................................................314C.1 NE Attributes.................................................................................................................................................315C.2 Attributes of NE Users...................................................................................................................................316C.3 NE Time Synchronization..............................................................................................................................319



x

C.4 WDM Cross-Connection Configuration........................................................................................................321C.5 Port Protection Parameters.............................................................................................................................321C.6 SNCP Service Control Parameters.................................................................................................................324

D Glossary......................................................................................................................................330



xi

1 Guide to This Document

This document helps you commission and configure the OptiX OSN 1800 equipment easily andeffectively.

Organized according to the tasks involved in the commissioning and configuration of the OptiXOSN 1800 equipment, this document guides you to complete the commissioning andconfiguration of the OptiX OSN 1800 equipment. Before reading this document, you are advisedto master the following knowledge:

l Basic knowledge of the OptiX OSN 1800 equipmentRead the OptiX OSN 1800 product manuals, such as Product Description, HardwareDescription, and Feature Description.

l Basic knowledge of installing and operating the iManager U2000 and iManager U2000Web LCTRead manuals, such as Installation Guide and Operation Guide for the iManager U2000and Web LCT User Guide for the iManager U2000 Web LCT.

After mastering the preceding knowledge, read this document as follows:

1. See to have a general idea of the tasks involved in the commissioning and configuration ofthe OptiX OSN 1800 equipment and sequence of the tasks.Generally, you do not need to perform all tasks listed in for a network. Instead, you canperform the necessary tasks according to the actual network configuration and networkingplanning and design.If you are experienced in commissioning and configuring the OptiX OSN 1800 equipment,have mastered the commissioning and configuration knowledge, and can use thecommissioning tools skillfully, you can take this document as reference.

2. To understand the specific operations and precautions of a task listed in , you can click thematching link of the task to access the page that describes the details about the task.The operation methods of how a task is performed by using multiple commissioning toolsare provided. In an actual project, only one commissioning tool is used. Therefore, you canperform the task according to the relevant description of the commissioning tool. Theoperation methods of different commissioning tools are similar. They serve reference foreach other in actual commissioning. Certain tasks can be performed in various methods ona commissioning tool. This document describes only the most common method. For otheroperation methods, see Reference Information of the tasks.When a task is complete, see for the next one.

OptiX OSN 1800 Compact Multi-Service Edge OpticalTransport PlatformCommissioning and Configuration Guide 1 Guide to This Document


1

3. If you need to know more about a task, for example, optional operation methods of the task,see Reference Information of the task. Reference Information describes the handlingprocess of common problems, relevant operations, examples, and parameter descriptionassociated with the task.

NOTE

You can also find the contents in Reference Information in the appendix of this document.Nevertheless, you are recommended to read the contents from Reference Information of each task.This helps you to better understand the relationships between operations.

OptiX OSN 1800 Compact Multi-Service Edge OpticalTransport PlatformCommissioning and Configuration Guide 1 Guide to This Document


2

2 List of Tasks for Commissioning andConfiguration During Deployment

Complete the deployment of an OptiX OSN 1800 network according to the tasks listed in thissection. Perform the tasks in sequence; otherwise, NEs may be unreachable and you may needto handle problems on site.

You can perform the commissioning and configuration during deployment of the OptiX OSN1800 equipment by using either the iManager U2000 (U2000 for short) or the OptiX iManagerU2000 Web LCT (Web LCT for short). All the operations that can be performed on the WebLCT can be performed on the U2000. Compared with U2000, the Web LCT has lowerrequirements on the computer hardware and can be started quickly.

In actual commissioning, you can omit the tasks that are supported only by the U2000 whenperforming the commissioning and configuration on the Web LCT. After performing thecommissioning and configuration on the Web LCT, you can configure the network-levelfunctions on the U2000.

Table 2-1 lists the tasks for the commissioning and configuration of the OptiX OSN 1800equipment during deployment.

Table 2-1 List of tasks for the commissioning and configuration of the OptiX OSN 1800equipment during deployment

No. Task Mandatory/Optional

Tool

1 Prepare the reference documents for thecommissioning. The reference documents includethe engineering design documents, and blank stationbar code labels.

Mandatory Template anddesigning tools

2 Prepare tools, meters, and materials required forthe commissioning. Download and install the WebLCT or U2000.

Mandatory None

3 Complete commissioning the optical power. Thenreclaim and keep properly the station bar code returntable.

Mandatory None

OptiX OSN 1800 Compact Multi-Service Edge OpticalTransport PlatformCommissioning and Configuration Guide

2 List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration DuringDeployment


3


Tool

4 Connect NEs to the Web LCT or U2000. Start andlog in to the Web LCT or U2000. Then, search andcreate the NEs on the Web LCT or U2000.

Mandatory Web LCT orU2000

5 Create optical NEs on the U2000. Mandatoryon theU2000

U2000

6 Query the SCC electronic label of an NE. Then findthe NE in the station bar code return table accordingto the queried bar code to determine the location ofthe NE. Then change the ID and name of the NEaccording to the NE ID planning provided by thecustomer.


7 Change the IP address of an NE according to theIP address planning provided by the customer.

MandatoryforgatewayNEs andoptionalfor otherNEs

Web LCT orU2000

8 Configuring Master and Slave Subracks. Optional Web LCT orU2000

9 When the network adopts HWECC communication,configure Ethernet extended ECC.

Unavailable for themaster-slavesubrackmode.Mandatoryfor thenon-master-slavemodewhen thenumber ofNEs thatadopt ECCextendedcommunicationexceedsnine andoptionalfor othersituations

Web LCT orU2000




4


Tool

When the network adopts IP over DCCcommunication, configure IP over DCC.When the network adopts OSI over DCCcommunication, configure OSI over DCC.

Optional Web LCT orU2000

10 When the SCC board of an NE connects to anexternal AC power supply, an outdoor cabinet, or asensor system such as the access control ortemperature control system by using a serial port,you must set serial port connection of the NE.

Optional Web LCT orU2000

11 Configure the parameters of the ELOM, LDE,LDGF, LDGF2, LDX, LEM18, LOE, LQG,LQM, LQM2, LQPL/LQPU, LSPL/LSPU,LSPR, LSX, LWX2, TSP, and SCC boards.


12 Configure services.l Configure WDM services.

– In the case of the TSP, LQM2 or LQG board,configure cross-connections for each NE.

– In the case of the LWX2, LQM2, or LQMboard, you can use the service package modeto quickly configure services.

l Configure Ethernet services, which aresupported only by the LEM18 board.– Configure EPL/EVPL Services and

EPLAN/EVPLAN Services based on theservice planning.

l Configure SDH services and protection:For the TSP board, configure SDH services andconfigure SNCP protection.

Mandatoryaccordingto thenetworkdesign andactualboardconfiguration

Web LCT orU2000

13 Create optical fibers in either graphic mode or listmode on the U2000.

Mandatoryon theU2000

U2000

14 Configure WDM trails. Mandatoryon theU2000

U2000




5


Tool

15 Configure protection schemes:l Configure port protection, including intra-

board 1+1 protection, optical line protection,client 1+1 protection.

l For the LQM2 or LQG board, configure SWSNCP protection.

l For the TSP board, configure SNCPprotection.

l For the F2ELOM, F2LQM, F2LQM2,F2LDGF2, F2LSX, F1LDX board, configureODUk SNCP protection.

l For the LEM18 board, configure ERPSprotection.

Mandatoryaccordingto thenetworkdesign andactualboardconfiguration

Web LCT orU2000

16 Synchronize the NE time with the NMS time. Mandatory Web LCT orU2000

17 Enable the NE performance monitoring. Mandatory Web LCT orU2000

18 Check the configuration to ensure that the networkconfiguration is correct.


19 Back up the NE database to the SCC board. Mandatoryon theU2000

U2000

20 Query the optical power. Check and ensure thatthe optical power is normal.


21 Query the bit errors. Ensure that the bit errorsbefore and after FEC are normal.


22 Query the current alarms of an NE. Analyze andremove abnormal alarms.


23 Test and verify that the protection switchingfunction is normal:l Issue manual switching commands to test the

port protection switching, SW SNCPprotection , ODUk SNCP protection andSNCP protection.

l Simulate a port fault and test ERPS protectionswitching.

Mandatoryifprotectionisconfigured

Web LCT orU2000

24 Query and save the networkwide optical powerand alarm data.

Mandatory U2000




6


Tool

25 Back up the equipment data to the NMS serveror client.

Mandatory U2000




7

3 Preparations

About This Chapter

Before the deployment, collect the network data and understand the network design andconfiguration. In the process of installing the equipment, guide the hardware installationengineers to connect fibers and install optical attenuators as required. Before the commissioningand configuration, prepare the commissioning tools and reference documents for thecommissioning.

3.1 Preparing DocumentsFor a deployment of the OptiX OSN 1800 equipment, you need to prepare documents, includingstation bar code return table, engineering design documents, and product manuals, according tothe actual project.

3.2 Preparing Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsYou are recommended to use the Web LCT for the commissioning and configuration of theOptiX OSN 1800 equipment. The version of the commissioning tool must match the equipmentversion.

OptiX OSN 1800 Compact Multi-Service Edge OpticalTransport PlatformCommissioning and Configuration Guide 3 Preparations


8

3.1 Preparing DocumentsFor a deployment of the OptiX OSN 1800 equipment, you need to prepare documents, includingstation bar code return table, engineering design documents, and product manuals, according tothe actual project.

Station Bar Code Return Table

The station bar code return table is used to collect the bar codes of the sets of equipment installedat a station.

After all sets of equipment at a station are installed, you need to record the bar codes of theequipment in the station bar code return table. The station bar code return table shows themapping relationships between bar codes and station names. Therefore, it must be kept properlyfor future identifying the station where an NE is located when the ID and name of the NE arechanged according to the customer planning.

Engineering Design Documents

The engineering design documents are important inputs for equipment commissioning.Generally, the following contents are covered:

l Network diagrams: describe the module types, number of add and drop wavelengths, NEtypes and quantity, and NE IDs of each station, distance between adjacent stations, lineattenuation between stations, and network topology.

l Amplifier configuration diagrams: describe the amplifier configuration and line attenuationat each station.

l Wavelength allocation diagrams: describe the wavelength numbers at each station, servicerelationships between stations (add, drop, or pass-through), and wavelength protectionrelationships.

l Fiber connection diagrams: describe the internal and external fiber connectionrelationships, and slots, optical interfaces on the chassis and ODF terminals at each station.

Product Manuals

The product manuals of the OptiX OSN 1800 equipment cover the equipment functions, features,and guides to the installation, commissioning, configuration, maintenance, and troubleshootingof the equipment.

In the equipment deployment phase, you are recommended to read this manual, that is, OptiXOSN 1800 Compact Multi-Service Edge Optical Transport Platform Commissioning andConfiguration Guide. The reference manuals are as follows:

l OptiX OSN 1800 Compact Multi-service Edge Transport Platform Product Description

l OptiX OSN 1800 Compact Multi-service Edge Transport Platform Hardware Description

l OptiX OSN 1800 Compact Multi-service Edge Transport Platform Quick Installation andCommissioning Guide

l OptiX OSN 1800 Compact Multi-service Edge Transport Platform Feature Description



9

l OptiX OSN 1800 Compact Multi-Service Edge Optical Transport Platform Alarms andPerformance Events Reference

l OptiX OSN 1800 Compact Multi-service Edge Transport Platform Troubleshooting

l OptiX OSN 1800 Compact Multi-service Edge Transport Platform Parts Replacement

You can log in to the Web site http://support.huawei.com to download the product manuals ofthe OptiX OSN 1800 equipment. The path is Documentation > Product catalog > OpticalNetwork > WDM > OptiX OSN 1800.

3.2 Preparing Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsYou are recommended to use the Web LCT for the commissioning and configuration of theOptiX OSN 1800 equipment. The version of the commissioning tool must match the equipmentversion.

Commissioning Tool

You can use either the U2000 or the Web LCT for the commissioning and configuration of theOptiX OSN 1800 equipment.

Compared with the U2000, the Web LCT has lower requirements on the computer hardware andcan be started quickly. Therefore, the Web LCT is recommended at the commissioning andconfiguration phases. The Web LCT, however, does not support query or configuration ofnetwork-level functions. Therefore, the query and configuration of network-level functions mustbe performed on the U2000.

You can log in to the Web site http://support.huawei.com to download the required version ofthe U2000 and Web LCT. The path is Software Center > Version Software > NetworkOSS&Service > iManager U2000.

NOTE

The versions of the U2000 and Web LCT must match the version of the equipment.

NOTE

When you use the U2000 for the commissioning and configuration, you must be an NMS user with "NEoperator" authority or higher.

Commissioning Meters

An optical power meter and an optical spectrum analyzer are mainly used for optical powercommissioning. The optical spectrum analyzer may be used only for commissioning of a networkthat is configured with optical amplifier (OA) boards.

The optical power meter can be used for testing the total optical power of multiplexed signalsand optical power of the optical transponder unit (OTU) boards. The optical spectrum analyzercan be used for testing the optical power, optical signal-to-noise ratio (OSNR), and centerwavelength of a single wavelength of the multiplexed signals.

You are required to test the optical power of a single wavelength of the multiplexed signals byusing the optical spectrum analyzer because the test result is more accurate and the impact ofthe noise does not need to be considered. The meters must be calibrated before being used.



10

Commissioning MaterialsThe following materials may be used for optical power commissioning: fiber jumpers (FC/PC-FC/PC, LC/PC-LC/PC, and LC/PC-FC/PC; two for each type), FOAs (3 dB, 5 dB, 7 dB, 10 dB,and 15 dB), flanges, fiber cleaning tissues or fiber cleaning boxes, and compressed gas duster.



11

4 Commissioning Optical Power

About This Chapter

The optical power must be first commissioned in the deployment commissioning to ensurenormal communication between all NEs and normal optical power received by each board.

If the actual line attenuation is consistent with the design attenuation, the optical power issupposed to be within the normal range after the hardware installation engineers install the FOAscorrectly according to the engineering design documents.

4.1 Commissioning a System Without Optical AmplifiersWhen commissioning a system without optical amplifiers (OAs), pay attention to the receiveoptical power of OTU boards.

4.2 Commissioning a System with Optical AmplifiersWhen commissioning the optical power of a system with optical amplifiers (OAs), pay attentionto the output optical power of OAs, the receive optical power of corresponding OTU boards,and the input optical power of the DCM module.

4.3 Checking the Optical Power Commissioning ResultsWhen optical power commissioning is complete, you need to check the optical powercommissioning results.

OptiX OSN 1800 Compact Multi-Service Edge OpticalTransport PlatformCommissioning and Configuration Guide 4 Commissioning Optical Power


12

4.1 Commissioning a System Without Optical AmplifiersWhen commissioning a system without optical amplifiers (OAs), pay attention to the receiveoptical power of OTU boards.

General RequirementsThe general requirements for commissioning the optical power of a system without OAs are asfollows:

l The optical power after commissioning must be within the permitted range.l A certain optical power margin must be reserved to ensure that optical power fluctuation

in a certain range does not affect the existing services.

Requirements on OTU Optical PowerThe output optical power of an OTU board must conform to the optical power specifications ofthe OTU board. For details on the optical power specifications of the OTU board, see theHardware Description.

After commissioning, the receive optical power of the OTU board must satisfy the followingformula: Lower threshold of the receive optical power ≤ Receive optical power of the OTUboard ≤ Upper threshold of the receive optical power. It is recommended that the receive opticalpower of an OTU board after commissioning is equal to the average value of the upper and lowerthresholds in practical application.

The optical power on the WDM side of the OTU board must satisfy the following formulas:

l Lower threshold of the receive optical power = Receiver sensitivity + 3 dBl Upper threshold of the receive optical power = Receiver overload point - 3 dB

The optical power on the client side of the OTU board must satisfy the following formulas:


General Commissioning MethodsIn general, commission a system without OAs along the signal flow, that is, from the upstreamdirection to the downstream direction, according to the requirements on the OTU optical power.

Measure the receive and transmit optical power of an OTU board by using an optical powermeter, or query the receive and transmit optical power of the OTU board on the Web LCT orU2000.



13

CAUTIONIn the commissioning process, ensure that the input optical power of an OTU board (either theWDM or client side) is lower than the optical power at the overload point to prevent the receiveroptical module from being damaged or prevent the existing services from being affected.Exercise caution especially when an APD receiver optical module is used because the overloadpoint of such an optical module is only -9 dBm. Hence, connect a fiber loosely or do not connecta fiber to the input optical port on the OTU board before measuring the actual input opticalpower.

Figure 4-1 Example of a system without OAs

MUX

DUX

OTU

OTUOTU

A

A

OTU MUX

DUX

OTU

OTU

B

B

B

A

If the receive optical power on the WDM side of the OTU (recorded as P1) fails to meet theoptical power requirement, do as follows:

l If P1 is higher than the upper threshold of the receive optical power, attach an appropriatefixed optical attenuator to the receive optical port (point B in Figure 4-1) on the WDMside of the OTU board to ensure that P1 meets the optical power requirement.

l If P1 is lower than the lower threshold of the receive optical power, substitute a fixed opticalattenuator with lower attenuation for the existing fixed optical attenuator or remove thefixed optical attenuator attached to the receive optical port (point B in Figure 4-1) on theWDM side of the OTU board. If P1 still fails to meet the optical power requirement afterthe fixed optical attenuator is removed, check whether the fiber attenuation on the line isproper and whether the network design data is correct.

If the receive optical power on the client side of the OTU (recorded as P2) fails to meet theoptical power requirement, do as follows:

l If P2 is higher than the upper threshold of the receive optical power, attach an appropriatefixed optical attenuator to the receive optical port (point A in Figure 4-1) on the client sideof the OTU board to ensure that P2 meets the optical power requirement.

l If P2 is lower than the lower threshold of the receive optical power, substitute a fixed opticalattenuator with lower attenuation for the existing fixed optical attenuator or remove thefixed optical attenuator attached to the receive optical port (point A in Figure 4-1) on theclient side of the OTU board. If P2 still fails to meet the optical power requirement afterthe fixed optical attenuator is removed, check whether the transmit optical power of theupstream equipment is within the permitted range, whether the fiber attenuation on the lineis proper, and whether the network design data is correct.



14

If the output optical power of the OTU board fails to meet the optical power requirement onOTU boards, replace the corresponding optical module.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsOptical power meter, Web LCT or U2000, fiber jumpers (two FC/PC-FC/PC, LC/PC-LC/PC,and LC/PC-FC/PC fiber jumpers), several fixed optical attenuators (3 dB, 5 dB, 7 dB, 10 dB,and 15 dB), fiber adapters, fiber cleaning tissue or cassette cleaner, and compressed air cleaner.

4.2 Commissioning a System with Optical AmplifiersWhen commissioning the optical power of a system with optical amplifiers (OAs), pay attentionto the output optical power of OAs, the receive optical power of corresponding OTU boards,and the input optical power of the DCM module.

General RequirementsThe general requirements for commissioning the optical power of a system with OAs are asfollows:

l The optical power after commissioning must be within the permitted range.l A certain optical power margin must be reserved to ensure that optical power fluctuation

in a certain range does not affect the existing services.l The optical power after commissioning must meet the requirements on system expansion.

Requirements on OTU Optical PowerThe output optical power of an OTU board must conform to the optical power specification ofthe OTU board. For details on the specifications of the OTU board, see the HardwareDescription.

After commissioning, the receive optical power of the OTU board must satisfy the followingformula: Lower threshold of the receive optical power ≤ Receive optical power of the OTUboard ≤ Upper threshold of the receive optical power. In practical application, it isrecommended to commission the optical power according to the following formula: Receiveoptical power of an OTU board = Average value of the upper and lower receive optical powerthresholds + 2 dB.

The optical power on the WDM side of the OTU board (PIN receiver optical module) mustsatisfy the following formulas:


The optical power on the WDM side of the OTU board (APD receiver optical module) mustsatisfy the following formulas:


The optical power on the client side of the OTU board must satisfy the following formulas:

l Lower threshold of the receive optical power = Receiver sensitivity + 2 dB



15

l Upper threshold of the receive optical power = Receiver overload point - 2 dB

Requirements on Multiplexer Board Optical PowerCommission the optical power of each wavelength before the wavelengths are multiplexed (inputoptical power of a multiplexer board) according to the following formula: Average optical powerof a single wavelength - 2 dB ≤ Optical power of a single wavelength ≤ Average optical powerof a single wavelength + 2 dB.

Requirements on OA Optical PowerThe average output optical power of the wavelengths of an OA must be equal to the nominaloutput optical power for a single wavelength. In this case, the following requirements must bemet:

l The average output optical power of the wavelengths of an OA is measured by connectingan optical spectrum analyzer to the OUT optical port on the OA.

l Nominal output optical power for a single wavelength = Maximum total optical power ofthe OA - 10lgN (N represents the maximum number of wavelengths permitted by thesystem). For example, the maximum total optical power of the OA is 17 dBm. If the systemis designed as a 40-channel system, the nominal output optical power for a singlewavelength is 1 dBm as calculated by using the preceding formula.

The output optical power of a single wavelength of the OA should be equal to or close to thenominal output optical power for a single wavelength.

Requirements on DCM Optical PowerIf a DCM module is configured in a system, the optical power of a single wavelength input tothe DCM module must be equal to or lower than -3 dBm.

General Commissioning MethodsIn general, commission a system with OAs along the signal flow, that is, from the upstreamdirection to the downstream direction, according to the requirements on the OA optical power,OTU optical power, and DCM optical power.

The optical power of an OTU board is commissioned in the same way regardless of in a systemwith OAs or a system without OAs. For the detailed methods of commissioning the optical powerof an OTU board, see 4.1 Commissioning a System Without Optical Amplifiers.

CAUTIONIn the commissioning process, ensure that the input optical power of an OTU board (either theWDM or client side) is lower than the optical power at the overload point to prevent the receiveroptical module from being damaged or prevent the existing services from being affected.Exercise caution especially when an APD receiver optical module is used because the overloadpoint of such an optical module is only -9 dBm. Hence, do not connect a fiber or connect a fiberloosely to the input optical port on the OTU board before measuring the actual input opticalpower.



16

Figure 4-2 Example of a system with OAs

OA2

MUX2

DUX1

OTU

OTU

B

A

FE

MUX1OTU

OTUOA1D

C

C

G

A

A

DUX2

OTU

OTUOA3

B

B

Connect an optical spectrum analyzer to the OUT optical port on an OA, and then measure theoutput optical power of a single wavelength and the average output optical power of thewavelengths of the OA. If the output optical power of a single wavelength of the OA fails tomeet the optical power requirement, adjust the optical attenuator at the WDM-side output opticalport on the upstream OTU board or adjust the optical attenuator at the input optical port on theOA to ensure that the optical power of the OA meets the optical power requirements.

See Figure 4-2. In the case of OA1, do as follows:

l If the average output optical power of wavelengths is higher than the nominal output opticalpower for a single wavelength, increase the attenuation of the optical attenuator at the inputoptical port (point as D in Figure 4-2) on the OA to ensure that the average optical powerof wavelengths is equal to the nominal output optical power for a single wavelength.

l If the average output optical power of wavelengths is lower than the nominal output opticalpower for a single wavelength, decrease the attenuation of the optical attenuator at the inputoptical port (point as D in Figure 4-2) on the OA to ensure that the average optical powerof wavelengths is equal to the nominal output optical power for a single wavelength.

l In the case of the output optical power of a specific wavelength, adjust the optical attenuatorat the output optical port (point C in Figure 4-2) on the corresponding OTU board to ensurethat the output optical power of this wavelength from the OA is equal to or close to thenominal output optical power for a single wavelength.

In the case of OA2, adjust the optical attenuator at point E in Figure 4-2 to ensure that the averageoptical power of wavelengths is equal to the nominal output optical power for a singlewavelength. If the average output optical power of wavelengths cannot be equal to the nominaloutput optical power for a single wavelength after the attenuation is adjusted to 0, remove theoptical attenuator. If the optical power requirement is still not met, check whether the networkdesign data is correct.

In the case of OA3, adjust the input optical power of the MUX2 board at the upstream station,and then adjust the optical attenuator at point F in Figure 4-2 to ensure that the average outputoptical power of wavelengths of the OA is equal to the nominal output optical power for a single



17

wavelength. The methods of commissioning the input optical power of the MUX2 board are asfollows:

1. Measure the optical power of each pass-through wavelength at the input optical port on theMUX2 board and then calculate the average optical power of these pass-throughwavelengths. In the case of a multiplexed pass-through wavelength, measure the averageoptical power by using an optical spectrum analyzer. In the case of a single pass-throughwavelength, measure the optical power of this pass-through wavelength directly by usingan optical power meter.

2. Measure the optical power of a single add wavelength at the input optical port on the MUX2board and calculate the average optical power of a single add wavelength.

3. Do as follows to adjust the optical power of corresponding wavelengths:

l If the average optical power of a single pass-through wavelength is lower than theaverage optical power of a single add wavelength, adjust the optical attenuator at pointG in Figure 4-2 to ensure that the optical power of a single add wavelength satisfies thefollowing formula: Average optical power of a single pass-through wavelength - 2 dB≤ Optical power of a single add wavelength ≤ Average optical power of a single pass-through wavelength + 2 dB.

l If the average optical power of a single pass-through wavelength is higher than theaverage optical power of a single add wavelength, install one optical attenuator on eachpass-through channel between the DUX1 and MUX2 boards to ensure that the averageoptical power of a single pass-through wavelength is equal to the average optical powerof a single add wavelength. In addition, adjust the attenuation of the optical attenuatorsat the output optical interfaces on other OTU boards used to add wavelengths. This isto ensure that the optical power of a single add wavelength satisfies the followingformula: Average optical power of a single pass-through wavelength - 2 dB ≤ Opticalpower of a single add wavelength ≤ Average optical power of a single pass-throughwavelength + 2 dB.

NOTE

If you want to install fixed optical attenuators (FOAs) on the pass-through channels between theDUX1 and MUX2 boards, install the FOAs with the minimum attenuation under the conditionthat the average optical power of a single pass-through wavelength is equal to or lower than theaverage optical power of a single add wavelength, ensuring the minimum loss of pass-throughwavelengths. In this case, the optical power of a single add wavelength must also satisfy thefollowing formula: Average optical power of a single pass-through wavelength - 2 dB ≤ Opticalpower of a single add wavelength ≤ Average optical power of a single pass-through wavelength+ 2 dB.

TIP

If the OPU/OBU board is configured with SFP EVOA, the attenuation value can be adjusted on the NMS.

If a DCM module is configured in the system, measure the total input optical power of the DCMmodule by using an optical power meter. Then, calculate and ensure that the actual input opticalpower of a single wavelength is equal to or lower than -3 dBm.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials

Optical power meter, optical spectrum analyzer, Web LCT or U2000, fiber jumpers (two FC/PC-FC/PC, LC/PC-LC/PC, and LC/PC-FC/PC fiber jumpers), several fixed optical attenuators(3 dB, 5 dB, 7 dB, 10 dB, and 15 dB), fiber adapters, fiber cleaning tissue or cassette cleaner,and compressed air cleaner.



18

4.3 Checking the Optical Power Commissioning ResultsWhen optical power commissioning is complete, you need to check the optical powercommissioning results.

PrerequisiteThe optical power commissioning must be complete.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsWeb LCT or U2000

Procedure

Step 1 Check whether communication of all stations on the network is normal. For the checkingmethods, see 5.1 Searching for and Creating NEs. If communication of an NE is interruptedor the NE is abnormal, check whether the fiber connection is correct onsite.

Step 2 Check whether alarms indicating excessively high or low optical power, or bit error thresholdcrossing exist on the network. For the checking and handling methods, see 7.6 Viewing CurrentAlarms on an NE and Removing Abnormal Alarms.

Step 3 Check whether before-FEC and after-FEC bit errors of the boards that support the FEC functionare normal. For the checking methods, see 7.5 Querying Bit Errors Before and After FEC.

Step 4 See the preceding procedure to check and ensure that all optical power values on the networkare normal, and then save the networkwide optical power data. For the operation methods, see7.8 Querying and Saving the Networkwide Optical Power and Alarm Data.

----End



19

5 Basic Configurations

About This Chapter

5.1 Searching for and Creating NEsYou can search for and create NEs when the NEs are connected to the NMS computer and thecommunication between NEs and the NMS is normal.

5.2 Creating Optical NEsOn the U2000 the WDM equipment is allocated to different optical NEs for management.

5.3 Changing the ID and Name of an NEThe ECC protocol uses an NE ID to uniquely identify an NE. When planning the network, youmust assign a unique ID for each NE. If an NE ID conflicts with another one, ECC routingcollision is caused. In this case, certain NEs cannot be managed.

5.4 Configuring Master and Slave ShelvesGenerally, master and slave shelves are configured before delivery and you only need to checkthe cable connections between the master and slave shelves before uploading NE data to theNMS during deployment commissioning. If no information about slave shelves is displayed afterNE data is loaded, manually configure master and slave shelves.

5.5 Changing the IP Address of an NEIf a network uses HWECC for communication, you need to change the IP address of a gatewayNE according to customer planning and you do not need to change the IP addresses of non-gateway NEs. If the network uses IP over DCC for communication, you need to change the IPaddresses of all NEs according to customer planning.

5.6 Configuring Ethernet Extended ECCIn master-slave subrack mode, you do not need to configure the Ethernet extended ECC. In non-master-slave subrack mode, when there is no OSC or ESC communication between two or moreNEs, the Ethernet ports of the NEs can be used to achieve the extended ECC communication.By default, the OptiX OSN 1800 series NEs take the auto-extended ECC communication. Whenthe number of NEs that use the extended ECC communication exceeds nine, you must set theextended ECC communication to specified mode.

5.7 Configuring IP over DCC

OptiX OSN 1800 Compact Multi-Service Edge OpticalTransport PlatformCommissioning and Configuration Guide 5 Basic Configurations


20

When the network planning adopts the IP over DCC mode for communication, you need toconfigure the DCC channel and check whether the IP routes are correct in the commissioningand configuration.

5.8 Configuring OSI over DCCWhen a network adopts OSI over DCC for communication, configure DCC channels and theprotocol parameters of each OSI layer on each NE to ensure normal DCN communication.

5.9 Connecting to the SCC Board Through a Serial PortWhen the SCC board of an NE connects to an external AC power supply, an outdoor cabinet,or a sensor system such as the access control or temperature control system through a serial port,you must set the serial port on the NE to ensure normal communication between the SCC boardand the external equipment.

5.10 Configuring Board ParametersDifferent boards implement different functions, and therefore you need to configure differentparameters in the commissioning and configuration for deployment. Set parametersappropriately for each board according to the actual network.

5.11 Configuring Protection SchemesWhen commissioning and configuring a network, you need to configure protection schemesbased on the network and service planning.

5.12 Synchronizing the NE Time with the NMS TimeWith the time synchronization function, the NE time is kept consistent with the NMS time. Inthis way, the NMS is able to record the correct time when alarms and abnormal events arereported by NEs.

5.13 Starting NE Performance MonitoringEnabling the performance monitoring function is a precondition for querying the performanceevents. If the current NE time is in the performance monitoring time range as set before, the NEmonitors its performance events automatically. If the performance monitoring time range is notset or if the current NE time is not within the performance monitoring time range, the NE doesnot monitor its performance events.

5.14 Checking Configurations in the Commissioning ProcessCorrect setting of each system parameter is the precondition for ensuring normal networkoperation.



21

5.1 Searching for and Creating NEsYou can search for and create NEs when the NEs are connected to the NMS computer and thecommunication between NEs and the NMS is normal.

Prerequisite

Communication between the NMS computer and NEs must be normal.

The IE proxy must be canceled.


Web LCT or U2000

Procedure on the Web LCT1. Connect an NE to the NMS computer directly or through a local area network (LAN) by

using a network cable. In the case of non-master-slave subrack mode, connect the networkcable to the ETH1 or ETH2&OAM optical port on the SCC board. In the case of master-slave subrack mode, connect the network cable to only the ETH1 optical port on the SCCboard of the master subrack with subrack ID .

2. Change the IP address of the NMS computer to ensure that the IP address of the NMScomputer and the IP addresses of the NEs are in the same network segment. The IP addressof the NMS computer must be different from the IP address used by an NE or a computeron the current LAN.Generally, set the IP address of the NMS computer to 129.9.0.N, in which N represents aninteger ranging from 1 to 255 and the subnet mask to 255.255.0.0. You do no need to setthe default gateway.The default IP addresses of the NEs are in the network segment of 129.9.255.255. To obtainthe IP address of an NE at a site, see B.4 Obtaining NE IP Addresses at the Site.

3. Start the server and client of the Web LCT, and then log in to the Web LCT. Both the username and password for logging in to the Web LCT are admin.

4. Search for all NEs in normal communication state. Then log in to the NEs.

(1) Click NE Search > Advanced Search in the NE List. The Search NE dialog box isdisplayed.

(2) Click Manage Domain. The Manage Domain Search dialog box is displayed.(3) Click Add, and the New Domain dialog box is displayed.(4) Set Domain Type to GNE IP Domain or GNE IP Address, and enter an IP address

in the Domain Address field.(5) Click OK.

NOTEYou can repeat step 3 through 5 to add multiple search domains.

(6) Click Cancel to exit the Manage Domain Search dialog box.(7) Select appropriate network segment IP addresses within the Domain and click

Search.



22

NOTE

l The NE search function searches out only the NEs in the specified network segment.

l When the search is in progress, you can click End Search.

(8) After the search is complete, select an NE from the list and click Add NE. A promptmessage is displayed, indicating that the NE is successfully added. Click OK.

(9) Select the NE that you want to log in and click NE Login in the lower right corner orright-click the NE and choose NE Login. In the NE Login dialog box that is displayed,enter lct and password in the User Name and Password fields, and then click OK.

TIP

You can select multiple NEs at a time by concurrently pressing Shift.

If you select the Use same user name and password to login check box, you can log in tomultiple NEs at a time by entering the user name and password only in the first line.

If you select the Use the user name and password that was used last time check box, youdo not need to enter the use name and password and the system automatically uses the username and password for login last time.

Procedure on the U20001. Ensure that communication between the NMS computer and NEs is normal. Then start and

log in to the U2000 server and client. Both the default user name and password for loggingin to the U2000 are admin.

2. Search for all NEs in normal communication state. Then log in to the NEs. The default IPaddresses of the NEs are in the network segment of 129.9.255.255.

(1) Choose File > Discovery > NE... from the Main Menu. The NE Discovery windowis displayed.

(2) Select the Transport NE Search tab.

(3) Select the search mode from the drop-down list of Search Mode.

l Sets the Search Mode as Search for NE.

a. In the Search Domain dialog box, click Add and the Input SearchDomain dialog box is displayed.

b. Set Address Type to IP Address Range of GNE, IP Address of GNE, orNSAP Address, and enter Search Address, User Name, and Password.Then, click OK.

NOTEYou can repeat the above steps to add more search domains. You can delete thesystem default search domain.

l If you use IP address to search for NEs:

l only the NEs (not across routers) in the same network segment can besearched out in normal conditions if you select the IP Address Range ofGNE because broadcasting is usually disabled for the routers in the network(to prevent network storm).

l search out the NEs in the network segment by using the IP Address ofGNE if you need to search for the NEs across routers.

l If you search for NEs by using the NSAP address, you can only select NSAPAddress.

c. In the Search for NE dialog box, you can perform the following operations:

– Select Create NE after search, and enter NE user and Password.



23

NOTE

l The default NE user is root.

l The default password is password.

– Select Upload after being created, so that the NE data can be uploadedto the U2000 after the NE is created.

NOTE

You can select all options in the Search for NE area to search for NEs, createNEs, and upload the NE data at a time.

l Sets the Search Mode is IP auto discovery.

NOTE

If you fail to enter a network segment correctly, enable IP auto discovery. After enablingIP auto discovery, you can obtain the IP address of the GNE and search out all the NEsrelated to the GNE.

CAUTIONIn the case of NEs that are connected to the NMS through the router, these NEscannot be searched out by IP auto discovery. They can be searched out only bynetwork segment.

(4) Click Next and the Result area is displayed.TIP

You can select the Display uncreated NEs to only display the uncreated NEs.

(5) Optional: Click Change NE ID. Then, the Change NE ID dialog box is displayed.Users can check against the Bar Code List by the value of Bar Code, and then modifythe NE Name, Extend NE ID, Base NE ID, and IP Address fields accordingly.

NOTE

The Bar Code List is provided by the hardware installation personnel to the softwarecommissioning personnel. The list contains the bar codes of stations.

(6) Optional: If you select only Search for NE, after the U2000 completes the search,you can select the uncreated NEs from the Relust list and click Create. The Createdialog box is displayed. Enter the NE User and Password. Click OK.

(7) Optional: Select the NEs from the Result list and click Set Gateway NE. The SetGateway NE dialog box is displayed. Enter the message, and click OK.

3. If the data of an NE is not uploaded to the NE when the NE is created, upload the NE datato ensure that the data on the NE is consistent with that on the NMS.

(1) In the Main Menu, choose Configuration > NE Configuration DataManagement.

(2) In the left topology tree, select a created NE and click . In Configuration DataManagement List, select an NE whose NE Status is Unconfigured.

(3) Click Upload. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK to start the upload.

(4) When the upload is complete, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. ClickClose.



24

Reference Informationl Obtaining the IP Address of an NE On Site

If you fail to query the IP address of an NE on the U2000 or Web LCT on site, see thissection to obtain the IP address of an NE.

l Creating a Single NEIf you have obtained the ID of an NE, you can create the NE manually.

l Creating an NE UserThe user names for logging in to an NE must be different. You can create an NE user asrequired.

l Switching a Login NE UserYou can switch a login NE user without logging out of the U2000 or Web LCT.

l Configuring NE DataYou can configure the NE data in upload or manual mode.

l Checking the Software Version of an NEAfter the NE data is configured, you can see this section to query the software version ofan NE.

l Parameter: NE AttributesDescribes the parameters associated with NE attributes.

l Parameter: NE User AttributesDescribes the parameters associated with NE user attributes.

Follow-up Procedure

See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for thesubsequent task.

5.2 Creating Optical NEsOn the U2000 the WDM equipment is allocated to different optical NEs for management.


You can create optical NEs only on the U2000.

Procedure on the U20001. Right-click in the Main Topology and choose New > NE.

2. In the Create NE dialog box that is displayed, click corresponding to Optical NE in theleft pane, and then select the type of the optical NE that you want to create.

3. Click Basic Attributes and enter the attributes such as the optical NE name according tothe customer's planning.

4. Click Resource Division and select an NE or a board from the idle optical NEs, and then

click .



25

TIP

To re-allocate the resources of an optical NE that has been created, right-click the optical NE andchoose Object Attribute. Click the Resource Division tab, select an NE or a board from the list on

the left, and then click to allocate the NE or board to the optical NE.

5. Click OK.

6. Click the Main Topology to create the optical NE icon.

Reference Informationl Changing the Name of an Optical NE

See this section to change the name of an optical NE independently.

Follow-up Procedure


5.3 Changing the ID and Name of an NEThe ECC protocol uses an NE ID to uniquely identify an NE. When planning the network, youmust assign a unique ID for each NE. If an NE ID conflicts with another one, ECC routingcollision is caused. In this case, certain NEs cannot be managed.

Prerequisite

The NE communication must be normal.


Web LCT or U2000

Precautions

CAUTIONNE ID conflict leads to unreachable of NEs. Therefore, the ID of an NE must be unique on thenetwork.

NOTE

If the IP address of an NE is not changed before you change the NE ID, the IP address of the NE varieswith the NE ID. Once the IP address of the NE is changed, the association between the NE ID and IPaddress is deleted automatically.

TIP

If an NE is unreachable after the NE ID is changed, you can change the name of the NE only after searchingfor and logging in to the NE again. Therefore, you are recommended to change the NE name beforechanging the NE ID.



26

Procedure on the Web LCT1. Query the manufacturer information about the SCC board.

(1) In the Function Tree in the NE Explorer, choose Report > Board Detail InformationReport.

(2) The Query dialog box is displayed to show the query progress.2. Obtain the bar code of the chassis from the queried information about the SCC board. The

following figure shows the bar code of the chassis.3. Find the bar code of the chassis in the station bar code return table to determine the position

and name of the station where the login NE is located. Then determine the ID and name ofthe NE according to the NE ID and name planning provided by the customer.

4. Change the name of the NE.

(1) In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > NE Attribute fromthe Function Tree.

(2) Enter Name of the NE according to the customer planning, and then click Apply.

NOTE

You can enter an NE name with a maximum of 64 characters consisting of letters, symbols,and numbers, excluding special characters that are not allowed on the interface, such as |, :,*, ?, ", <, and >.

5. Change the ID of the NE. After you change the ID of the NE, the NE will be unreachableto the NMS.

(1) In the NE Explorer, choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the Function Tree.(2) Click Modify NE ID. In the Modify NE ID dialog box that is displayed, enter values

in the New ID and New Extended ID fields, and then click OK.(3) A warning dialog box is displayed, click Yes. A dialog box indicating that the

operation is successful is displayed, click Close to complete changing the NE ID. Atthis time, the NE is unreachable.

6. Navigate to NE List and delete the unreachable NE. Search for and create NEs again.TIP

When you search for the NEs again, the NE IDs displayed on the interface are the NE IDs afterchange. The NE names, however, change to the new NE names automatically only after you createand log in to the NEs again.

NOTE

For details about searching for and creating NEs, see 5.1 Searching for and Creating NEs.

Procedure on the U20001. Query the manufacturer information about the SCC board.

(1) In the Main Menu, choose Inventory > Project Document > Board ManufacturerInformation.

(2) Select the SCC board that you want to query in the left NE node, and then click

.(3) The Query dialog box is displayed to show the query progress. When the query is

complete, an operation result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.2. Obtain the bar code of the chassis from the queried information about the SCC board. The

following figure shows the bar code of the chassis.



27

3. Find the bar code of the chassis in the station bar code return table to determine the positionand name of the station where the login NE is located. Then determine the ID and name ofthe NE according to the NE ID and name planning provided by the customer.

4. Change the name of the NE.

(1) In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > NE Attribute fromthe Function Tree.

(2) Enter Name of the NE according to the customer planning, and then click Apply.

NOTE

You can enter an NE name with a maximum of 64 characters consisting of letters, symbols,and numbers, excluding special characters that are not allowed on the interface, such as |, :,*, ?, ", <, and >.

(3) A dialog box indicating that the operation is successful is displayed. Click Close.5. Change the ID of the NE.

(1) In the NE Explorer, choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the Function Tree.(2) Click Modify NE ID. In the Modify NE ID dialog box that is displayed, enter values

in the New ID and New Extended ID fields, and then click OK.(3) A warning dialog box is displayed, click Yes. A dialog box indicating that the

operation is successful is displayed, click Close to complete changing the NE ID. Atthis time, the NE is unreachable.

Reference Informationl Deleting NEs

You may need to delete an NE after the ID or IP address of the NE is changed. In this case,see this section to delete the NE.

l Creating an NE UserThe user names for logging in to an NE must be different. You can create an NE user asrequired.

l Switching a Login NE UserYou can switch a login NE user without logging out of the U2000 or Web LCT.

l Parameter: NE AttributesDescribes the parameters associated with NE attributes.

l Parameter: NE User AttributesDescribes the parameters associated with NE user attributes.

Follow-up ProcedureSee List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for thesubsequent task.

5.4 Configuring Master and Slave ShelvesGenerally, master and slave shelves are configured before delivery and you only need to checkthe cable connections between the master and slave shelves before uploading NE data to theNMS during deployment commissioning. If no information about slave shelves is displayed afterNE data is loaded, manually configure master and slave shelves.



28

PrerequisiteThe NE ID must be set.

The master and slave shelves are correctly connected by means of cables and the communicationbetween the master and slave shelves are normal.

The communication between the NMS and the NE must be normal.


Ring NetworkWhen OSC modules are required, they can be configured on a ring network, as shown in Figure5-1. Compared with a chain network, a ring network has higher reliability.

Figure 5-1 Ring network

Slaveshelf 3SCC

Slaveshelf 2SCC

Slaveshelf 6SCC

Slaveshelf 5SCC

Slaveshelf 4SCC

ETH1

NMS

ETH1

ETH1

ETH1ETH1

ETH1

Networkcable Fiber

Mastershelf

Slaveshelf 1SCC

ETH2&OAMRM2/TM2

ETH2&OAM

RM2/TM2

ETH2&OAM

ETH2&OAM

ETH2&OAM

ETH2&OAM

ETH2&OAM

Master shelf ID: 0 Slave shelf 1 ID: 1 Slave shelf 2 ID: 2 Slave shelf 3 ID: 3Slave shelf 4 ID: 4 Slave shelf 5 ID: 5 Slave shelf 6 ID: 6

Chain NetworkA chain network can be configured with or without OSC modules.



29

l When OSC modules are configured, the chain network is as shown in Figure 5-2.

Figure 5-2 Chain network 1

ETH1

NMS

Network cable

MastershelfSCC

Slaveshelf 1SCC

Slaveshelf 2SCC

ETH1

Slaveshelf 3SCC

ETH1ETH2&OAM

ETH2&OAM

Slaveshelf 6SCC

Slaveshelf 5SCC

ETH1

Slaveshelf 4SCC

ETH1ETH2&OAM

ETH2&OAM

ETH2&OAM

ETH2&OAM

RM2/TM2

RM2/TM2

Fiber


l When no OSC module is configured, if there are only the master shelf and slave shelf 1,the chain network is as shown in Figure 5-3. If there are multiple slave shelves, the chainnetwork is as shown in Figure 5-4.


ETH1

NMS

Network cable

MastershelfSCC

Slaveshelf 1SCC

ETH2&OAM

ETH2&OAM

Master shelf ID: 0 Slave shelf 1 ID: 1



30


ETH1

NMS

Network cable

MastershelfSCC

Slaveshelf 2SCC

Slaveshelf 3SCC

ETH1ETH2&OAM ETH1

Slaveshelf 4SCC

ETH1ETH2&OAM

ETH2&OAM

ETH2&OAM

Slaveshelf 1SCC

Slaveshelf 6SCC

ETH1

Slaveshelf 5SCC

ETH1ETH2&OAM

ETH2&OAM

ETH2&OAM


NOTE

ETH1 ports in the master shelf and slave shelf 1 cannot be used for cascading the master shelf and slaveshelves.

In the case of the OptiX OSN 1800, the bar codes and shelf IDs are identified on the chassislabels. The shelf IDs refer to the IDs of physical shelves and are one-to-one corresponding tobar codes of chassis. The ID of the master shelf is 0, and the ID of a slave shelf ranges from 1to 6.

Precautions

CAUTIONl You need to back up the NE database before performing a warm reset on the SCC board of

a master shelf.l If the master shelf connected to a slave shelf is changed, you need to reset the SCC board of

the slave shelf. A warm rest is recommended.l If the communication between the master shelf and the slave shelf fails, do not perform any

configurations on the boards of the slave shelf.

Procedure on the Web LCT or U20001. Add a logical slave shelf.

You need to specify an ID for the required logical slave shelf.



31

(1) In the Main Topology, double-click an optical NE and then choose the NE from theleft pane of the NE Panel.

(2) Right-click in the upper side of the right pane and choose Add Slave Shelf from theshortcut menu. The Add Slave Shelf dialog box is displayed.

(3) In the Add Slave Shelf dialog box, set parameters and then click OK.

(4) The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation issuccessful. Click Close.

2. Associate a physical shelf.

To associate a physical shelf is to establish one-to-one mapping between the ID of a logicalshelf and the bar code of the chassis. The ID of a physical shelf is modified based on theID of the specified logical shelf. Therefore, when a physical shelf is associated, the ID ofthe shelf is modified. If the ID of the associated logical shelf is inconsistent with the shelfID on the chassis label, you need to modify the shelf ID on the chassis label so that futureinstallation and maintenance personnel will not be midguided.

NOTE

Note that the shelf ID must match cable connection between the master and slave shelf. You need tocheck whether the current cable connection needs to be modified when associating a physical shelf.For example, assume that the ID of the slave shelf connected to the input or output optical port RM2or TM2 of the OSC on the master shelf is 1. When changing the ID of the slave shelf or changingthe ID of another slave shelf to 1, you need to change the physical fiber connections.


(2) Choose the required slave shelf from the upper side of the slot layout in the right pane.Right-click the shelf and then choose Associate the Physical Shelves from theshortcut menu.

(3) Click OK in the displayed Confirm dialog box, the Associate the physical shelvesdialog box is displayed.

(4) Select the bar code of the physical slave shelf whose ID needs to be changed from thePhysical Shelves Code drop-down list, and then click OK. The ID of the physicalslave shelf is changed to that of the logical slave shelf.

3. Optional: Change names of the master and slave shelves.


(2) Choose the required master or slave shelf from the upper side of the slot layout in theright pane. Right-click the shelf and then choose Modify Shelf Attribute from theshortcut menu to display the Modify Shelf Attribute dialog box.

(3) Change the Shelf name and click OK.

Reference Information

See the Feature Description for more information about master and slave shelves.

Follow-up Procedure




32

5.5 Changing the IP Address of an NEIf a network uses HWECC for communication, you need to change the IP address of a gatewayNE according to customer planning and you do not need to change the IP addresses of non-gateway NEs. If the network uses IP over DCC for communication, you need to change the IPaddresses of all NEs according to customer planning.

PrerequisiteThe NE communication must be normal.


Precautions

CAUTIONIf the IP address of the NE and that of the computer where the U2000 or Web LCT server islocated are in different network segments, the communication between the U2000 or Web LCTand the NE is interrupted. In this case, you need to configure the IP address of the NE and thatof the computer where the U2000 or Web LCT server is located so that the two IP addresses arein the same network segment to recover the communication. Due to the restriction of the SQLdatabase, after changing the IP address of the computer where the U2000 or Web LCT server islocated, you need to close the client and server of the U2000 or Web LCT. Then restart thecomputer and the server and client of the U2000 or Web LCT.

Procedure on the Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, select Communication > Communication Parameters from

Function Tree.2. Enter the IP address in the IP:, and click Apply.3. Click OK after the warning dialog box pops up.4. Click OK after the warning dialog box about communication interruption between NEs

pops up.5. Click Close after the Result dialog box is displayed.

NOTE

If the IP address of the NE and the IP address of the Web LCT server are in the same network segmentafter you change the IP address of the NE, the communication between the Web LCT and the NE is normal.

If the IP address of the NE and the IP address of the Web LCT server are in the different network segmentafter you change the IP address of the NE, the communication between the Web LCT and the NE isabnormal. Navigate to NE List and delete the NE whose IP address is changed and communication isabnormal. You need to configure the IP address of the computer where the Web LCT server is located andthat of the NE so that the two IP addresses are in the same network segment to recover the communication.Search for and create NEs again. For details about searching for and creating NEs, see 5.1 Searching forand Creating NEs.



33

Procedure on the U20001. In the NE Explorer, select Communication > Communication Parameters from

Function Tree.2. Enter the IP address in the IP:, and click Apply.3. Click OK after the warning dialog box pops up.4. Click OK after the warning dialog box about communication interruption between NEs

pops up.5. Click Close after the Result dialog box is displayed.

NOTE

You cannot log in to the NE after you change the IP address of the NE on the U2000. To log in to the NE,delete the original NE and create the NE again.

Reference Informationl Modifying Gateway NE Parameters

In addition to the IP address, you need to modify other parameters of a gateway NEaccording to the network condition. In this case, see this section to modify the parametersof a gateway NE.

l Changing the Affiliated Gateway NE of an NETo adjust the DCN network structure, you may need to change the affiliated gateway NEsof certain NEs.


5.6 Configuring Ethernet Extended ECCIn master-slave subrack mode, you do not need to configure the Ethernet extended ECC. In non-master-slave subrack mode, when there is no OSC or ESC communication between two or moreNEs, the Ethernet ports of the NEs can be used to achieve the extended ECC communication.By default, the OptiX OSN 1800 series NEs take the auto-extended ECC communication. Whenthe number of NEs that use the extended ECC communication exceeds nine, you must set theextended ECC communication to specified mode.

PrerequisiteThe communication between NEs must be normal.


Background InformationThe extended ECC communication has the following two modes:

l Automatic mode: Extended ECC connections are established automatically. This mode isconvenient but extra connections are established. Therefore, the resource utilization ratio



34

is low and this mode is recommended to be used when the number of NEs is smaller thannine.

l Specified mode: Extended ECC connections are established according to the specifiedserver and client. In this mode, the connections are reliable and the bandwidth utilizationratio is high. In normal cases, use the specified mode to establish extended ECCconnections. An NE cannot operate in both modes at the same time to establish extendedECC communication with another NE.

In the case of Ethernet extended ECC, a server NE can be connected to a maximum of eightclient NEs and a client NE can serve as the server NE of another extended ECC group. Generally,set an NE that is not configured with the supervisory channel (ESC or OSC) as a client NE andan NE that is configured with the supervisory channel (ESC or OSC) as a server NE.

You can set the ECC extended mode on site or remotely. When setting the ECC extended moderemotely, you need to set client NEs first and then server NEs under the condition thatcommunication between NEs and the NMS is normal.

When setting the ECC extended mode remotely, set an NE without the supervisory channel (ESCor OSC) first and then an NE with the supervisory channel (ESC or OSC). In the case of an NEwithout the supervisory channel, the NE is unreachable and communication between the NMSand the NE fails after the ECC extended mode is set remotely. The communication is restoredautomatically after an NE with the supervisory channel at the same station as the NE withoutthe supervisory channel is set.

For example, a station has ten NEs. The supervisory channel (ESC or OSC) is configured onNE A. Figure 5-5 shows the network topology. Table 5-1 provides the IP addresses of the NEsand the ECC setting plan.

NE A is the server NE. NE I is a client NE of NE A and the server NE of NE J.

Figure 5-5 NE connections at a station

DCN

H

C D E

FG

A B

IJ

NOTENEs at the station are cascaded by network cables.



35

Table 5-1 ECC setting plan

NEName

NE IP Address Configuration on theServer

Configuration on theClient

IP Address Port Opposite IPAddress

Port

A 10.0.0.1 0.0.0.0 1601 - -

B 10.0.0.2 - - 10.0.0.1 1601

C 10.0.0.3 - - 10.0.0.1 1601

D 10.0.0.4 - - 10.0.0.1 1601

E 10.0.0.5 - - 10.0.0.1 1601

F 10.0.0.6 - - 10.0.0.1 1601

G 10.0.0.7 - - 10.0.0.1 1601

H 10.0.0.8 - - 10.0.0.1 1601

I 10.0.0.9 0.0.0.0 1602 10.0.0.1 1601

J 10.0.0.10 - - 10.0.0.9 1602

When setting the extended ECC communication mode at the station remotely, observe thefollowing sequence:

J → I client → H, G, F, E, D, C, and B → A server → I server

During the configuration, the status of the communication between the NMS and NEs changesfrequently.

l After the setting on NE J is complete, the communication between the NMS and NE J fails.l After the setting on NE I client is complete, the communication between the NMS and NE

I fails.l After the settings on NEs H, G, F, E, D, C, and B are complete, the communication between

the NMS and NEs H, G, F, E, D, C, and B fails.l After the setting on NE A server is complete, the communication between the NMS and

NEs B, C, D, E, F, G, H and I is restored automatically.l After the setting on NE I server is complete, the communication between the NMS and NE

J is restored automatically.



36

Precautions

CAUTIONWhen setting the ECC extended mode remotely, ensure that the configuration sequence iscorrect. That is, modify the ECC extended mode of opposite non-gateway NEs first and then theECC extended mode of the gateway NE. Otherwise, the communication between the NMS andthe unreachable NE cannot be restored automatically. In this case, onsite resetting is required.

CAUTIONDo not set the extended ECC mode for the communication between gateway NEs of subnets. Inaddition, you are recommended not to set a gateway NE but an NE closest to the gateway NEas a server NE.

CAUTIONTo ensure normal communication, the ECC extended mode of the NEs that adopt the Ethernetextended ECC communication must match. The match requirements are as follows:l If you set the ECC extended mode to automatic mode for an NE, you need to set the ECC

extended mode also to automatic mode for the opposite NE.l If you set the ECC extended mode to specified mode for an NE, you need to set the ECC

extended mode also to specified mode for the opposite NE. In addition, the two NEs mustbe of the client-server relationship. That is, if an NE serves as the server, the opposite NEmust be the client.

NOTE

When setting the ECC extended mode remotely, you are recommended to work out the ECC setting planin advance to ensure that the settings are correct.

Procedure on the Web LCT or U20001. Query and record the IP addresses of the server NEs specified in ECC planning.

(1) In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Communication > CommunicationParameters from the Function Tree.

(2) Click Refresh. Then view the current IP address of the NE.2. Correctly plan the sequence for setting extended ECC modes on NEs, and then set the ECC

extended modes for client and server NEs by strictly complying with the sequence.

(1) In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Communication > ECCManagement from the Function Tree.

(2) Click Query and check the current ECC mode of the NE.(3) In the right function panel, set ECC Extended Mode to Specified mode.



37

l For a client NE, set extended ECC according to steps 2.4 and 2.5.

l For a server NE, set extended ECC according to steps 2.6 and 2.7.

l For an NE that serves as both client and server, set extended ECC for the clientaccording to steps 2.4 and 2.5 and for the server according to steps 2.6 and 2.7.

(4) In the Set Client area, enter the IP address and port number of the server NE in theOpposite IP field and Port fields respectively.

NOTE

l The IP address of each NE must be unique and on the same subnet.

l A client NE can serve as the server NE for NEs at a lower level. In this case, the server andclient ports of the NE must be different. That is, the port number that is set in the SetClient area is used for the communication between the NE and the server NE and must bedifferent from the port number set for the server of the NE.

l The port number is in the range of 1601 to 1699, for example, 1610.

(5) Click Apply in the Set Client area to complete the setting of the extended ECC onthe client NE.

NOTE

If the client NE is set remotely, the NE is unreachable and the communication between theNMS and NE fails. After the ECC extended mode on the server NE of the client NE is setcorrectly, the communication restores automatically.

(6) In the Set Server area, enter the port number that is the same as the port of the clientNE in the Port field.

NOTE

l The port number is used by the local NE for communication with the client NE.

l The port number of the server NE must be the same as the port number of the client NE.

(7) Click Apply in the Set Server area to complete the setting of the extended ECC onthe server NE.

3. Optional: Disable the DCN function of the vacant slots.

(1) In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Communication > DCCManagementfrom the Function Tree.

(2) Choose the DCC Parameters tab, and set DCC Status of Vacant Slot to Disabled.

(3) Click Apply.

NOTE

If they are required in a subsequent phase, insert the board into the subrack and add the logical board. Andthen, enable the DCN channel of the board in DCC Management tab.

Reference Informationl Obtaining the IP Address of an NE Onsite

If you fail to query the IP address of an NE on the U2000 or Web LCT on site, see thissection to obtain the IP address of an NE.

Follow-up Procedure




38

5.7 Configuring IP over DCCWhen the network planning adopts the IP over DCC mode for communication, you need toconfigure the DCC channel and check whether the IP routes are correct in the commissioningand configuration.

Prerequisite

The communication between NEs must be normal.

The IDs and IP addresses of NEs must be set.

The communication between the NMS and NEs must be normal.


Web LCT or U2000

Procedure on the Web LCT or U20001. Create a DCC channel.

When creating a DCC channel, you need to specify the interface, channel type, and protocolof the channel. When configuring IP over DCC:

l Select a line interface or an external clock interface as the port of the DCC channelaccording to actual network planning.

l Set the channel type to the same as the channel used by the interconnected third-partyequipment. If a network consists of only the OptiX OSN 1800 equipment, it isrecommended to use the default channel type (GCC0) for OTU boards.

l Set the protocol type to TCP/IP.

NOTEIf a DCC channel is available, change Protocol Type of the channel to TCP/IP.

(1) In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Communication > DCCManagement from the Function Tree.

(2) Click the DCC Management tab and click Create.

(3) In the displayed dialog box, set the Port, Channel, and Protocol Type fields.

(4) Click Apply to complete configuring the DCC channel of the NE.

2. Query IP routes. Check whether the IP routes and their parameters in the routing table arethe same as planed.

In normal situation, a gateway NE must have the routes to the IP addresses of all the non-gateway NEs that are managed by the gateway NE and the route to the Web LCT orU2000 server.

(1) In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Communication > IP Stack ProtocolManagement from the Function Tree.

(2) Click the IP Route Management tab, and then view the IP routes.

3. Optional: Disable the DCN function of the vacant slots.



39


(2) Choose the DCC Parameters tab, and set DCC Status of Vacant Slot to Disabled.(3) Click Apply.

NOTE


Reference Informationl Enabling the Proxy ARP

Generally, the NMS accesses NEs on the entire network through gateway NEs. To enablethe NMS to access remote NEs directly through the IP network layer, you need to firstenable the proxy ARP function of a gateway NE, and then configure a static route to theNMS on each remote NE.

l Configuring the IP Static Route for an NEYou need to enable the proxy ARP function of the gateway NE of an NE before configuringthe IP static route for the NE.

l Querying the OSPF Protocol StatusIf certain IP routes are unavailable, contact Huawei engineers to adjust the OSPF protocolparameters used by the NEs. Ensure that the OSPF function is available to all the NEs.


5.8 Configuring OSI over DCCWhen a network adopts OSI over DCC for communication, configure DCC channels and theprotocol parameters of each OSI layer on each NE to ensure normal DCN communication.

PrerequisiteThe NE ID must be set.

The communication between NEs must be normal.

The communication between the NMS and NEs must be normal.




40

Precautions

CAUTIONRemote NEs will be unreachable to the NMS in the configuration process of OSI over DCC.Therefore, configure the NEs one by one according to the sequence from far to near whenremotely configuring OSI over DCC.

Procedure on the Web LCT or U20001. Change the protocol type and set the LAPD role for each DCC channel. Set the physical-

layer and data link-layer protocol parameters of the OSI protocol stack.When a network adopts OSI over DCC for communication, set the protocol type of a DCCchannel to OSI and set the LAPD role at one end of a DCC channel to User and the LAPDrole at the other end to Network.When creating a DCC channel, specify the port, channel type, protocol type, and LAPDroles of the DCC channel. When configuring OSI over DCC, take the followingprecautions:l Select a line port as the resident port of a DCC channel based on the actual network

planning.l Set the channel type to the same as the channel type set on the interconnected third-

party equipment. If a network consists of only the OptiX OSN 1800 equipment, it isgenerally recommended to set the channel type of an OTU board to the default valueGCC0.

l Set the protocol type to OSI.l For the two ends of a DCC channel, set the LAPD role to User at one end and to Network

at the other end.Generally, DCC channels have been automatically created. If DCC channels are deleted,you can create them again.

(1) In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Communication > DCCManagement from the Function Tree.

(2) Click the DCC Management tab and click Create.(3) In the displayed dialog box, set the Port, Channel, and Protocol Type fields.(4) Click Apply to complete configuring the DCC channel of the NE.

2. Set the node type of an NE and the network-layer protocol parameters of the OSI protocolstack based on the network planning.The node type of an NE can be ES, L1, and L2.l The default node type of an NE is L1.l If inter-domain routing is required, change the node type of an NE to L2. Generally, set

two L2 NEs (whose node types are L2) in a domain so that the two NEs function asmutual backup.

TIPAll gateway NEs (GNEs) are L2 NEs.

For convenient network expansion, it is not recommended to set the node type of an NE toES.



41

(1) Select an NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > OSI Management fromthe Function Tree.

(2) Click the Network Layer Parameters tab and set the CLNS role.(3) Click Apply and click OK in the Confirm dialog box. A message is displayed

indicating that the SCC board will be reset.(4) Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.

3. Set the network service access point (NSAP) domain address of each NE and the transport-layer protocol parameters of the OSI protocol stack based on the network planning.The NSAP domain addresses of NEs in the same L1 domain must be the same.If a GNE communicates with the NMS by using the TP4 protocol of the OSI protocol stack,the communication between the GNE and the NMS will be interrupted after you changethe NSAP domain address of an NE. Therefore, it is recommended to set the communicationmode between a GNE and the NMS to IP gateway mode, and then change thecommunication mode to TP4 after configuring the NSAP domain address of each NE.

(1) In the NE Explorer, Select Communication > Communication Parameters fromFunction Tree.

(2) Enter the NSAP address, and click Apply.(3) Click OK after the Warning dialog box pops up.(4) Click OK after the dialog box about communication interruption between NEs pops

up.(5) Click Close after the Result dialog box is displayed.

4. Set a GNE to the OSI GNE based on the network planning.When setting a GNE to the OSI GNE, specify the NSAP address and transport serviceaccess point (TSAP) of the GNE. TSAP is the port number that is used by the GNE for theTP4 protocol communication. The default value of TSAP is 8888 and cannot be changed.After setting a GNE to the OSI GNE, start the NMS or router connected to the GNE andset the relevant OSI protocol parameters for the NMS or router to ensure normalcommunication between the GNE and the NMS or router.Generally, it is recommended to set a GEN to the IP GNE, reducing configurations on theinterconnected NMS or router.

(1) Choose Administration > DCN Management from the Main Menu.(2) Close the displayed Filter NE dialog box. Click the GNE tab.(3) Select the GNE to be modified in the displayed Filter GNE dialog box. The NE is

shown in list of GNE tab.(4) Select the NE in the list, right-click and choose Modify GNE from the shortcut menu.(5) In the Modify GNE dialog box displayed, set the parameters.(6) Click OK. In the Warning dialog box that is displayed, click OK.

5. Query the OSI routes and check whether the OSI routes and their parameters in the routingtable are the same as planed.

(1) In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Communication > IP Stack ProtocolManagement from the Function Tree.

(2) Click the IP Route Management tab, and then view the IP routes.

In normal cases:l The L1 routing table of an L1 NE contains routes to all NEs in the local domain.



42

l The L1 routing table of an L2 NE contains routes to all NEs in the local domain and theL2 routing table of the L2 NE contains routes to all other L2 NEs.

l A GNE has the route to the NMS and the routes to all L2 NEs in the domain where theNMS is located.

l A GNE has the routes to all non-GNEs.6. Optional: Disable the DCN function of the vacant slots.


(2) Choose the DCC Parameters tab, and set DCC Status of Vacant Slot to Disabled.(3) Click Apply.

NOTE


Reference InformationSee the Feature Description to understand more about OSI over DCC.


5.9 Connecting to the SCC Board Through a Serial PortWhen the SCC board of an NE connects to an external AC power supply, an outdoor cabinet,or a sensor system such as the access control or temperature control system through a serial port,you must set the serial port on the NE to ensure normal communication between the SCC boardand the external equipment.

PrerequisitePower cables for connecting external equipment to the SCC board must be proper.


Background InformationDifferent serial ports are used by the SCC board to connect to different sets of externalequipment:

l Use the ETH2&OAM port to connect to an external AC power supply.l Use the SW&RS485 port to connect to an outdoor cabinet or a sensor system such as the

access control or temperature control system.

Select a proper connection mode for the external equipment as follows:

l Select AC external power supply for an external AC power supply.



43

l Select Outdoor cabinet power supply for an outdoor cabinet.l Select Switch for a sensor system such as the access control or temperature control system.

Procedure on the Web LCT or U20001. In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Communication > Access Control.2. In the Serial Port Access Control area, select the required object.3. Click Apply to complete the settings.


See Quick Installation and Commissioning Guide to understand the detailed procedure forinstalling serial port cables.

Follow-up Procedure


5.10 Configuring Board ParametersDifferent boards implement different functions, and therefore you need to configure differentparameters in the commissioning and configuration for deployment. Set parametersappropriately for each board according to the actual network.

The section describes only the parameter values that you need to configure in the commissioningand configuration for deployment. For the specific functions and working principles of theboards, see the Hardware Description.

5.10.1 ELOM Parameters

Prerequisite

You must have logged in to the NE where the board resides.


Web LCT or U2000

Precautions

When gray optical modules are used on the WDM side of a board, change the port type to LineSide Grey Optical Port on the U2000. For details, see Changing Port Types.

Navigation Path1. In the NE Explorer, select the board and then choose Configuration > WDM Interface

from the Function Tree.2. Select a proper navigation path according to the parameters. The details are as follows:



44

l In the case of a parameter at channel level, select By Board/Port(Channel), chooseChannel from the drop-down list, and click the Basic Attributes or AdvancedAttributes tab. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter.

l In the case of a parameter at board level, select By Board/Port(Channel) and chooseBoard from the drop-down list. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter.

NOTE

You can also select By Function and then choose the required parameter from the drop-down list.

Background Information

Timeslots can be set for services when the ELOM(COMP) board works in 1*AP8 ODU1 modeor when the TNF2ELOM board works in 1*AP8 common mode and the ports on the board workin ODU1 convergence mode. The number of timeslots that are occupied by services variesaccording to service types. Each ODU1 service requires 16 timeslots; therefore, the total numberof timeslots occupied by all client-side services that are converged into an ODU1 service mustbe 16 or smaller.

Table 5-2 lists the number of timeslots required by common services.

Table 5-2 Number of timeslots required by common services

Service Type Number ofTimeslotsRequired


GE(GFP_T)/GE(TTT-AGMP)

7 FICON 6

STM-1 1 FICON EXPRESS 12

STM-4 4 ESCON 2

STM-16 16 DVB-ASI 2

FC200 12 SDI 3

FC100 6 HDSDI 12

FE 1 HDSDI14835 12

OTU1 16 - -

Precautions

CAUTIONIf you delete a logical ELOM board and configure it again on the NMS, the original configurationof the board is deleted and the default configuration is restored.



45

Parameter DescriptionField Value Description

BoardWorkingMode

F2ELOM(COMP):l 1*AP8 ODU1

mode, 1*AP4ODU1 mode,1*AP1 ODU2mode, 1*AP2ODU2 mode,1*AP8ODU0&ODU1mode

l Default: 1*AP4ODU1 mode

F2ELOM(STND):l 1*AP8 general

mode, 1*AP1ODU2 mode,1*AP2 ODUflexmode

l Default: 1*AP8general mode

F2ELOM(COMP):l 1*AP8 ODU1 mode: The ELOM board

supports ODU1 service encapsulation and thereceived client services can be mapped into oneODU1 service.

l 1*AP4 ODU1 mode: The ELOM boardsupports ODU1 service encapsulation but thereceived client services must be mapped intodifferent ODU1 services.

l 1*AP1 ODU2 mode: The ELOM boardsupports access of one client service and mapsthe client service into one ODU2 service.

l 1*AP2 ODU2 mode: The ELOM boardsupports access of two client services and mapsthe two client services into one ODU2 service.

l 1*AP8 ODU0&ODU1 mode: The ELOMboard supports access of eight client services andmaps the eight client services into ODU0 andODU1 service.

F2ELOM(STND):l 1*AP8 general mode: The ELOM board

supports ODU0, ODU1 and ODUflex serviceencapsulation.

l *AP1 ODU2 mode: The ELOM board supportsODU2 service encapsulation.

l 1*AP2 ODUflex mode: The ELOM boardsupports ODUflex service encapsulation.

CAUTIONThe signal flow and functions of the ELOM board varyaccording to the working modes. Switching betweendifferent working modes will interrupt services that arerunning in the current working mode.



46

Field Value Description

Port WorkingMode

F2ELOM(COMP):l ODU1 non-

convergencemode (OTU1/Any->ODU1),ODU0 non-convergencemode (Any->ODU0), None(Not for Ports)

l Default: ODU1non-convergencemode (OTU1/Any->ODU1)

F2ELOM(STND):l ODU0 non-

convergencemode (Any->ODU0), ODU1convergencemode (n*Any->ODU1), ODU1non-convergencemode (OTU1/Any->ODU1),ODUflex non-convergencemode (Any->ODUflex), None(Not for Ports)

l The default modeof ports 201, 203,205, and 207 isODU1 non-convergencemode. The defaultmode of ports 202,204, 206, and 208is None (not forports).

For F2ELOM(COMP), this parameter is valid whenBoard Working Mode is set to 1*AP8ODU0&ODU1 mode.l ODU1 non-convergence mode (OTU1/Any-

>ODU1): client services are mapped into ODU1services.

l ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0):client services are mapped into ODU0 services.

l None (Not for Ports): reserved mode.For F2ELOM(STND), this parameter is valid whenBoard Working Mode is set to 1*AP8 generalmode.l ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0):

client services are mapped into different ODU0services.

l ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1):client services are mapped into one ODU1services.

l ODU1 non-convergence mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1): client services are mapped intodifferent ODU1 services.

l ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex): client services are mapped intodifferent ODUflex services.

l None (Not for Ports): reserved mode.



47


Service Type None, FE, GE(TTT-AGMP), GE(GFP-T),10GE_LAN, FC-100,FC-200, FC-400,FC-800, Infiniband2.5G, CPRI2, CPRI3,10GE WAN,STM-64, FC1200,DVB-ASI, HD-SDI,3G-SDI, CPRI6,CPRI7, FC1200,FICON 10G, STM-1,STM-4, STM-16,FICON, FICONEXPRESS, ESCON,OTU-1Default:l The default

service type foroptical ports 3(RX1/TX1), 5(RX3/TX3), 7(RX5/TX5) and 9(RX7/TX7) isOTU-1.

l The defaultservice type forother optical portsis None.

The Service Type parameter sets the type of theservice accessed at the optical interface on the clientside.NOTEl After you configure a cross-connection for the board,

setting the Service Type field fails if the service typeselected during cross-connection configuration isdifferent from the value you set for Service Type. Inthis case, you need to delete the cross-connection andset the Service Type field again.

l The service type supported by the ELOM board variesaccording to the value of Working Mode.

l Only the ELOM(COMP) board supports Infiniband2.5G services and only the ELOM(STND) boardsupports 10GE WAN, STM-64, FC1200, DVB-ASI,HD-SDI, 3G-SDI, CPRI6, and CPRI7 services.

Port Mapping Bit TransparentMapping (11.1 G),MAC TransparentMapping (10.7 G)Default: BitTransparent Mapping(11.1 G)

This parameter is valid when Service Type is set to10GE LAN.l When a board is used to transparently transmit

synchronous Ethernet services, this parametermust be set to Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G).

l Select Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G)when there are OTU2e signals on the WDM side.

l Select MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G)when there are OTU2 signals on the WDM side.

NOTEl Port mapping of the two boards that are interconnected

with each other must be consistent.



48


Channel UseStatus

Used, UnusedDefault: Used

l Set this parameter to Unused when a channelthat is not used.

l Set this parameter to Used when a channel thatis used.

For example, if the ELOM board works in 1*AP2ODU2 mode, set the status of the TX1/RX1 opticalport to Used and the status of the TX5/RX5 opticalport to Unused when only the TX1/RX1 optical portreceives services.

AutomaticLaserShutdown

Enabled, DisabledDefault: Enabled

l The default value is recommended.l On the WDM side, this automatic laser

shutdown function is not supported andtherefore cannot be set or query.

Hold-OffTime ofAutomaticLaserShutdown

0s to 2s, with a step of100 ms.Default: 0s

The default value is recommended.

Laser Status ON, OFFDefault:l WDM side: ONl Client side: OFF

The default value is recommended. In practicalapplication, set this parameter according to thescenario where the board is used.CAUTION

When NEs communicate with each other through theelectric supervisory channel (ESC) of ELOM, the NEswill be unreachable if all the lasers at ports IN1/OUT1 andIN2/OUT2 on the WDM side of the ELOM board aredisabled.

FEC WorkingState


l Enabled is recommended.l FEC Working State of the two interconnected

OTU boards must be consistent.

FEC Mode FEC, EFECDefault: FEC

This parameter is available only when you set FECWorking State to Enabled.l The default value is recommended. To improve

the error correction capability, set this parameterto EFEC.

l FEC Mode of the two boards that areinterconnected on the WDM side must beconsistent. Otherwise, services are interrupted.

NOTEThe actual value is AFEC-2, but EFEC is displayed onthe NMS.



49


OpticalInterfaceLoopback

Non-Loopback,Inloop, OutloopDefault: Non-Loopback

Set this parameter to Non-Loopback when anetwork works normally. It can be set to Inloop orOutloop to help locate a faulty point in a test or aprocess of removing a fault on a network. However,it must be set to Non-Loopback right after the testis complete or the fault is removed.When Automatic Disabling of NE Function is setto the default value Enabled, the loopback settingis automatically cancelled after Auto DisablingTime (default: 5 minutes) elapses.

OpticalInterfaceAttenuationRatio (dB)

0 to 20Default: 20

parameter provides an option to set the opticalpower attenuation of a board channel so that theoptical power of the output signals at the transmitend is within the preset range.NOTE

This parameter is only supported by the F2ELOM(STND).

Max.AttenuationRatio (dB)

20Default: 20

parameter provides an option to query the maximumattenuation rate allowed by the current optical portof a board.NOTE


Min.AttenuationRatio (dB)

0Default: 0

parameter provides an option to query the minimumattenuation rate allowed by the current optical portof a board.NOTE


Max. PacketLength

1518-9600Default: 9600

This parameter is valid only when Service Type isset to 10GE LAN, and when Port Mapping is setto MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G). It isrecommended that you use the default value.

SD TriggerCondition

SM_BIP8_SD,PM_BIP8_SD,B1_SDDefault: None

This parameter is valid only when the SD TriggerFlag is set to Enable.all the alarms can be set as the SD switchingconditions.



50


LPT Enabled Enabled, DisabledDefault: Disabled

The board supports the LPT function only whenService Type is set to FE, GE(TTT-AGMP), GE(GFP-T) or 10GE LAN.l The LPT function can work only with intra-

board 1+1 protection or ODUk SNCP protectionand cannot work with any other protection.

l Set this parameter to Enabled when you want toenable the LPT function; otherwise, keep thedefault value for this parameter.

PRBS TestStatus

Enabled, DisabledDefault: /

l Retain the default value when a network worksnormally.

l Set this parameter to Enabled for the auxiliaryboard if you need to perform a PRBS test duringdeployment commissioning. Set this parameterto Disabled after the test is complete.

ODUTimeslotConfiguration Mode

Assign random,Assign consecutiveDefault: Assignrandom

l In Assign consecutive mode, the servicemapping path can be as follows: ODU0 –>ODU1 –> ODU2 or ODU1–>ODU2.

l In Assign random mode, the service mappingpath can be as follows: ODU0–>ODU2 orODUflex–>ODU2.

NOTEThis parameter is supported only when the ELOM(STND)board works in 1*AP8 general mode.

PlannedWavelengthNo./Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz)

The parameter formatis as follows:wavelength No./optical portwavelength/frequency, forexample,60/1552.52/193.100.Default: /

This parameter is used to set the wavelength andfrequency only when the board uses TXFP moduleson the WDM side.

Planned BandType

C, CWDMDefault: C

This parameter is available only when the boarduses TXFP modules and must be set to C.

Band Type/WavelengthNo./Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz)

The parameter formatis as follows: bandtype/wavelength No./optical portwavelength/frequency, forexample, C/11/1471.00/208.170.Default: /

This parameter is for query only.



51


Band Type C, CWDMDefault: /


OpticalInterface/Channel

- -

OpticalInterfaceName

- -

5.10.2 LDE Parameters

PrerequisiteYou must have logged in to the NE where the board resides.


PrecautionsWhen gray optical modules are used on the WDM side of a board, change the port type to LineSide Grey Optical Port on the U2000. For details, see Changing Port Types.





NOTE




52


Board Mode ODU0 Mode, Non-ODU0 ModeDefault: Non-ODU0Mode

l In Non-ODU0 Mode, services are encapsulateddirectly into ODU1 signals rather than intoODU0 signals first.

l In the case of the boards that are interconnectedon the WDM side and require encapsulation atODU0 level, set this parameter to ODU0Mode. In this mode, services are encapsulatedinto ODU0 signals first and then into ODU1signals.

CAUTIONSwitching between different working modes on a boardinterrupts the services.

Service Type l When BoardMode is set toNon-ODU0Mode, thefollowing servicesare supported: GE(GFP_T),EPON_OLT,EPON_ONU, andNone.

l When BoardMode is set toODU0 Mode, thefollowing servicesare supported: GE(GFP_T), GE(TTT-AGMP),and NONE.

Default: GE(GFP_T)

In case of GE services, select a proper service typeaccording to the source of the GE services.l When Board Mode is set to Non-ODU0

Mode, this parameter should be set to GE(GFP_T).

l When Board Mode is set to ODU0 Mode,– When a board is used to transparently

transmit synchronous Ethernet services, thisparameter must be set to GE(TTT-AGMP).

– When a board is used in asynchronous mode,this parameter must be set to GE(GFP_T).

In case of EPON services, select a proper servicetype according to the optical module type.l When the board is configured with an OLT

optical module (to interconnect with the ONUside of PON equipment), set this parameter toEPON_ONU.

l When the board is configured with an ONUoptical module (to interconnect with the OLTside of PON equipment), set this parameter toEPON_OLT.

NOTEWhen the service type changes between EPON_ONU andEPON_OLT, the service type of a channel carryingEPON services must be set to GE(GFP_T) or NONEfirst. For example, when the board receives four EPONservices, the service type must be changed fromEPON_ONU to EPON_OLT. In this case, you must setthe service types of the four channels to GE(GFP_T) orNone before you change the service type toEPON_OLT.

If no services are received at the board, you can setthis parameter to None. In this case, the board doesnot report electrical-layer alarms on the channel.



53


Synchronous/Asynchronous Mode

Synchronous Mode,Asynchronous ModeDefault:Asynchronous Mode

This parameter is valid only when Board Mode isset to ODU0 Mode.l When Service Type is GE(TTT-AGMP), it is

recommended to set this parameter toSynchronous Mode, providing betterperformance for transparent transmission ofclock.

l When Service Type is GE(GFP_T), retain thedefault value for this parameter.

The boards that are interconnected with each othermust be in the same mode for transparenttransmission of clock.

ALSOverhead UseMode

Standard Mode,Compatible Mode(52TOM)Default: StandardMode

This parameter is valid only when Board Mode isset to ODU0 Mode.l Generally, retain the default value for this

parameter.l When the LDE board is interconnected with the

TN52TOM board for NG WDM products, setthis parameter to Compatible Mode(52TOM).

Channel UseStatus





Enabled, DisabledDefault: Enabled forclient-side opticalports.







l Usually, this parameter is set to ON for everyWDM-side optical port.

l In the case of client-side optical ports, retain thedefault value because Automatic LaserShutdown is usually set to Enabled.

CAUTIONIf the communication between NEs is achieved throughonly the ESC provided by the LDE board, do not disablethe WDM-side lasers on the LDE board. Otherwise, NEsbecome unreachable when neither a standby channel isavailable nor protection is configured.



54


FEC WorkingState



OTU boards must be consistent.NOTE

When the client-side optical port on the LDE boardreceives EPON services, this parameter is unavailable.



Set this parameter to Non-Loopback when anetwork works normally. It can be set to Inloop orOutloop to help locate a faulty point in a test or aprocess of removing a fault on a network. However,it must be set to Non-Loopback right after the testis complete or the fault is removed.When Automatic Disabling of NE Function is setto the default value Enabled, the loopback settingis automatically cancelled after Auto DisablingTime (default: 5 minutes) elapses.NOTE

The parameter can be set to Inloop or Outloop only whenthe GE service is accessed.

SD TriggerCondition

SM_BIP8_SD,PM_BIP8_SDDefault: None



This parameter is valid when Service Type is set toGE(GFP-T) or GE(TTT-AGMP).l The LPT function can work only with intra-

board 1+1 protection and cannot work with anyother protection.








- -



55



- -

5.10.3 LDGF Parameters








NOTE


PrecautionsTIP

In the case of the LDGF board, you can connect a portable computer to the FE port by using a networkcable when the FE port is in Used state. Then issue the ping command for connecting to the opposite clientequipment to check whether a normal connection can be established on the channel.



56


Service Type GE, GE(GFP-T)Default: GE(GFP-T)

l Usually, GE(GFP-T) is recommended. In thismode, the transmission delay is small and allcontrol protocol packets are transparentlytransmitted.

l In other cases, set this parameter to GEaccording to the service encapsulation mode.

l Service types of the two boards that areinterconnected with each other must beconsistent.

Channel UseStatus














CAUTIONIf the communication between NEs is achieved throughonly the ESC provided by the LDGF board, do not disablethe WDM-side lasers on the LDGF board. Otherwise, NEsbecome unreachable when neither a standby channel isavailable nor protection is configured.

FEC WorkingState






57





SD TriggerCondition



Max. PacketLength

1518-9600Default: 9600

This parameter is valid only when Service Type isset to GE. The default value is recommended.

Auto-Negotiationof GE

Enabled, DisabledDefault: Disabled

The Auto Negotiation parameter is available onlywhen the Service Type parameter is set to GE.l It is recommended to set this parameter to

Disabled.l If the equipment of the customer adopts the auto

negotiation, the value of the Auto Negotiationparameter must be consistent with the value ofthe Auto Negotiation parameter of theequipment of the customer.

l The Auto Negotiation parameter must beconsistent for the OTUs in the same protectiongroup.

IntelligentFiber Status


When a link is faulty, and the fault state must betransparently transmitted to the interconnectedclient-side equipment, the IF function needs to beenabled.l This parameter is valid only when Service

Type of the optical port is set to GE.l This parameter is invalid after the LPT function

of the board is enabled.


This parameter is valid when Service Type is set toGE or GE(GFP-T).l The LPT function can work only with intra-





58



The parameter formatis as follows: bandtype/wavelength No./optical portwavelength/frequency, forexample, C/11/1471.00/208.170.Default: -





- -


- -

5.10.4 LDGF2 Parameters

Prerequisite



Web LCT or U2000

Precautions








59

NOTE



BoardWorkingMode

2 x AP2 ODU0 mode,2 x AP2 ODU1 modeDefault: 2 x AP2ODU1 mode

l 2 x AP2 ODU0 mode: The ELOM boardsupports ODU0 service encapsulation.

l 2 x AP2 ODU1 mode: The ELOM boardsupports ODU1 service encapsulation.

NOTEThis parameter is only supported by the TNF2LDGF2.

Service Type TNF1LDGF2:l GE, GE(GFP-T)l Default: GE(GFP-

T)TNF2LDGF2:l GE(TTT-AGMP),

GE(GFP-T)l Default: GE(GFP-

T)

l Set this parameter according to the serviceencapsulation mode. Usually, GE(GFP-T) isrecommended. In this mode, the transmissiondelay is small and all control protocol packetsare transparently transmitted.

l Service types of the two boards that areinterconnected with each other must beconsistent.

l For the TNF2LDGF2 board, GE(TTT-AGMP)is supported only when the board works in2*AP2 ODU0 mode.

Channel UseStatus













60





CAUTIONIf the communication between NEs is achieved throughonly the ESC provided by the LDGF2 board, do notdisable the WDM-side lasers on the LDGF2 board.Otherwise, NEs become unreachable when neither astandby channel is available nor protection is configured.

FEC WorkingState







SD TriggerCondition



Max. PacketLength

1518-9600Default: 9600

This parameter is valid only when Service Type isset to GE. The default value is recommended.NOTE

This parameter is only supported by the TNF1LDGF2.



61













of the board is enabled.NOTE

This parameter is only supported by the TNF1LDGF2.





PRBS TestStatus







62








- -


- -

5.10.5 LDX Parameters

Prerequisite



Web LCT or U2000

Precautions








63

NOTE



Service Type 10GE LAN, 10GEWAN, FC-1200,FICON 10G, FC-800,FICON 8G, STM-64Default: 10GE LAN

Select a proper value according to the receivedservices.






NOTEBit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G): Supports transparentbit (11.1 G) transport for 10GE LAN signals. In this portmapping mode, transmission of signals are achieved byincreasing the OTU frame frequency. This ensures theencoding gain and correction capability of FEC. In thismode, the bit rate is 11.1 Gbit/s, which is higher than thestandard bit rate of OTU2 signals.

MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G): In this port mappingmode, 10GE LAN signals are encapsulated in the GFP-Fformat and then are mapped into standard OTU frames.This mode supports transparent transmission of only client10GE MAC frames. In this mode, the signals areencapsulated in standard OTU2 frames and the bit rate ofthe signals is 10.71 Gbit/s. In addition, the FEC/AFECcode pattern is applicable to 10GE LAN services in thismode. Originally, the FEC code pattern is intended for10G SDH services.



FEC WorkingState






64







Users only can set the FEC mode for WDM-side ports .

Channel UseStatus














CAUTIONIf the communication between NEs is achieved throughonly the ESC provided by the LDX board, the followingsituations occur when neither a standby channel isavailable nor protection is configured:

l When the LDX board is used for transparentlytransmitting the 10 Gbit/s optical signals, the NEbecomes unreachable after the lasers at the IN andOUT optical ports on the LDX board are disabled.



65





Max. PacketLength

1518-9600Default: 9600

This parameter is valid when Service Type is set to10GE LAN and Port Mapping is set to MACTransparent Mapping (10.7 G). The default valueis recommended.

SD TriggerCondition




This parameter is valid when Service Type is set to10GE LAN.l The LPT function can work only with intra-



PRBS TestStatus







Planned BandType

C, CWDMDefault: C




66








- -


- -

5.10.6 LEM18 Parameters

Prerequisite



Web LCT or U2000

Precautions


Navigation Path

Do as follows to set WDM-side port parameters on the LEM18 board:

1. In the NE Explorer, select the board and then choose Configuration > WDM Interfacefrom the Function Tree.

2. Select a proper navigation path according to the parameters. The details are as follows:




67


NOTE


Do as follows to set Ethernet port parameters on the LEM18 board:

1. In the NE Explorer, select the board and choose Configuration > Ethernet InterfaceManagement > Ethernet Interface.

2. For an external port, select External Port to display the Basic Attributes, TagAttributes, Network Attributes, or Advanced Attributes tab. Then query or setparameters on the corresponding tab.

3. For an internal port, select Internal Port to display the Tag Attributes, NetworkAttributes, or Advanced Attributes tab. Then query or set parameters on thecorresponding tab.

Parameter Description (WDM-Side Ports)Field Value Description

Service Type GE, FE, 10GE LANDefault:l The default

service type at theTX1/RX1 to TX2/RX2 port is 10GELAN.

l The defaultservice type at theTX3/RX3 toTX18/RX18 portis GE.

Service Type of the two boards that areinterconnected with each other must be consistent.

Board Mode OTN Mode, 10GEModeDefault: OTN Mode

Board Mode of the two boards that areinterconnected with each other must be consistent.l OTN Mode: The IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2

ports output OTU2 signals and can receive andprocess OTU2 signals only.

l 10GE Mode: The IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2ports output 10GE LAN signals and can receiveand process 10GE LAN signals only.

l When Board Mode is changed, signal output atthe IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2 portsimmediately changes.

Channel UseStatus






68


Laser Status ON, OFFDefault: ON

Lasers at all ports are generally set to ON.CAUTION

When NEs communicate with each other through theelectric supervisory channel (ESC) and Board Mode ofthe LEM18 board is set to OTN Mode, the NEs will beunreachable if all the lasers at ports IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2 on the WDM side of the LEM18 board are disabled.







SD TriggerCondition





SynchronousClockEnabled


Select the required clock port and set its status toEnabled.Users can enable a maximum of six ports and theyare 3(IN1/OUT1), 4(IN2/OUT2), 5(TX1/RX1), 6(TX2/RX2), and two of ports 7(TX3/RX3) to 22(TX18/RX18).

FEC WorkingState


This parameter is valid only when the BoardMode is set to OTN Mode.l Enabled is recommended.l FEC Working State of the two interconnected


FEC Mode FEC This parameter is valid only when the BoardMode is set to OTN Mode. It is always set toFEC and cannot be changed.



69











- -


- -

Parameter Description (Ethernet Ports)

Table 5-3 Basic Attributes


Port OTN mode: PORT5to PORT2210GE mode: PORT3to PORT22

Select a proper port based on actual services.

Enabled/Disabled


The attributes of a port take effect only after the portis enabled. If a port is disabled, the attributes of theport will be invalid and the service at this port willbe interrupted.



70


WorkingMode

10GE optical port:10G Full_DuplexLAN. Default: 10GFull_Duplex LAN.GE optical/electricalport: Auto-Negotiation, 1000MFull_Duplex.Default: Auto-Negotiation.FE optical port:100M Full_Duplex.Default: 100MFull_Duplex.FE electrical port:Auto-Negotiation,10M Half_Duplex,10M Full_Duplex,100M Half_Duplex,100M Full_Duplex.Default: Auto-Negotiation.

Set this parameter based on actual physical porttypes and service configurations. The value of thisparameter must be consistent with the working modeof the client equipment.

MaximumFrame

1518–9600Default: 1522

Set this parameter according to actual serviceconfigurations.It is recommended that the value be equal to orgreater than the user-defined maximum frame lengthfor transmitting data flows.

Port PhysicalParameters

Enabled/Disabled,Working Mode,Flow Control, MACLoopBack, PHYLookBack


MACLoopBack


Set this parameter to Non-Loopback when anetwork works normally. It can be set to Inloop orOutloop to help locate a faulty point in a test or aprocess of removing a fault on a network. However,it must be set to Non-Loopback right after the testis complete or the fault is removed.When Automatic Disabling of NE Function is setto the default value Enabled, the loopback setting isautomatically cancelled after Auto DisablingTime (default: 5 minutes) elapses.



71


PHYLoopBack


Set this parameter to Non-Loopback when anetwork works normally. It can be set to Inloop orOutloop to help locate a faulty point in a test or aprocess of removing a fault on a network. However,it must be set to Non-Loopback right after the testis complete or the fault is removed.When Automatic Disabling of NE Function is setto the default value Enabled, the loopback setting isautomatically cancelled after Auto DisablingTime (default: 5 minutes) elapses.

Table 5-4 Flow Control


Port OTN mode: PORT5to PORT2210GE mode: PORT3to PORT22

Select a proper port based on actual services.

Autonegotiation FlowControl Mode

Disabled, EnableDissymmetric FlowControl, EnableSymmetric FlowControl, EnableSymmetric/Dissymmetric FlowDefault: Disabled

This parameter is available only when the workingmode of an Ethernet port is auto-negotiation.l Disabled: The flow control function is disabled

in both the transmit and receive directions.l Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control: Flow

control frames cannot be received but can betransmitted.

l Enable Symmetric Flow Control: Only PAUSEframes can be transmitted and received.

l Enable Symmetric/Dissymmetric Flow: Theauto-negotiation mechanism determines whetherto enable symmetric or asymmetric flow control.

Non-Autonegotiation FlowControl Mode

Disabled, EnableSymmetric FlowControl, Send Only,Receive OnlyDefault: Disabled

This parameter is available only when the workingmode of an Ethernet port is non-autonegotiation.l The flow control function is disabled in both the

transmit and receive directions of a port.l Enable Symmetric Flow Control: In non-

autonegotiation mode, flow control frames can betransmitted and received.

l Send Only: In non-autonegotiation mode, flowcontrol frames can be transmitted only.

l Receive Only: In non-autonegotiation mode,flow control frames can be received only.



72

Table 5-5 TAG Attributes


Port OTN mode: PORT5-PORT22 orVCTRUNK1-VCTRUNK310GE mode:PORT3-PORT22 orVCTRUNK3

Select a proper port based on actual services.NOTE

Do not select PORT5 and VCTRUNK3 at the same time.

TAG Tag Aware, Access,HybridDefault: Tag Aware

This parameter is valid only when Port Attributesis set to UNI.Set this parameter based on VLAN IDs carried bysupported services and types of required Ethernetservices.

DefaultVLAN ID

1 to 4095Default: 1

Specifies a default VLAN ID for an untagged packet.NOTE

This parameter is invalid when TAG is set to Tag Aware.

VLANPriority

0 to 7Default: 0

Indicates the priority of Default VLAN ID at a port.The priority ascends with the parameter value.NOTE

This parameter is invalid when TAG is set to Tag Aware.

EntryDetection


Determines whether a port detects packets based onthe TAG of a port.

Table 5-6 Network Attributes


Port OTN mode: PORT5-PORT22 orVCTRUNK1-VCTRUNK310GE mode: PORT3-PORT22 orVCTRUNK3


Do not select PORT5 and VCTRUNK3 at thesame time.



73


Port Attributes UNI, C-Aware, S-AwareDefault: UNI

l UNI: The TAG parameter can be set toTag Aware, Access, or Hybrid.

l C-Aware: The TAG parameter isinvalid. In addition, a port identifies theexternal VLAN of a tagged packet as aC-VLAN and transparently transmitsuntagged packets.

l S-Aware: The TAG parameter is invalid.In addition, a port identifies the externalVLAN of a tagged packet as an S-VLANand discards untagged packets.

NOTEl For EPL services, the default value is UNI.

l For QinQ services, this parameter can onlybe set to C-Aware and S-Aware.

Table 5-7 Advanced Attributes


Port OTN mode: PORT5-PORT22 orVCTRUNK1-VCTRUNK310GE mode: PORT3-PORT22 orVCTRUNK3


Do not select PORT5 and VCTRUNK3 at thesame time.

Enabling BroadcastPacket Suppression


When this parameter is set to Enabled,broadcast packets are suppressed if the ratio(the bandwidth value of the current port thatbroadcast packets occupy to the totalbandwidth value of the port) is greater thanthe Broadcast Packet SuppressionThreshold value, so that the bandwidthratio of the current port that broadcastpackets occupy is lower than the thresholdvalue.

Broadcast PacketSuppressionThreshold

10% to 100%Default: 30%

This parameter functions with the EnablingBroadcast Packet Suppression.

5.10.7 LOE Parameters



74








NOTE




75


Service Type None, GE, GE(GFP-T), EPON_OLT,EPON_ONUDefault: GE(GFP-T)

In case of GE services:l Usually, GE(GFP-T) is recommended. In this

mode, the transmission delay is small and allcontrol protocol packets are transparentlytransmitted.

l In other cases, set this parameter to GEaccording to the service encapsulation mode.

In case of EPON services:l When the board is configured with an OLT

optical module (to interconnect with the ONUside of PON equipment), set this parameter toEPON_ONU.

l When the board is configured with an ONUoptical module and (to interconnect with theOLT side of PON equipment), set this parameterto EPON_OLT.

NOTEWhen the service type changes between EPON_ONU andEPON_OLT, the service type of a channel carryingEPON services must be set to GE(GFP-T) or NONE first.For example, when the board receives four EPONservices, the service type must be changed fromEPON_ONU to EPON_OLT. In this case, you must setthe service types of the four channels to GE(GFP-T) orNone before you change the service type toEPON_OLT.

If no services are received at the board, you can setthe service type to None. In this case, the board doesnot report electrical-layer alarms on the channel.

Port Mapping GFP_OTU2,SDH_OTU2Default: GFP_OTU2

The default value is recommended. Differentservice types are supported in the two mappingmodes.l GFP_OTU2: None, GE(GFP-T), EPON_OLT,

and EPON_ONU are supported.l SDH_OTU2: GE and GE(GFP-T) are

supported.NOTEl Port mapping of the two boards that are interconnected


l The value of this parameter can be changed only afterthe service type is set to GE(GFP-T).

l When the LOE board is interconnected with the LOGboard for NG WDM products, set this parameter toSDH_OTU2.



76


Board Mode Common Mode,Optical ElectricalSeparate ModeDefault: CommonMode

l The default value is recommended.l This parameter must be set to Optical Electrical

Separate Mode when the board needs to becompatible with NE software of an old version.In this mode, the logical optical port 201 isavailable.

Channel UseStatus














CAUTIONIf the communication between NEs is achieved throughonly the ESC provided by the LOE board, do not disablethe WDM-side lasers on the LOE board. Otherwise, NEsbecome unreachable when neither a standby channel isavailable nor protection is configured.

FEC WorkingState






77




Set this parameter to Non-Loopback when anetwork works normally. It can be set to Inloop orOutloop to help locate a faulty point in a test or aprocess of removing a fault on a network. However,it must be set to Non-Loopback right after the testis complete or the fault is removed.When Automatic Disabling of NE Function is setto the default value Enabled, the loopback settingis automatically cancelled after Auto DisablingTime (default: 5 minutes) elapses.NOTE

The parameter can be set to Inloop or Outloop only whenGE Service is accessed.

Max. PacketLength

1518-9600Default: 9600













SD TriggerCondition





78









Planned BandType

C, CWDMDefault: C








- -


- -

5.10.8 LQG Parameters




79






NOTE



Service Type GE, GE(GFP-T)Default: GE

l Set this parameter to a proper value according tothe service type of the interconnected board.If Service Type needs to be changed from GEto GE(GFP-T), set Port Mapping toEncapsulated to OTU5G before you changeService Type to GE(GFP-T). In case of GE(GFP-T) services, Port Mapping must be set toEncapsulated to OTU5G.

NOTEAfter you configure a cross-connection for the board, ifthe service type that you select when configuring thecross-connection is different from the value you set for theService Type field, setting the Service Type field fails.In this case, you need to delete the cross-connection andset the Service Type field again.

Port Mapping Encapsulated toFEC5G,Encapsulated toOTU5GDefault:Encapsulated toFEC5G

The default value is recommended. Differentservice types are supported in the two mappingmodes.l Encapsulated to FEC5G: GE is supported.l Encapsulated to OTU5G: GE and GE(GFP-T)

are supported.NOTE

Port Mapping of the two boards that are interconnectedwith each other must be consistent and Service Type oftheir WDM-side optical ports must be consistent.

Channel UseStatus






80












CAUTIONIf the communication between NEs is achieved throughonly the ESC provided by the LQG board, do not disablethe WDM-side lasers on the LQG board. Otherwise, NEsbecome unreachable when neither a standby channel isavailable nor protection is configured.

FEC WorkingState







Max. PacketLength

1518-9600Default: 9600




81













SD TriggerCondition




This parameter is valid when Service Type is set toGE.l The LPT function can work only with intra-










82



- -


- -

5.10.9 LQM Parameters








NOTE


Background InformationThe service processing chip of the LQM board provides 16 timeslots for receiving services.Different types of services require different number of timeslots. The total number of timeslotsfor the services received at the LQM board must be smaller than the maximum number oftimeslots that the service processing chip can provide. In addition, the total number of timeslotsfor the services configured at the TX1/RX1, TX2/RX2, TX3/RX3, and TX4/RX4 ports must benot greater than 16.




83




GE/GE(GFP_T)/GE(TTT-AGMP)

7 FICON 6


STM-4 4 ESCON 2

STM-16 16 DVB-ASI 2

FC200 12 SDI 3

FC100 6 HDSDI 12

FE 1 HDSDI14835 12

FC100_SLICE 8 OTU1 16

FC200_SLICE 16 FICON_SLICE 8

FICON_EXPRESS_SLICE

16 GE_SLICE 12

In case of GE services, the committed information rate can be configured to change the numberof timeslots required. Table 5-9 lists the number of timeslots required by GE services at differentbandwidths.

Table 5-9 Number of timeslots required by GE services

Bandwidth (Mbit/s)

Number ofTimeslotsRequired

Bandwidth (Mbit/s)


931-1000 7 311-465 3

776-930 6 156-310 2

621-775 5 1-155 1

466-620 4 - -

The TNF1LQM board supports slice services, such as GE_SLICE, FC100_SLICE,FC200_SLICE, FICON_SLICE, and FICON_EXPRESS_SLICE. Compared with commonservices, slice services feature better performance in transparent transmission of clock butrequire more timeslots. In practical application, select a proper service type according to theactual conditions. For example, when the LQM board is used to receive FC100 services, selectFC100_SLICE if better performance in transparent transmission of clock is required andtimeslots are sufficient. Otherwise, select FC100 so that more timeslots can be used to receiveother types of services.



84

Precautions

CAUTIONIf you delete a logical LQM board and configure it again on the NMS, the original configurationof the board is deleted and the default configuration is restored.


BoardWorkingMode

1 x AP4 ODU1 mode,1 x AP2 ODU0 mode,1 x AP2 relay modeDefault: 1 x AP4ODU1 mode

l 1 x AP4 ODU1 mode: Supports ODU1 serviceencapsulation .

l 1 x AP2 ODU0 mode: Supports ODU0 serviceencapsulation.

l 1 x AP2 relay mode: Supports regeneration oftwo OTU1 services.

NOTEThis parameter is only supported by the TNF2LQM.

Port WorkingMode

ODU1 convergencemode (n*Any->ODU1), ODU1 non-convergence mode(OTU1/Any->ODU1)Default: ODU1convergence mode(n*Any->ODU1)

l ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1):client services are mapped into one ODU1services.

l ODU1 non-convergence mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1): client services are mapped intodifferent ODU1 services.




85


Service Type TNF1LQM:l OTU-1, DVB-

ASI, SDI, HDSDI,HDSDI14835,ESCON, FC-100,FC-100 (slice),FC-200, FC-200(slice), FE,FICON, FICONexpress, FICONexpress (slice),FICON (slice),GE, GE(GFP-T),GE_SLICE,STM-1, STM-4,STM-16, None

l Default: OTU-1(in the case of theTX1/RX1 port) orNone (in the caseof the other ports)

TNF2LQM:l OTU-1, DVB-

ASI, SDI, HDSDI,HDSDI14835,ESCON, FC-100,FC-200, FE,FICON, FICONexpress, GE(TTT-AGMP), GE(GFP-T), CPRI2,CPRI3, STM-1,STM-4, STM-16,None

l Default: OTU-1(in the case of theTX1/RX1 port) orNone (in the caseof the other ports)

The Service Type parameter sets the type of theservice accessed at the optical interface on the clientside.NOTE

For the TNF1LQM board, the encapsulation mode is GFP-F when Service Type is set to GE.

The service type supported by the TNF2LQM board variesaccording to the value of Working Mode.

For the TNF2LQM board, GE(TTT-AGMP) is supportedonly when the board works in 1*AP2 ODU0 mode.



86


Channel UseStatus




For example, when the TNF1LQM board is used forregenerating OTU1 signals, set Channel UseStatus to Unused for the TX2/RX2, TX3/RX3,TX4/RX4, and IN2/OUT2 ports and to Used for theTX1/RX1 and IN1/OUT1 ports.



87



TNF1LQM:l Enabled, Disabledl Default: Disabled

in the case of TX1/RX1 ports,Enabled in thecase of the otherclient-side opticalports.

TNF2LQM:l Enabled, Disabledl Default:

– 1*AP4 ODU1mode:Enabled in thecase of all theclient-sideoptical ports.

– 1*AP2 ODU0mode:Enabled in thecase of TX1/RX1 and TX2/RX2 ports,Disabled in thecase of theother client-side opticalports.

– 1*AP2regenerationmode:Disabled in thecase of TX1/RX1 and TX2/RX2 ports,Enabled in thecase of theother client-side opticalports.








88





In practical application, set this parameter accordingto the scenario where the board is used. Forexample, when the TNF1LQM board is used forregenerating OTU1 signals, set Laser Status toON for the TX1/RX1 and IN1/OUT1 port and toOFF for the TX2/RX2, TX3/RX3, TX4/RX4, andIN2/OUT2 optical ports.CAUTION

If communication between NEs is achieved through onlyESC provided by the LQM board, the following situationsoccur when neither a standby channel is available norprotection is configured:

l When the LQM board is used for converging fourservices at Any rate, the NE becomes unreachableafter the WDM-side lasers on the LQM board aredisabled.

l When the TNF1LQM board is used for regeneratingOTU1 signals, the NE becomes unreachable after thelasers at the TX1/RX1 and IN1/OUT1 ports on theTNF1LQM board are disabled.

FEC WorkingState





0 to 20Default: 20

parameter provides an option to set the opticalpower attenuation of a board channel so that theoptical power of the output signals at the transmitend is within the preset range.NOTE

This parameter is only supported by the TNF2LQM.


20Default: 20

parameter provides an option to query the maximumattenuation rate allowed by the current optical portof a board.NOTE



0Default: 0

parameter provides an option to query the minimumattenuation rate allowed by the current optical portof a board.NOTE




89


GuaranteedBandwidthfor Client-Side GEService (M)

1-1000Default: 1000

l Users determine the guaranteed bandwidth forGE services based on the needs. This parameterneeds to be configured only for GE services.

l The value of the Guaranteed Bandwidth forClient-Side GE Service (M) parameter must begreater than the actual service bandwidth ofusers. Only in this case, no packet loss can beensured.

l Retain the default value when timeslots aresufficient.

l When timeslots are insufficient, decrease thecommitted information rate (CIR) of GEservices to decrease the number of requiredtimeslots. This is to ensure that the total numberof timeslots is within the required range. Forexample, when the TX1/RX1, TX2/RX2, TX3/RX3, and TX4/RX4 ports are used to receive GEservices, the CIR can be set to 620 Mbit/s. In thiscase, each GE service uses four timeslots.Hence, the total number of timeslots required bythe services received at the TX1/RX1, TX2/RX2, TX3/RX3, and TX4/RX4 ports is notgreater than 16.





Max. PacketLength

1518-9600Default: 9600

l This parameter is valid only when ServiceType is set to GE or FE.

l The default value is recommended.NOTE




90













of the board is enabled.NOTE


SD TriggerCondition







PRBS TestStatus






91








- -


- -

5.10.10 LQM2 Parameters

Prerequisite



Web LCT or U2000

Precautions








92

NOTE


Background InformationThe LQM2 board has two service processing chips, each of which provides 16 timeslots forreceiving services. Different types of services require different number of timeslots. The totalnumber of timeslots for the services received at the LQM2 board must be smaller than themaximum number of timeslots that the service processing chip can provide.

l In 2LQM mode, the total number of timeslots for the services configured at the TX1/RX1,TX2/RX2, TX3/RX3, and TX4/RX4 ports must be not greater than 16 and the total numberof timeslots for the services configured at the TX5/RX5, TX6/RX6, TX7/RX7, and TX8/RX8 ports must be not greater than 16.

l In AP8 mode, the total number of timeslots for the services configured at all client-sideports must be not greater than 16.





GE/GE(GFP_T)/GE(TTT-AGMP)

7 FICON 6


STM-4 4 ESCON 2

STM-16 16 DVB-ASI 2

FC200 12 SDI 3

FC100 6 HDSDI 12

FE 1 HDSDI14835 12

FC100_SLICE 8 OTU1 16

FC200_SLICE 16 FICON_SLICE 8

FICON_EXPRESS_SLICE

16 GE_SLICE 12

In case of GE services, the committed information rate can be configured to change the numberof timeslots required. Table 5-11 lists the number of timeslots required by GE services atdifferent bandwidths.



93

Table 5-11 Number of timeslots required by GE services

Bandwidth (Mbit/s)


Bandwidth (Mbit/s)


931-1000 7 311-465 3

776-930 6 156-310 2

621-775 5 1-155 1

466-620 4 - -

The TNF1LQM2 board supports slice services, such as GE_SLICE, FC100_SLICE,FC200_SLICE, FICON_SLICE, and FICON_EXPRESS_SLICE. Compared with commonservices, slice services feature better performance in transparent transmission of clock butrequire more timeslots. In practical application, select a proper service type according to theactual conditions. For example, when the LQM2 board is used to receive FC100 services, selectFC100_SLICE if better performance in transparent transmission of clock is required andtimeslots are sufficient. Otherwise, select FC100 so that more timeslots can be used to receiveother types of services.

Precautions

CAUTIONIf you delete a logical LQM2 board and configure it again on the NMS, the original configurationof the board is deleted and the default configuration is restored.



94


BoardWorkingMode

l TNF1LQM2:– AP8 Mode, 2LQM

Mode– Default: 2LQM

Model TNF2LQM2:

– 1*AP8 ODU1mode, 2*AP4ODU1 mode,2*AP2 ODU0mode, 2*AP3ODU1 mode

– Default: 2*AP4ODU1 mode

TNF1LQM2:l 2LQM Mode: the LQM2 board is used for

converging double four services at Any rateor regenerating two channels of OTU1signals. In this mode, two channels of signalsare sent on the WDM side in a single-fed andsingle receiving manner.

l AP8 Mode: the LQM2 board is used forconverging eight services at Any rate orregenerating one channel of OTU1 signals.In this mode, signals are sent by optical portson the WDM side in a dual fed and selectivereceiving manner.

TNF2LQM2:l 1 x AP8 ODU1 mode: the LQM2 board is

used for converging eight services at Anyrate and ODUk (k=1) SNCP protection issupported. In this mode, signals are sent byoptical ports on the WDM side in a dual fedand selective receiving manner.

l 2 x AP4 ODU1 mode: the LQM2 board isused for converging double four services atAny rate and ODUk (k=1) SNCP protectionis supported. In this mode, two channels ofsignals are sent on the WDM side in a single-fed and single receiving manner.

l 2 x AP2 ODU0 mode: the LQM2 board isused for converging double two services atAny rate and ODUk (k=0) SNCP protectionis supported. In this mode, signals are sent byoptical ports on the WDM side in a dual fedand selective receiving manner.

l 2 x AP3 ODU1 mode: the LQM2 board isused for converging double three services atAny rate and ODUk (k=1) SNCP protectionis supported. In this mode, signals are sent byoptical ports on the WDM side in a dual fedand selective receiving manner.

NOTEBefore changing the working mode of the LQM2board, ensure that no cross-connection or service isconfigured on the board. If a cross-connection orservice is configured on the board, delete the cross-connection or service and set Service Type to Nonebefore you change the working mode of the board.



95


CAUTIONSwitching between different working modes on aboard interrupts the existing services.

Port WorkingMode

ODU1 convergencemode (n*Any->ODU1),ODU1 non-convergencemode (OTU1/Any->ODU1)Default: ODU1convergence mode(n*Any->ODU1)

l ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1):client services are mapped into ODU1services.

l ODU1 non-convergence mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1): client services are mapped intoODU1 services.

NOTEThis parameter is valid when Board WorkingMode is set to 1*AP8 ODU1 mode, 2*AP4 ODU1mode or 2*AP3 ODU1 mode.

NOTEThis parameter is only supported by the TNF2LQM2.

Service Type TNF1LQM2:l OTU-1, DVB-ASI,

SDI, HDSDI,HDSDI14835,ESCON, FC-100,FC-100 (slice),FC-200, FC-200(slice), FE, FICON,FICON express,FICON express(slice), FICON(slice), GE, GE(GFP-T), GE_SLICE,STM-1, STM-4,STM-16, None

l Default: OTU-1 (inthe case of the TX1/RX1 port) or None (inthe case of the otherports)

TNF2LQM2:l OTU-1, DVB-ASI,

SDI, HDSDI,HDSDI14835,ESCON, FC-100,FC-200, FE, FICON,FICON express, GE(TTT-AGMP), GE(GFP-T), CPRI2,CPRI3, STM-1,STM-4, STM-16,None

l Default: None

The Service Type parameter sets the type of theservice accessed at the optical interface on theclient side.NOTEl After you configure a cross-connection for the

board, setting the Service Type field fails if theservice type selected during cross-connectionconfiguration is different from the value you setfor Service Type. In this case, you need to deletethe cross-connection and set the Service Typefield again.

l For the TNF1LQM2 board, the encapsulationmode is GFP-F when Service Type is set to GE.

l The service type supported by the LQM2 boardvaries according to the value of Working Mode.

l For the TNF2LQM2 board, GE(TTT-AGMP) issupported only when the board works in 2*AP2ODU0 mode.



96


Channel UseStatus



l Set this parameter to Used when a channelthat is used.

Examples are as follows:l When the LQM2 board is used for

converging services at Any rate, set ChannelUse Status to Used for all WDM-side opticalports and set this parameter for all client-sideoptical ports according to the actual networkdesign.

l When the TNF1LQM2 board is used forregenerating two OTU1 services (2LQMmode), set Channel Use Status to Used forthe TX1/RX1, IN1/OUT1, TX5/RX5, andIN2/OUT2 optical ports and to Unused forthe other optical ports.

l When the TNF1LQM2 board is used forregenerating one OTU1 service (AP8 mode),set Channel Use Status to Used for the TX1/RX1, and IN1/OUT1 optical ports and toUnused for the other optical ports.



97



Enabled, Disabled

Default: Disabled (in thecase of TX1/RX1, andTX5/RX5 ports),Enabled (in the case ofthe other client-sideoptical ports), orDisabled (in the case ofWDM-side optical ports)

TNF1LQM2:

l Enabled, Disabled

l Default:

– 2LQM mode:Disabled in thecase of TX1/RX1and TX5/RX5ports, Enabled inthe case of theother client-sideoptical ports.

– AP8 mode:Disabled in thecase of TX1/RX1ports, Enabled inthe case of theother client-sideoptical ports.

TNF2LQM2:

l Enabled, Disabled

l Default:

– 1*AP8 ODU1mode: Enabled inthe case of all theclient-side opticalports.

– 2*AP4 ODU1mode: Enabled inthe case of all theclient-side opticalports.

– 2*AP2 ODU0mode: Enabled inthe case of TX1/RX1, TX2/RX2,TX5/RX5 andTX6/RX6 ports,





98


Disabled in thecase of the otherclient-side opticalports.

– 2*AP3 ODU1mode: Enabled inthe case of TX1/RX1 to TX6/RX6ports, Disabled inthe case of theother client-sideoptical ports.


0s to 2s, with a step of 100ms.Default: 0s




99



The default value is recommended. In practicalapplication, set this parameter according to thescenario where the board is used. Examples areas follows:l When the LQM2 board is used for

converging services at Any rate, set LaserStatus to On for all WDM-side optical ports.Automatic Laser Shutdown of client-sideoptical ports is set to Enabled. Hence, laserson client-side optical ports is enabled ordisabled automatically according to thesignal receiving conditions at the WDM-sideoptical ports on the local board and the signalreceiving conditions at the client-side opticalports on the opposite board. That is, you donot need to set this parameter manually.

l When the TNF1LQM2 board is used forregenerating two OTU1 services (2LQMmode), set Laser Status to On for the TX1/RX1, IN1/OUT1, TX5/RX5, and IN2/OUT2optical ports and to Off for the other opticalports.

l When the TNF1LQM2 board is used forregenerating one OTU1 service (AP8 mode),set Laser Status to On for the TX1/RX1, andIN1/OUT1 optical ports and to Off for theother optical ports.

CAUTIONIf the communication between NEs is achievedthrough only the ESC provided by the LQM2 board,the following situations occur when neither a standbychannel is available nor protection is configured:

l The NE becomes unreachable after the WDM-side lasers on the LQM2 board are disabled whenthe LQM2 board is used for converging servicesat Any rate.

l The NE becomes unreachable after the lasers atthe TX1/RX1, IN1/OUT1, TX5/RX5, and IN2/OUT2 optical ports on the TNF1LQM2 board aredisabled when the TNF1LQM2 board is used forregenerating two OTU1 services (2LQM mode).

l The NE becomes unreachable after the lasers atthe TX1/RX1, and IN1/OUT1 optical ports on theTNF1LQM2 board are disabled when theTNF1LQM2 board is used for regenerating oneOTU1 service (AP8 mode).

FEC WorkingState


l Enabled is recommended.l FEC Working State of the two

interconnected OTU boards must beconsistent.



100



0 to 20Default: 20

parameter provides an option to set the opticalpower attenuation of a board channel so that theoptical power of the output signals at thetransmit end is within the preset range.NOTE

This parameter is only supported by the TNF2LQM2.


20Default: 20

parameter provides an option to query themaximum attenuation rate allowed by thecurrent optical port of a board.NOTE



0Default: 0

parameter provides an option to query theminimum attenuation rate allowed by the currentoptical port of a board.NOTE


GuaranteedBandwidthfor Client-Side GEService (M)

1-1000Default: 1000

l Users determine the guaranteed bandwidthfor GE services based on the needs. Thisparameter needs to be configured only forGE services.

l The value of the Guaranteed Bandwidthfor Client-Side GE Service (M) parametermust be greater than the actual servicebandwidth of users. Only in this case, nopacket loss can be ensured.

l Retain the default value when timeslots aresufficient.

l When timeslots are insufficient, decrease thecommitted information rate of GE services todecrease the number of timeslots required.This is to ensure that the total number oftimeslots is within the required range. Forexample, when the TX1/RX1, TX2/RX2,TX3/RX3, and TX4/RX4 ports are used toreceive GE services, the CIR can be set to620 Mbit/s. In this case, each GE service usesfour timeslots. Hence, the total number oftimeslots required by the services received atthe TX1/RX1, TX2/RX2, TX3/RX3, andTX4/RX4 ports is not greater than 16.




101



Non-Loopback, Inloop,OutloopDefault: Non-Loopback

Set this parameter to Non-Loopback when anetwork works normally. It can be set toInloop or Outloop to help locate a faulty pointin a test or a process of removing a fault on anetwork. However, it must be set to Non-Loopback right after the test is complete or thefault is removed.When Automatic Disabling of NE Function isset to the default value Enabled, the loopbacksetting is automatically cancelled after AutoDisabling Time (default: 5 minutes) elapses.

Max. PacketLength

1518-9600Default: 9600

l This parameter is valid only when ServiceType is set to GE or FE.

l The default value is recommended.NOTE




The Auto Negotiation parameter is availableonly when the Service Type parameter is set toGE.l It is recommended to set this parameter to

Disabled.l If the equipment of the customer adopts the

auto negotiation, the value of the AutoNegotiation parameter must be consistentwith the value of the Auto Negotiationparameter of the equipment of the customer.

l The Auto Negotiation parameter must beconsistent for the OTUs in the sameprotection group.




When a link is faulty, and the fault state must betransparently transmitted to the interconnectedclient-side equipment, the IF function needs tobe enabled.l This parameter is valid only when Service

Type of the optical port is set to GE.l This parameter is invalid after the LPT

function of the board is enabled.NOTE


SD TriggerCondition

SM_BIP8_SD,PM_BIP8_SD, B1_SDDefault: None

This parameter is valid only when the SDTrigger Flag is set to Enable.all the alarms can be set as the SD switchingconditions.



102



This parameter is valid when Service Type is setto GE or GE(GFP-T).l The LPT function can work only with intra-

board 1+1 protection or ODUk SNCPprotection and cannot work with any otherprotection.

l Set this parameter to Enabled when youwant to enable the LPT function; otherwise,keep the default value for this parameter.

PRBS TestStatus


l Retain the default value when a networkworks normally.

l Set this parameter to Enabled for theauxiliary board if you need to perform aPRBS test during deploymentcommissioning. Set this parameter toDisabled after the test is complete.


The parameter format isas follows: band type/wavelength No./opticalport wavelength/frequency, for example,C/11/1471.00/208.170.Default: /





- -


- -

5.10.11 LQPL/LQPU Parameters

Prerequisite



Web LCT or U2000



103






NOTE



Service Type GPON, OTU1, STM-16Default: OTU1

Select a value according to the actual typeof service that is carried.

Channel UseStatus


l Set this parameter to Unused when achannel that is not used.

l Set this parameter to Used when achannel that is used.


Enabled, DisabledDefault: Enabled for client-sideoptical ports.


shutdown function is not supportedand therefore cannot be set or query.


0s to 2s, with a step of 100 ms.Default: 0s




104



l Usually, this parameter is set to ON forevery WDM-side optical port.

l In the case of client-side optical ports,retain the default value becauseAutomatic Laser Shutdown isusually set to Enabled.

CAUTIONIf the communication between NEs is achievedthrough only the ESC provided by the LQPL/LQPU board, the following situation occurswhen neither a standby channel is available norprotection is configured: the NEs areunreachable after the lasers on the WDM sideof the LQPL/LQPU board are disabled.

FEC WorkingState


l Enabled is recommended.l FEC Working State of the two

interconnected OTU boards must beconsistent.


This parameter is available only when youset FEC Working State to Enabled.l The default value is recommended. To

improve the error correctioncapability, set this parameter toEFEC.

l FEC Mode of the two boards that areinterconnected on the WDM side mustbe consistent. Otherwise, services areinterrupted.

NOTEWhen the client-side optical port on the boardreceives GPON services, FEC Mode cannotbe set to EFEC.

The actual value is AFEC-2, but EFEC isdisplayed on the NMS.

Non-IntrusiveMonitoringStatus


You can set this parameter when the SDHservice is transmitted. It is recommendedto retain the default value.



105



Non-Loopback, Inloop,OutloopDefault: Non-Loopback

You can set this parameter to Inloop orOutloop for an optical port only when youset Service Type to STM-16 or OTU1 forthe optical port.Set this parameter to Non-Loopbackwhen a network works normally. It can beset to Inloop or Outloop to help locate afaulty point in a test or a process ofremoving a fault on a network. However,it must be set to Non-Loopback right afterthe test is complete or the fault is removed.When Automatic Disabling of NEFunction is set to the default valueEnabled, the loopback setting isautomatically cancelled after AutoDisabling Time (default: 5 minutes)elapses.

SD TriggerCondition

SM_BIP8_SD, PM_BIP8_SD,B1_SDDefault: None

This parameter is valid only when the SDTrigger Flag is set to Enable.all the alarms can be set as the SDswitching conditions.

PRBS TestStatus


l Retain the default value when anetwork works normally.

l Set this parameter to Enabled for theauxiliary board if you need to performa PRBS test during deploymentcommissioning. Set this parameter toDisabled after the test is complete.


The parameter format is asfollows: wavelength No./optical port wavelength/frequency, for example,60/1552.52/193.100.Default: /

This parameter is used to set thewavelength and frequency only when theboard uses TXFP modules on the WDMside.

Planned BandType

C, CWDMDefault: C

This parameter is available only when theboard uses TXFP modules and must be setto C.


The parameter format is asfollows: band type/wavelengthNo./optical port wavelength/frequency, for example, C/11/1471.00/208.170.Default: -




106





- -


- -

5.10.12 LSPL/LSPU Parameters

Prerequisite



Web LCT or U2000


from the Function Tree.




NOTE


Parameter Description


Channel UseStatus






107












CAUTIONIf the communication between NEs is achieved throughonly the ESC provided by the LSPL/LSPU board, do notdisable the WDM-side lasers on the LSPL/LSPU board.Otherwise, NEs become unreachable when neither astandby channel is available nor protection is configured.

FEC WorkingState




SD TriggerCondition









- -


- -



108

5.10.13 LSPR Parameters







NOTE



Channel UseStatus













109





CAUTIONIf the communication between NEs is achieved throughonly the ESC provided by the LSPR board, do not disablethe WDM-side lasers on the LSPR board. Otherwise, NEsbecome unreachable when neither a standby channel isavailable nor protection is configured.







- -


- -

5.10.14 LSX Parameters

Prerequisite



Web LCT or U2000

Precautions




110





NOTE



Service Type TNF1LSX:10GE LAN, OTU-2,OTU-2e, STM-64Default: OTU-2TNF2LSX:10GE LAN, 10GEWAN, FC-1200,FICON 10G, FC-800,FICON 8G, STM-64Default: 10GE LAN

Select a proper value according to the receivedservices.NOTE

TNF1LSX:

The processing of the 10GE WAN service and theSTM-64 service is the same. Therefore, when the 10GEWAN service is transmitted, you can configure it as theSTM-64 service on the U2000.



111







NOTEBit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G): Supports transparentbit (11.1 G) transport for 10GE LAN signals. In this portmapping mode, transmission of signals are achieved byincreasing the OTU frame frequency. This ensures theencoding gain and correction capability of FEC. In thismode, the bit rate is 11.1 Gbit/s, which is higher than thestandard bit rate of OTU2 signals.

MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G): In this port mappingmode, 10GE LAN signals are encapsulated in the GFP-Fformat and then are mapped into standard OTU frames.This mode supports transparent transmission of only client10GE MAC frames. In this mode, the signals areencapsulated in standard OTU2 frames and the bit rate ofthe signals is 10.71 Gbit/s. In addition, the FEC/AFECcode pattern is applicable to 10GE LAN services in thismode. Originally, the FEC code pattern is intended for10G SDH services.



FEC WorkingState









Users cannot set the FEC mode for client-side ports whenthey are used to receive and transmit OTU2/OTU2eservices; they can set the FEC mode for WDM-side ports.



112


Channel UseStatus





TNF1LSX:Enabled, DisabledDefault: Disabled forclient-side opticalports.TNF2LSX:Enabled, DisabledDefault: Enabled forclient-side opticalports.



In practical application, set this parameter accordingto the scenario where the board is used. Forexample, when the TNF1LSX board is used forregenerating OTU2 or OTU2e signals, setAutomatic Laser Shutdown to Disabled for RX/TX optical ports.




Laser Status TNF1LSX:ON, OFFDefault:l WDM side: ONl Client side: ONTNF2LSX:ON, OFFDefault:l WDM side: ONl Client side: OFF



In practical application, set this parameter accordingto the scenario where the board is used. Forexample, when the TNF1LSX board is used forregenerating OTU2 or OTU2e signals, set LaserStatus to On for RX/TX and IN/OUT optical ports.CAUTION

If the communication between NEs is achieved throughonly the ESC provided by the LSX board, the followingsituations occur when neither a standby channel isavailable nor protection is configured:

l When the TNF1LSX board is used for regeneratingOTU2 or OTU2e signals, the NE becomesunreachable after the lasers at the RX/TX and IN/OUToptical ports on the TNF1LSX board are disabled.

l When the TNF1LSX/TNF2LSX board is used fortransparently transmitting the 10 Gbit/s opticalsignals, the NE becomes unreachable after the lasersat the IN and OUT optical ports on the TNF1LSX/TNF2LSX board are disabled.



113


Non-IntrusiveMonitoringStatus


This parameter is valid when the board is used toreceive SDH services. The default value isrecommended.NOTE

Only TNF1LSX supports this parameter.




Max. PacketLength

1518-9600Default: 9600

This parameter is valid when Service Type is set to10GE LAN and Port Mapping is set to MACTransparent Mapping (10.7 G). The default valueis recommended.

SD TriggerCondition




This parameter is valid when Service Type is set to10GE LAN.l The LPT function can work only with intra-



PRBS TestStatus






114





Planned BandType

C, CWDMDefault: C








- -


- -

5.10.15 LWX2 Parameters






115






NOTE



Table 5-12 describes the service rates of common service types.

Table 5-12 Service rates of common service types

Service Type Service Rate (Mbit/s)

OTN OTU1 2667.0

SDH

STM-16 2488.3

STM-4 622.2

STM-1 155.5

SAN FC200 2125.0

FC100 1062.5

FC50 531.2

FC25 255.6

Ethernet GE 1250.0

FE 125.0

ESCON 200.0

FICON 1062.0

FICON EXPRESS 2124.0

DVB-ASI 270.0

SDI 270.0

HD-SDI 1485.0 or 1483.5

CPRI 2457.6

1228.8



116

Service Type Service Rate (Mbit/s)

614.4


Client SideServiceBearer Rate(M)

Any rate in the rangeof 42 Mbit/s to 2.67Gbit/s rate excludingthe ranges of 400Mbit/s to 500 Mbit/s,800 Mbit/s to 1000Mbit/s, and 1.6 Gbit/sto 2.0 Gbit/sDefault: 2667.0 Mbit/s

Select a proper service type according to the actuallyreceived services or enter a service rate directly. Theservice rate must be accurate to 0.1 Mbit/s. Forexample, when the board is used to receive STM-16services, you need to enter 2488.3.NOTE

After you set Client Service Bearer Rate (M) for theRX1/TX1 and the RX2/TX2 optical ports, the servicerates are automatically updated at the corresponding IN1/OUT1 and IN3/OUT3 optical ports. That is, you do notneed to set Client Service Bearer Rate (M) for the IN1/OUT1 and IN3/OUT3 optical ports. When setting theservice rates at the IN1/OUT1 and IN3/OUT3 opticalports, make sure that the service rates on the client andWDM sides of the same channel are the same. That is, theservice rate at the RX1/TX1 optical ports must be the sameas that at the corresponding IN1/OUT1 optical ports; theservice rate at the RX2/TX2 optical ports must be the sameas that at the corresponding IN3/OUT3 optical ports.

Channel UseStatus








In practical application, set this parameter accordingto the scenario where the board is used. Forexample, when the LWX2 board functions as aregeneration board, set Automatic LaserShutdown to Disabled for the IN1/OUT1, IN3/OUT3, RX1/TX1, and RX2/TX2 optical ports.NOTE

When OTU1 services are received on the client side, theALS function is disabled on the LWX2 board. That is, alllasers stay in enabled state.



117








In practical application, set this parameter accordingto the scenario where the board is used. Examplesare as follows:l When the LWX2 board is used as a regeneration

board, set Laser Status to On for the IN1/OUT1, IN3/OUT3, RX1/TX1, and RX2/TX2optical ports.

l When the LWX2 board is used as a transparenttransmission board, set Laser Status to On forthe IN1/OUT1, and IN3/OUT3 optical ports.Automatic Laser Shutdown of the RX1/TX1,and RX2/TX2 optical ports is set to Enabled.Hence, lasers on client-side optical ports areenabled and disabled automatically according tothe signal receiving conditions. That is, you donot need to set this parameter manually.

CAUTIONIf the LWX2 board is used as a regeneration boardbetween NEs and NEs communicates with each otherthrough only the ESC provided by the OTU regeneratedon the LWX2 board, do not disable the lasers on theLWX2 board. Otherwise, NEs become unreachable whenneither a standby channel is available nor protection isconfigured.






118


PRBS TestStatus










- -


- -

5.10.16 TSP Parameters

Prerequisite



Web LCT or U2000

Precautions


Navigation Path

Select the board in the NE Explorer. Select a proper navigation path according to port type. Thedetails are as follows:



119

l To set a parameter supported by the IN1/OUT1 or IN2/OUT2 optical port, such as ChannelUse Status, Laser Status, and Service Type, choose Configuration > WDM Interfacefrom the Function Tree. Select By Board/Port(Channel), choose Channel from the drop-down list, and click the Basic Attributes or Advanced Attributes tab.

l To set a parameter supported by the RX1/TX1 or RX2/TX2 port, such as Laser Switch,choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.

l To set a parameter supported by the E1/T1 port, such as E1/T1 Mode, chooseConfiguration > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.

Parameter Description (WDM Interface)Field Value Description

Service Type STM-1, STM-4Default: STM-1

Select a value according to the service rate on theWDM side.The parameter settings are supported only by the251 (LP1/LP1) and 252 (LP2/LP2) logical ports onthe WDM side.

Channel UseStatus




Laser Status ON, OFFDefault: ON

It is recommended to set this parameter to ON forall optical ports.CAUTION

If the communication between NEs is achieved throughonly the ESC provided by the TSP board, the followingsituation occurs when neither a standby channel isavailable nor protection is configured: the NEs areunreachable after the lasers on the WDM side of the TSPboard are disabled.

E1/T1 Mode E1, T1Default: E1

Select a value according to the actual type of servicethat the E1/T1 port carries. Only the TSPB boardsupports switchover between the E1 and T1services.When you set the E1/T1 mode, the E1/T1 modes atlogical ports 5-25 on the client side areautomatically changed to the mode that you set.






120








- -


- -

Parameter Description (SDH Interface)Field Value Description

Laser Switch On, OffDefault: On

It is recommended to set this parameter to Onfor all optical ports.

VC4 Path NE ID-subrack ID-slot-board name-optical portnumber-channel ID

Displays the number of a VC4 channel.

VC4 Loopback Non-Loopback,Inloop, OutloopDefault: Non-Loopback

Set this parameter to Non-Loopback when anetwork works normally. It can be set toInloop or Outloop to help locate a faulty pointin a test or a process of removing a fault on anetwork. However, it must be set to Non-Loopback right after the test is complete or thefault is removed.When Automatic Disabling of NE Functionis set to the default value Enabled, the loopbacksetting is automatically cancelled after AutoDisabling Time (default: 5 minutes) elapses.

VC12 Channel NE ID-subrack ID-slot-board name-optical portnumber-channel ID

Displays the number of a VC12 channel.



121


Port NE ID-subrack ID-slot-board name-optical port number

Displays the number of a port on the board.

Optical InterfaceName

- -

Parameter Description (PDH Interface)Field Value Description

E1/T1 Mode E1, T1Default: E1

Select a value according to the actual type ofservice that the E1/T1 port carries. Only theTSPB board supports switchover between theE1 and T1 services.When you set the E1/T1 mode, the E1/T1modes at logical ports 5-25 on the client sideare automatically changed to the mode that youset.

Board NE ID-subrack ID-slot-board name

Displays the name of the board.

Port NE ID-subrack ID-slot-board name-channel ID

Displays the E1/T1 channel of the board.

Port Name 1 to 21 Displays the E1/T1 channel ID.

Tributary Loopback Non-Loopback,Inloop, OutloopDefault: Non-Loopback

Set this parameter to Non-Loopback when anetwork works normally. It can be set toInloop or Outloop to help locate a faulty pointin a test or a process of removing a fault on anetwork. However, it must be set to Non-Loopback right after the test is complete or thefault is removed.When Automatic Disabling of NE Functionis set to the default value Enabled, the loopbacksetting is automatically cancelled after AutoDisabling Time (default: 5 minutes) elapses.

Re-timing Mode Normal, Re-timingMode of TributaryClock, Re-timingMode of Cross-connect ClockDefault: Normal

l Normal: The re-timing function is notenabled.

l Re-timing Mode of Tributary Clock: Atributary clock is used as the reference clockfor retiming.

l Re-timing Mode of Cross-connect Clock:The cross-connect (external) clock is usedas the reference clock for retiming.



122

5.10.17 SCC Parameters


Tools, Meters, and MaterialsWeb LCT or U2000



l Select By Board/Port(Channel), and click the Basic Attributes or AdvancedAttributes tab. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter.

NOTE



Channel UseStatus


l If the OSC channel is not configured or used inthe network planning, set the Channel UseStatus field to Unused for the TM1/RM1 andTM2/RM2 optical ports.

l If the OSC channel is configured and used in thenetwork planning, set the Channel Use Statusfield to Used for the TM1/RM1 and TM2/RM2optical ports.


l If the OSC channel is not configured or used inthe network planning, set the Laser Status fieldto OFF for the TM1/RM1 and TM2/RM2optical ports.

l If the OSC channel is configured and used in thenetwork planning, set the Laser Status field toON for the TM1/RM1 and TM2/RM2 opticalports.

CAUTIONIf the communication between NEs is achieved throughonly the OSC, the NEs are unreachable after the lasers atthe TM1/RM1 and TM2/RM2 optical ports on the SCCboard are disabled.



123








- -


- -

5.11 Configuring Protection SchemesWhen commissioning and configuring a network, you need to configure protection schemesbased on the network and service planning.

5.11.1 Configuring SW SNCP ProtectionSW SNCP protection can be implemented by using convergence OTU boards that support cross-connections. This type of OTU boards includes the LQM2 and LQG boards.

Prerequisite

You must have logged in to an NE.

The NE must be configured with boards that support SW SNCP protection.


Web LCT or U2000

PrecautionsNOTE

SW SNCP protection must be configured at both the sink and source. At the source, you need to configurecross-connections to implement dual transmitting; at the sink, you need to configure cross-connections toimplement selective receiving.



124

Procedure on the Web LCT1. On the source NE of SW SNCP protection, configure two cross-connections for dually

transmitting a service.To implement dual transmitting on the source NE of SW SNCP protection, you need toconfigure two cross-connections, which share the same source but have different sinks. Anexample is as follows (1U chassis):l Source: 1-LQM2-3(RX1/TX1)-1; sink: 1-LQM2-201(LP1/LP1)-1 (this is a

unidirectional cross-connection)l Source: 1-LQM2-3(RX1/TX1)-1; sink: 4-LQM2-201(LP1/LP1)-1 (this is a

unidirectional cross-connection)

(1) In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-Connection Service Management from the Function Tree.

(2) Click the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab. Click New and theCreate Cross-Connection Service dialog box is displayed.

(3) Select corresponding values for Service Level and Service Type and set otherparameters for the service.

(4) Click OK and the created cross-connection is displayed in the user interface.2. On the sink NE of SW SNCP protection, configure cross-connections for selectively

receiving a service.Two cross-connections must be configured for Working Service and ProtectionService. The two cross-connections have different sources but share the same sink. Anexample is as follows (1U chassis):l Source: 1-LQM2-201(LP1/LP1)-1; sink: 1-LQM2-3(RX1/TX1)-1l Source: 4-LQM2-201(LP1/LP1)-1; sink: 1-LQM2-3(RX1/TX1)-1

NOTE

When configuring the cross-connections, you need to configure only the source for ProtectionService but need to configure source and sink for Working Service.

Table 5-13 Requirements for setting key parameters of SW SNCP protection

Parameter Name SW SNCP Protection

Protection Type SW SNCP

SNCP Type Unavailable

Service Type GE

OTN Level Unavailable

Revertive Mode Non-revertive

WTR Time (s) Unavailable

Working Channel Delay Time (100ms) 0

Protection Channel Delay Time (100ms) 0

SD Trigger Flag Disabled



125

NOTE

The values listed in Table 5-13 are recommended values. Set the parameters properly according toengineering requirements in practical application.

(1) In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-Connection Service Management from the Function Tree.

(2) Click the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab. Click Create SNCP. TheCreate SNCP dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters for SNCP protection.

(3) Click OK. Then, the protection group is created and displayed in the user interface.

Procedure on the U20001. On the source NE of SW SNCP protection, configure two cross-connections for dually

transmitting a service.

To implement dual transmitting on the source NE of SW SNCP protection, you need toconfigure two cross-connections, which share the same source but have different sinks. Anexample is as follows (1U chassis):

l Source: 1-LQM2-3(RX1/TX1)-1; sink: 1-LQM2-201(LP1/LP1)-1 (this is aunidirectional cross-connection)

l Source: 1-LQM2-3(RX1/TX1)-1; sink: 4-LQM2-201(LP1/LP1)-1 (this is aunidirectional cross-connection)

(1) In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > WDM ServiceManagement from the Function Tree.

(2) Click the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab. Click New and the CreateCross-Connection Service dialog box is displayed.

(3) Select corresponding values for Level and Service Type and set other parameters forthe service.

(4) Click OK. A prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful.

(5) Click Close.

2. On the sink NE of SW SNCP protection, configure cross-connections for selectivelyreceiving a service.

Two cross-connections must be configured for Working Service and ProtectionService. The two cross-connections have different sources but share the same sink. Anexample is as follows (1U chassis):

l Source: 1-LQM2-201(LP1/LP1)-1; sink: 1-LQM2-3(RX1/TX1)-1

l Source: 4-LQM2-201(LP1/LP1)-1; sink: 1-LQM2-3(RX1/TX1)-1

NOTE

When configuring the cross-connections, you need to configure only the source for ProtectionService but need to configure source and sink for Working Service.

NOTE

If cross-connections that are used to implement dual feeding of a service are not configured on theNE, set Direction to Bidirectional when configuring SW SNCP protection and at the same timeconfigure the attributes of dual fed and selective receiving feature. If cross-connections that are usedto implement dual feeding of a service are configured on the NE, set Direction to Unidirectionalwhen configuring SW SNCP protection.



126

Table 5-14 Requirements for setting key parameters of SW SNCP protection

Parameter Name SW SNCP Protection

Protection Type SW SNCP

SNCP Type Unavailable

Service Type GE

OTN Level Unavailable

Revertive Mode Non-revertive

WTR Time (s) Unavailable

Working Channel Delay Time (100ms) 0

Protection Channel Delay Time (100ms) 0

SD Trigger Flag Disabled

NOTE


(1) In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > WDM ServiceManagement from the Function Tree.

(2) Click Create SNCP Service. The Create SNCP Service dialog box is displayed. Setthe parameters for SNCP protection.

(3) Click OK. Then, the protection group is created and displayed in the user interface.

Reference Informationl Delete a cross-connection

See this section to learn how to delete a cross-connection.

l Convert a service with SNCP protection into a service with no protection

A service with SNCP protection can be converted into a service with no protection.

l WDM cross-connection configuration

See this section to learn how to set the parameters for configuring a WDM cross-connection.

l SNCP service control

See this section to learn how to set the parameters for controlling services with SNCPprotection.

Follow-up Procedure




127

5.11.2 Configuring SNCP ProtectionSNCP protection can be supported by TSP board.

Prerequisite


The NE must be configured with boards that support SNCP protection.


Web LCT or U2000

Procedure on the Web LCT or U20001. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > SDH Service

Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click Create SNCP Service. The Create SNCP Service dialog box is displayed.3. Set the SNCP protection parameters, click OK.4. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. Then, the protection group is created and

displayed in the user interface.

Follow-up Procedure


5.11.3 Configuring ODUk SNCP ProtectionODUk SNCP protection can be supported by F2ELOM, F2LQM, F2LQM2, F1ELQM,F2LDGF2, F2LSX, F1LDX boards.

Prerequisite


The NE must be configured with boards that support SNCP protection.


Web LCT or U2000

Procedure on the Web LCT or U20001. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > WDM Service

Management from the Function Tree.2. Click Create SNCP Service. The Create SNCP Service dialog box is displayed. Set the

parameters for SNCP protection.3. Click OK. Then, the protection group is created and displayed in the user interface.



128

Reference Informationl WDM cross-connection configuration

See this section to learn how to set the parameters for configuring a WDM cross-connection.l SNCP service control

See this section to learn how to set the parameters for controlling services with SNCPprotection.


5.11.4 Configuring Port ProtectionOn the port protection user interface, you can configure intra-board 1+1 protection, optical lineprotection, client 1+1 protection, and 1+1 optical channel protection. Configure protection ofan appropriate type according to the network design.

PrerequisiteYou must have logged in to an NE.

The NE must be configured with boards that support port protection.


Background InformationObserve the differences between intra-board 1+1 protection, optical line protection, client 1+1protection, and 1+1 optical channel protection when configuring them. Table 5-15 lists thedifferences between these protection types.



129

Table 5-15 Differences between different port protection types

Protection Type Configuration Precaution

Intra-board 1+1protection

l The protection must be configured on both the sink and source NEs.l The client-side service attributes of the working and protection

channels must be the same. Otherwise, services are unavailable.l In the case of the intra-board 1+1 protection by using an OTU with

the dual fed and selective receiving function, Channel Use Status ofa WDM-side optical port must be set to Used. Each of the WDM-sideoptical interfaces on the OTU can be configured as the workingchannel. When the protection group is deleted, the service is forciblyswitched to optical port 1 (IN1/OUT1) or optical port 3 (IN3/OUT3).

l The NE will be unreachable by the NMS after the protection groupis deleted if the following conditions are met: (1) Communicationbetween NEs is implemented by using an ESC channel. (2) There isno standby channel. (3) Optical interfaces IN1 and IN3 receive nolight.

Optical lineprotection

l The protection must be configured on both the sink and source NEs.l The working and protection channels at the receive end of the OLP

board must have the same receive optical power. The variancethreshold between primary and secondary input power is 5 dB bydefault.

client 1+1protection

l The protection must be configured on both the sink and source NEs.l The working and protection OTU boards must be of the same type.

1+1 opticalchannelprotection

l In the case of wavelength protection, the working OTU board and theprotection OTU board are installed in different subracks. You arerecommended to install the OLP board in the chassis where theworking OTU board resides.

l The working and protection OTU boards must be of the same type.l The boards support protection only in the scenario where GE services

are accessed.

For details about the preceding protection types, see the Feature Description.

Precautions

CAUTIONBefore configuring protection involving the OLP board, set Initial Variance Value BetweenPrimary and Secondary Input Power (dB) of the current optical port on the OLP board in theWDM interface attribute window. That is, set the initial difference between the input opticalpower of channel 1 and the input optical power of channel 2. For example, if the input opticalpower of channel 1 is -6 dBm and the input optical power of channel 2 is -5 dBm, set the valueof Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) to 1 dB.



130

Procedure on the Web LCT or U20001. Create port protection based on network planning.

(1) In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > PortProtection from the Function Tree.

(2) In the Port Protection window, click New.Then, the Creating a protection groupwill interrupt services used by the protection. Are you sure to continue? dialogbox is displayed. Click OK.

(3) Set parameters for the selected protection type. Click OK to display a dialog box.(4) Click OK to complete the protection configuration. Then, the protection group is

created and displayed in the user interface.

Table 5-16 Requirements for setting parameters of different protection types

ParameterName


Intra-board 1+1 protection client 1+1protection

Implementedby UsingOTU Boardswith the DualFed andSelectiveReceivingFunction

Implemented by UsingOLP Boardsand OTUBoards withthe SingleFed andSingleReceivingFunction

Protection type Optical lineprotection

Intra-board 1+1 protection

Intra-board 1+1 protection

client 1+1protection

NE with theWorkingChannel

The NE wherethe OLP boardresides. Forexample,NE7201.

The NE wherethe OTU boardresides. Forexample,NE7201.


The NE wherethe workingOTU boardresides. Forexample,NE7201.

Board withWorkingChannel

OLP board, forexample, 4-OLP

OTU board, forexample, 1-LQM2


Working OTUboard, forexample, 1-LWX2

WorkingChannel

The workingchannel on theOLP board. Forexample, 1(RI1/TO1).

The workingchannel on theOTU board,namely, aWDM-sideoptical port.For example, 1(IN1/OUT1).

The workingchannel on theOLP board. Forexample, 1(RI1/TO1).

A client-sideoptical port onthe workingOTU board.For example, 1(RX1/TX1).



131

ParameterName





NE withProtectionChannel


The NE wherethe OTU boardresides. Forexample,NE7201.


The NE wherethe protectionOTU boardresides. Forexample,NE7201.

Board withProtectionChannel


OTU board, forexample, 1-LQM2


ProtectionOTU board, forexample, 3-LWX2

ProtectionChannel

The protectionchannel on theOLP board. Forexample, 2(RI2/TO2).

The protectionchannel on theOTU board,namely, aWDM-sideoptical port.For example, 2(IN2/OUT2).

The protectionchannel on theOLP board. Forexample, 2(RI2/TO2).

A client-sideoptical port onthe protectionOTU board.For example, 1(RX1/TX1).

NE withControlChannel/MonitoringChannel

Unavailable Unavailable The NE wherethe OTU boardresides. Forexample,NE7201.

UnavailableNOTE

If theprotection isIntra-subrackclient 1+1, theparametershould be set tothe NE wherethe OLP boardresides. ThisNE generallyhouses theworking OTUboard. Forexample,NE7201.



132

ParameterName





Board withControlChannel/MonitoringChannel

Unavailable Unavailable OTU board, forexample, 1-LOE

UnavailableNOTE

If theprotection isIntra-subrackclient 1+1, theparametershould be set toOLP board, forexample, 1-OLP.

ControlChannel/MonitoringChannel

Unavailable Unavailable A WDM-sideoptical port onthe OTU board.For example, 1(IN1/OUT1).

UnavailableNOTE

If theprotection isIntra-subrackclient 1+1, theparametershould be set toOpticalinterface 1(RI1/TO1) onthe OLP board.

WorkingChannel DelayTime (100ms)

0 0 Unavailable 0

ProtectionChannel DelayTime (100ms)

0 0 Unavailable 0

ControlChannel/MonitoringChannel DelayTime (100ms)

Unavailable Unavailable 0 Unavailable

RevertiveMode

Non-revertive Non-revertive Unavailable Non-revertive

WTR Time (s) Unavailable Unavailable Unavailable Unavailable



133

ParameterName





SD TriggerFlag

Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

NOTE


NOTE

In the case of the intra-board 1+1 protection implemented by using the OLP board and the OTU boardwith single fed and single receiving function, the Revertive Mode field is unavailable. In the caseof other protection types, if you set the Revertive Mode field to Revertive, you also need to set theWTR Time (s) field. The value of the WTR Time (s) field ranges from 300 to 720. The default valueis 600.

TIP

After the protection is configured, select a protection group in the Port Protection window. In theright lower corner, you can click Delete to delete the protection group or click Modify to modify theparameters of the protection group.

CAUTIONDeleting a protection group can make an NE unreachable.

2. Optional: When configuring the intra-board 1+1 protection implemented by using OTUboards with the dual fed and selective receiving function, add an optical port if an opticalport is idle but cannot be selected.

(1) In the NE Explorer, right-click the board and then choose Path View.(2) Right-click a blank space on the right of the Path View window, and then choose

Add Port. The Add Port dialog box is displayed.(3) Select the port and port type. Click OK.



134

CAUTIONDo not delete a port or change the port type unless required.l Services are interrupted after a port is deleted.l If the type of services received at a port is inconsistent with the default service type

supported by the board, changing the port type results in a service interruption.l In the case of the LQM and LQM2 boards, after the port type is changed, the service

type on the port is changed into None.

Reference Informationl Deleting Ports

A port can be deleted if the port is set incorrectly.l Changing Port Types

The type of a port can be changed if the port is set incorrectly.l Port protection

See this section to learn how to set the parameters used for configuring port protection.


5.11.5 Configuring ERPS ProtectionIn an Ethernet ring network, ERPS protection can be configured for EVPL, EPLAN, andEVPLAN services. ERPS protection must be configured for each node in an Ethernet ringnetwork.

PrerequisiteWDM interface and Ethernet interface parameters on a board must be configured.


Background InformationFor details on ERPS protection, see the Feature Description.

Procedure on the U2000 or Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and select an Ethernet board. Choose Configuration >

Ethernet Protection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree.2. Click New. The Create Ethernet Ring Protection Protocol Instance dialog box is

displayed.3. The protection parameters should be set according to network planning.



135

Field Value Remarks

ERPS ID 1-4 Specifies the ERPS protection group ID.For example, 1.The EPRS IDs for all nodes in a ringnetwork must be same.

East Port PORT5-PORT22,VCTRUNK1-VCTRUNK3

When a board is connected to an Ethernetring network configured with protection,there are east and west ports on a board.This parameter indicates the east port ofthe board.

West Port PORT5-PORT22,VCTRUNK1-VCTRUNK3

When a board is connected to an Ethernetring network configured with protection,there are east and west ports on a board.This parameter indicates the west port ofthe board.

RPL Owner RingNode Flag

Yes, No Sets whether a node is an RPL owner. If anode is an RPL owner, set this parameterto Yes. If the node is not an RPL owner,set this parameter to No.For one ring network, specify one node asan RPL owner.

RPL Port PORT5-PORT22,VCTRUNK1-VCTRUNK3

Specifies the RPL port for an RPL ownernode.This parameter is valid only when RPLOwner Ring Node Flag is set to Yes andthe RPL port must be the east port or thewest port.

Control VLAN 1-4094 Specifies the VLAN ID for packets thatcarry the ring network automaticprotection switching (R-APS) protocol.The control VLAN ID cannot be the sameas the service VLAN ID.

Destination Node 01-19-A7-00-00-01 Indicates the MAC address of thedestination node. The default destinationMAC address of an R-APS packet is01-19-A7-00-00-01.

4. Click OK. After the operation succeeds, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed.

Click Close.5. Set other protection parameters according to the network plan.



136

Field Value Remarks

Hold-Off Time(ms)

0-10000. Steplength: 100.Default: 0

Displays and sets the holdoff time forERPS.

Guard Time(ms) 10-2000. Steplength: 10.Default: 500

Displays and sets the guard time for ERPS.During the guard time, the received R-APS message is discarded. When theguard time expires, the received R-APSmessage is forwarded directly.

WTR Time(mm:ss) 05:00-12:00Default: 05:00

Displays and sets the WTR time for ERPS.

Packet TransmitInterval(s)

1-10Default: 5

Displays the transmit interval for R-APSmessages.

Entity Level 0-7Default: 4

Displays and sets the entity level.

Last SwitchingRequest

Raps (NR), Raps(NR, RB), WTR,WTR Expires, Raps(SF), Local SF,Local Clear SF,Initial Request

Displays the last switching request.

RB Status noRB, RB Displays the RB status of the messagereceived at the current node.

DNF Status noDNF, DNF Displays the DNF status of the messagereceived at the current node.

Status of StateMachine

Idle, Protection Displays the status of the state machine atthe current node.

Node Carried withCurrent Packet

For example, 01-19-A7-00-00-01

Displays the MAC address in the messagereceived at the current node, that is, theMAC address of the source node of theswitching request.

6. Click Apply. Then, the ERPS protection configuration at a node is complete.




137

5.12 Synchronizing the NE Time with the NMS TimeWith the time synchronization function, the NE time is kept consistent with the NMS time. Inthis way, the NMS is able to record the correct time when alarms and abnormal events arereported by NEs.



Background InformationWhen NEs report alarms and abnormal events to the NMS, the generation time of such alarmsand events is based on the NE time. If the NE time is incorrect, the generation time of the alarmsrecorded in the NMS is also incorrect, which may cause troubles in fault locating. The same casehappens to the generation time of abnormal events that are recorded in the NE security log. Toprevent the preceding problem, the NMS provides the function of synchronizing the NE timewith the NMS time to ensure that the NE time is correct.

With this function, all NEs can be synchronized with the NMS time manually or automatically.In this manner, all the NEs use the NMS time as the standard time. The NMS server time refersto the time of the computer system where the NMS server resides. This function features easyoperation and applies to a network with relatively low requirement for time accuracy.

Synchronizing NE time with the NMS time does not affect the existing services. Beforesynchronizing the NE time with the NMS time, make sure that the time of the computer systemwhere the Web LCT/U2000 server resides is correct. If you need to change the computer systemtime, first exit the Web LCT/U2000. Then, restart the Web LCT/U2000 after re-setting thecomputer system time.

Procedure on the Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE. Choose Configuration > NE Time Synchronization

from the Function Tree.2. Set Synchronous Mode to NM and then click Apply.3. Right-click the NE and then choose Synchronize with NM Time. In this manner, the NE

time is synchronized with the NMS time immediately.

Procedure on the U20001. In the NE Explorer, select the NE. Choose Configuration > NE Time Synchronization

from the Function Tree. The Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.2. Right-click the NE and then choose Synchronize with NM Time. A dialog box is

displayed. Click Yes.3. The Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. In this manner, the NE time is

synchronized with the NMS time immediately.



138

Reference Informationl Setting Automatic Synchronization of the NE Time with the NMS Time

See this section to learn how to set automatic synchronization of the NE time with the NMStime.

l Parameters for Synchronizing NE TimeSee this section to learn how to set the parameters associated with NE time synchronization.

Follow-up Procedure


5.13 Starting NE Performance MonitoringEnabling the performance monitoring function is a precondition for querying the performanceevents. If the current NE time is in the performance monitoring time range as set before, the NEmonitors its performance events automatically. If the performance monitoring time range is notset or if the current NE time is not within the performance monitoring time range, the NE doesnot monitor its performance events.

Prerequisite

The NE time must be synchronized with the NMS time.



Web LCT or U2000

PrecautionsNOTE

The start time for monitoring NE performance must be later than the current time of the NMS and NE. Ifyou need to monitor the performance immediately, set the start time just a little later than the current timeof the NMS and NE. The end time must be later than the start time or you can keep the end time field blank.

Procedure on the Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Performance > NE Performance Monitor

Time from the Function Tree. In NE Performance Monitor Time, select the desired NE.

NOTE

An NE must be selected at this step. Otherwise, it is impossible for you to proceed with the task.

2. In the Set 15-Minute Monitoring field, select Enabled and click behind theFrom field to set the start time for monitoring the 15-minute performance of the NE.

TIP

The method of setting the time is as follows: In the hour, minute, or second time control, right-clickthe time to increase it, or press Shift and right-click the time to decrease it.



139

3. In the Set 24-Hour Monitoring field, select Enabled and click behind the Fromfield to set the start time for monitoring the 24-minute performance of the NE.

4. Click Apply to apply the settings.

Procedure on the U20001. Choose Performance > Set NE Performance Monitoring Time from the Main Menu of

the U2000.

2. Select an NE in the left-hand pane, and click .3. Select the desired NE in the right-hand pane.4. Select the check box 15-Minute, and click radio button Enabled; or select the check box

24-Hour, and click radio button Enabled.

5. Click the behind From field, select the date, and enter the time to set the beginningtime and end time for monitoring.

NOTE

The start time must be later than the current time of the NMS and NE. If you need to monitor theperformance immediately, set the start time just a little later than the current time of the NMS andNE. To set the end time, select the check box before To first. The end time must be later than thestart time. If the check box before To is not selected, it indicates that the monitoring function isenabled all the time.

6. Click Apply. The Warning dialog box is displayed, click OK.7. In the Result dialog box displayed, click Close to finish the operation.

Reference Informationl Set performance thresholds for a specified board

When an NE detects that a certain performance value exceeds the specified threshold, theNE reports a corresponding performance event. See this section to learn how to change theperformance threshold of a specified board.

l Set performance monitoring parameters of a boardThe Web LCT/U2000 can monitor the performance of all boards on a network. Theautomatic reporting of detected performance values, however, is disabled by default. Youcan change the default setting as required.

l Set performance monitoring parameters of an NESet the performance monitoring parameters of a specified NE properly and then enable theNE performance monitoring function. By doing so, you can obtain detailed description ofperformance records during the operation of the NE. This facilitates monitoring of theexisting services and the equipment status.

l Reset the performance register of a boardAfter a network test or fault recovery, you need to reset the performance register of a boardas required before the board is put into operation. This is to start a new performancemonitoring period.




140

5.14 Checking Configurations in the CommissioningProcess

Correct setting of each system parameter is the precondition for ensuring normal networkoperation.

Check the configurations of NEs and boards according to Table 5-17 and rectify inappropriateconfigurations, for example incorrect parameter settings and incomplete parameter settings.

Table 5-17 Configuration checklist

No.

Item Associated Operation

1 Communication between NEs on the network isnormal and login to an NE is successful.

Searching and Creating NEs

2 NE IDs and names are changed properly accordingto the customer planning requirements.

Changing NE IDs and Names

3 NE IP addresses are changed properly according tothe customer planning requirements.

Changing NE IP Addresses

4 When the network uses the HWECC communicationprotocol, a proper extended ECC communicationmode is selected when the number of NEs that adoptthe extended ECC communication exceeds nine.

Setting the Ethernet ExtendedECC Communication

When the network uses IP over DCC communicationprotocol, the IP over DCC protocol is configuredproperly.When the network uses OSI over DCCcommunication protocol, the OSI over DCCprotocol is configured properly.

Configuring IP over DCCConfiguring OSI over DCC

5 Attributes of every interface on a board are setproperly.

Configuring BoardParameters

6 The protections are configured properly for aplanned optical port.

Configuring Port ProtectionConfiguring SW SNCPProtectionConfiguring SNCP ProtectionConfiguring ODUk SNCPProtection

7 All NEs are synchronized with the NMS time andNE performance monitoring can be enablednormally.

Synchronizing the NE Timewith the NMS TimeEnabling NE PerformanceMonitoring



141

TIP

In the actual commissioning and configuration process, you are recommended to check the configurationsof an NE after configuring the NE.




142

6 Service Configurations

About This Chapter

6.1 Basic ConceptsThis topic describes basic concepts involved in service configurations.

6.2 Configuring Services on BoardsThe services that can be configured vary according to boards. The topic describes serviceconfigurations on some boards that provide comprehensive functions.

6.3 Configuring WDM ServicesAfter setting board parameters, you need to configure WDM service grooming for boards thatsupport cross-connections based on WDM services and protection planning.

6.4 Configuring EPL/EVPL ServicesEPL/EVPL services belong to Ethernet services and are carried in WDM service signals.

6.5 Configuring EPLAN/EVPLAN ServicesEPLAN/EVPLAN services belong to Ethernet services and are carried in WDM service signals.

6.6 Configuring SDH ServiceThe TSP board supports configuration of SDH service.

OptiX OSN 1800 Compact Multi-Service Edge OpticalTransport PlatformCommissioning and Configuration Guide 6 Service Configurations


143

6.1 Basic ConceptsThis topic describes basic concepts involved in service configurations.

6.1.1 OverviewBefore configuring services, you need to be familiar with the function module that processeseach type of services.

In general, Figure 6-1 shows the abstract configuration model of service processing on WDMequipment.

Figure 6-1 Abstract configuration model

Service processing

module

Any cross-connect module

ODUk cross-

connect module

Optical module

RX1/TX1

RXn/TXnIN/OUTOTNOptical

module

NOTE

In practice, boards support only part of the functions included in the configuration model.

Ethernet services, SDH services, and WDM services are processed by different functionmodules.

l Ethernet services are processed by the service processing module (the L2 switchingmodule) as shown in Figure 6-1. Ethernet services are classified into E-Line services andE-LAN services. For details, see 6.4.1 EPL/EVPL Service Overview and 6.5.1 EPLAN/EVPLAN Service Overview.

l SDH services are processed by the service processing module (the SDH timeslot mappingmodule) as shown in Figure 6-1.

l WDM services are processed by the Any cross-connect module and ODUk cross-connectmodule as shown in Figure 6-1. Services can be processed in more and more modes asWDM equipment is developing. The concept of WDM services is also changing. WDMservices at first include Any cross-connections only and later also include ODUk cross-connections. In practice, an Any cross-connection, an ODUk cross-connection, and anelectrical cross-connection are used instead of a WDM service which is a general name.

To ensure that equipment processes services properly, configure services by equipment type.For boards that can transmit and receive different types of services, set the service types asrequired before configuring the services. The service type setting is the prerequisite to serviceconfigurations. Note that you need to differentiate between service type setting and serviceconfigurations.

6.1.2 Cross-Connection TypesBefore configuring WDM services, you need to be familiar with basic types of cross-connections.

Cross-connections on WDM equipment can be classified into two types: optical cross-connections and electrical cross-connections. Optical cross-connections cross-connect optical



144

signals and are not related to the types of carried services; electrical cross-connections cross-connect electrical signals and are closely related to the types of carried services.

Electrical cross-connections can be classified in different ways.

l Electrical cross-connections can be classified into Any cross-connections and ODUk cross-connections according to cross-connection levels and granularities. In practice, there is amapping relationship between Any cross-connections and types of the carried services.That is, Any cross-connections carry a specified type of services. For example, if an Anycross-connection carries GE services, it is also referred to as a GE cross-connection.

l Electrical cross-connections can be also classified into intra-board cross-connections andinter-board cross-connections according to their positions.– Intra-board cross-connections: Services signals are still on a board after they are

processed by a cross-connect unit in the board. As shown in Figure 6-2, cross-connections between channel 1 of client-side port 5 (RX3/TX3) on a board and channel1 of WDM-side port 201 (LP1/LP1) on the same board are referred to as intra-boardcross-connections.

Figure 6-2 Intra-board cross-connections

3(RX1/TX1)-1

4(RX2/TX2)-15(RX3/TX3)-16(RX4/TX4)-1

201(LP1/LP1)-1201(LP1/LP1)-2

201(LP1/LP1)-4201(LP1/LP1)-3

1(IN1/OUT1)-1

When ports or channels at the two ends of cross-connections are corresponded accordingto the arrangement sequence, the cross-connections are also referred to as direct cross-connections. See Figure 6-3.

Figure 6-3 Direct cross-connections

A3(RX1/TX1)-1

4(RX2/TX2)-15(RX3/TX3)-16(RX4/TX4)-1

201(LP1/LP1)-1201(LP1/LP1)-2

201(LP1/LP1)-4201(LP1/LP1)-3

1(IN1/OUT1)-1

– Inter-board cross-connections: Service signals are transmitted to the cross-connect unit

on another board after they are processed by the cross-connect unit on a board. SeeFigure 6-4.



145

Figure 6-4 Inter-board cross-connections

A

B

3(RX1/TX1)-1

4(RX2/TX2)-15(RX3/TX3)-16(RX4/TX4)-1

201(LP1/LP1)-1201(LP1/LP1)-2

201(LP1/LP1)-4201(LP1/LP1)-3

1(IN1/OUT1)-1

3(RX1/TX1)-1

4(RX2/TX2)-15(RX3/TX3)-16(RX4/TX4)-1

201(LP1/LP1)-1201(LP1/LP1)-2

201(LP1/LP1)-4201(LP1/LP1)-3

1(IN1/OUT1)-1

TIP

When SNCP protection implemented by cross-connections (this SNCP protection is referred to as SNCPservices in some scenarios) is configured, cross-connections with the same source but different sinks areconfigured at the source end of the SNCP protection (services are dually fed) and cross-connections withthe same sink but different sources are configured at the sink end (services are selectively received).

6.1.3 Cross-Connection AbilityThe product provides the service grooming within the NE through the cross-connection bus. Asa result, the product can save the wavelength resource, lower the networking cost and make thenetwork more flexible.

The cross-connection ability depends on the cross-connection bus type, which is different in thetwo types of chassis.

The OptiX OSN 1800 I chassis has a low service access capacity, and its cross-connection busis simple. It grooms electrical layer signals as a service access node on the edge, and improvesthe utilization of wavelength resources at the access layer.

The OptiX OSN 1800 II chassis has a large service access capacity, and its cross-connection busis complex. It grooms electrical layer signals as a service convergence node, and enhances thenetwork flexibility.

NOTE

This section describes the cross-connection capability of the backpanel. Different boards may have differentcross-connection capacities and support different cross-connection slots. For details, see section Functionand Features in the Hardware Description.

OptiX OSN 1800 IFigure 6-5 shows the cross-connection capacities among the four slots of the OptiX OSN 1800I chassis. The cross-connection capacities are different.



146

Figure 6-5 Cross-connection ability of the OptiX OSN 1800 I chassis

Supports eight pairs of cross-connections of Any servicesSupports one pair of cross-connections of Any services.

SLOT 1 （SLOT 2）

SLOT 3 SLOT 4SL

OT

5

(SLO

T 6)

OptiX OSN 1800 IIFigure 6-6 shows the cross-connection capacities among the eight slots of the OptiX OSN 1800II chassis. The cross-connection capacities are different.

Figure 6-6 Cross-connection ability of the OptiX OSN 1800 II chassis

Supports eight pairs of cross-connections of Any services.Supports one pair of cross-connections of Any services.

SLOT 1 SLOT 2

SLOT 3 SLOT 4

SLOT 5 SLOT 6

SLOT 7 SLOT 8

SLO

T 9

SLO

T 10

SLO

T 11

6.1.4 Formats of Ethernet FramesTo implement the VLAN and QinQ functions, the IEEE 802.1q and IEEE 802.1ad protocolsdefine different formats of the Ethernet frames, which contain different VLAN information.

To implement the VLAN function, the IEEE 802.1q protocol defines the Ethernet frame formatthat contains the VLAN information. Compared with the ordinary Ethernet frame, the framewith the format defined by the IEEE 802.1q protocol is added with a four-byte header.

To implement VLAN nesting (QinQ), the IEEE 802.1ad protocol defines two VLAN tag types.See Figure 6-7. The VLAN tag types are defined to differentiate the services on the client sideand the services on the supplier service side.

l The VLAN tag used on the client side is represented as C-VLAN, of which the frame formatis the same as the frame format defined by the IEEE 802.1q protocol.



147

l The VLAN tag used on the supplier service side is represented as S-VLAN.

Figure 6-7 Formats of Ethernet frames

6 bytes 6 bytes 4 bytes 2 bytes 4 bytes

DestinationMAC Address VLAN Length/Type Data FCS Check

Character


C-VLANS-VLAN

4 bytes

Variablelength


Format of the frame withone C-VLAN tag

Source MACAddress

Variablelength

DestinationMAC Address C-VLAN Length/Type Data FCS Check

Character

Source MACAddress

DestinationMAC Address Length/Type Data FCS Check

CharacterSource MAC

Address

Variablelength

Format of the frame withone S-VLAN tag nested

with one C-VLAN tag

802.1q frame format

The length of the data field is variable. maximum length of the data field depends on themaximum frame length that the ports of the equipment support.

The four-byte S-VLAN or C-VLAN field is divided into two sub-fields: the tag protocol ID(TPID) and the tag control Information (TCI).

Both the TPID and TCI consist of two bytes. See Figure 6-8.

Figure 6-8 Positions of the TPID and TCI in the frame structure

C-VLANS-VLAN

2 2 2 2

TPID TPIDTCI TCI

6 bytes 6 bytes 2 bytes 4 bytes

DestinationMAC Address

Length/Type Data FCS CheckCharacter

Source MACAddress

bytes2 bytesbytesbytes Variablelength

l TPID structure

The TPID consists of two bytes and indicates the VLAN tag type. TPID of the C-VLAN isalways 0x8100 whereas the TPID of the S-VLAN can be customized. Refer to Table 6-1.



148

Table 6-1 Tag types defined by using the TPID

Tag Type Name Value

C-VLAN Tag 802.1q Tag Protocol Type 0x8100

S-VLAN Tag 802.1q Service Tag Type Customizable

NOTE

The IEEE 802.1ad specifies the TPID of the S-VLAN to 0x88a8. In actual application, the setting of TPIDfor the S-VLAN tag varies according to the equipment manufacturer. To ensure compatibility betweeninterconnected equipment, it is recommended that you set the TPIDs of the S-VLAN tags of theinterconnected equipment to the same value within 0X600–FFFF.

l TCI structure

The TCI structure of the S-TAG is basically the same as the TCI structure of the C-TAG. VLANID (VID) field consists of 12 bits and ranges from 0 to 4095. The difference is that the TCI ofthe S-TAG contains the drop eligible (DE) indication and works with the priority code point(PCP) to indicate the priority of the S-TAG frame.

The TCI structures of the C-TAG and S-TAG are shown in Figure 6-9 and Figure 6-10.

Figure 6-9 TCI structure of the C-TAG

Octets:

Bits:

PCP CFI VID

1 2

8 6 5 4 1 8 1

VID

The TCI field of the C-TAG consists of the following bytes:

l PCP: three bitsl CFI: one bit

Figure 6-10 TCI structure of the S-TAG

VID

Octets:

Bits:

PCP DE VID

1 2

8 6 5 4 1 8 1

The TCI field of the S-TAG consists of the following bytes:

l PCP: three bitsl DE: one bitl VID: 12 bits



149

6.1.5 External Ports and Internal PortsExternal ports on Ethernet boards are used to access the services on the user side. Internal portson Ethernet boards are used to encapsulate and map the services into the transmission networkfor transparent transmission.

External ports on Ethernet boards (that is, external physical ports) are also referred to as PORTports, client-side ports, or user-side ports, which are used to access Ethernet services on the userside.

Internal ports on Ethernet boards (that is, internal VCTRUNKs) are also referred to as system-side ports or backplane-side ports in certain cases, which are used to encapsulate and mapservices into the WDM side.

Figure 6-11 External ports and internal ports on Ethernet boards

External port

Encapsulation/Mappingmodule

Serviceprocessing

module

VCTRUNK port

Interfacemodule

Interfaceconversion

module

6.1.6 Auto-NegotiationThe auto-negotiation function allows the network equipment to send information of its supportedworking mode to the opposite end on the network. This function also allows the networkequipment to receive similar information that the opposite end may transfer.

The working modes of the interconnected ports on the equipment at both ends must be the same.Otherwise, the services are unavailable.

If the working mode of the port of the equipment on the opposite side is full duplex and if theworking mode of the port on the local equipment is auto-negotiation, the local equipment worksin the half-duplex mode. That is, the working modes of the interconnected ports at both ends aredifferent, and thus packets may be lost. Hence, when the working mode of the port of theequipment on the opposite side is full duplex, you need to set working mode of the port on thelocal equipment to full duplex.

NOTE

When the interconnected ports on both sides work in the auto-negotiation mode, the equipment on bothsides can negotiate the flow control through the auto-negotiation function.

The auto-negotiation function uses fast link pulses (FLPs) and normal link pulses (NLPs) totransfer information of the working mode so that no packet or upper layer protocol overheadneeds to be added.



150

6.1.7 Flow ControlDuring data processing/transferring, if the equipment fails to handle the flow received at theport, congestion occurs on the line. To reduce the number of packets that are discarded due tobuffer overflowing, proper flow control measures must be taken.

The half-duplex Ethernet port uses the back-pressure mechanism to control the flow. The full-duplex Ethernet port applies PAUSE frames to control the flow. Currently, the half-duplexEthernet function is not widely applied. Hence, the flow control function realized by Ethernetservice boards is used for the full-duplex Ethernet ports.

The flow control function realized by Ethernet service boards is classified into two types: auto-negotiation flow control and non-auto-negotiation flow control.

Auto-Negotiation Flow Control

When the Ethernet port works in the auto-negotiation mode, you can adopt the auto-negotiationflow control function. The auto-negotiation flow control modes include the following:

l Enable dissymmetric flow control

The port can transmit PAUSE frames in the case of congestion but cannot process thereceived PAUSE frames.

l Enable symmetric flow control

The port can transmit PAUSE frames and process the received PAUSE frames.

l Enable symmetric/dissymmetric flow control

The port has the following abilities:

– Transmits and processes PAUSE frames.

– Transmits PAUSE frames but cannot process the received PAUSE frames.

– Processes the received PAUSE frames but cannot transmit PAUSE frames.

l Disable

The port does not support the non-auto-negotiation flow control function.

Non-Auto-Negotiation Flow Control

When the Ethernet port works in a fixed working mode, you can adopt the non-auto-negotiationflow control function. The non-auto-negotiation flow control modes include the following:

l Send only

The port can transmit PAUSE frames in the case of congestion but cannot process thereceived PAUSE frames.

l Receive only

The port can process the received PAUSE frames but cannot transmit PAUSE frames inthe case of congestion.

l Send and receive

The port can transmit PAUSE frames and process the received PAUSE frames.

l Disable

The port does not support the non-auto-negotiation flow control function.



151

Realization Principle

The realization principle of the flow control function is described as follows:

1. When congestion occurs in the receive queue of an Ethernet port (the data in the receivebuffer exceeds a certain threshold) and the port is capable of sending PAUSE frames, theport sends a PAUSE frame to the opposite end. The pause-time value in the frame is N(0<N≤65535).

2. If the Ethernet port at the opposite end is capable of processing PAUSE frames, this Ethernetport stops sending data within a specified period of time N (the unit is the time required forsending 512 bits) after receiving the PAUSE frame.

3. If the congestion at the receive port is cleared (the data in the receive buffer is below acertain threshold) but the pause-time does not end, the port sends a PAUSE frame whosepause-time is 0 to notify the opposite end to send data.

IEEE 802.3 defines the format of the PAUSE frame as follows:

l Destination address: 01-80-C2-00-00-01 (multicast address)l Source address: MAC address of the source portl Type/Length: 88-08 (MAC control frame)l MAC control code: 00-01 (PAUSE frame)l MAC control parameter: pause-time (two bytes)

Figure 6-12 Structure of the PAUSE frame

01-80-C2-00-00-01

XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX

88-08

00-01

XX-XX

Reserved

Destination address 6 octets

6 octetsSource address

Type/Length 2 octets

2 octets

2 octets

MAC control opcode

MAC control parameter(pause-time)

6.1.8 Tag AttributesIn a virtual LAN, the tag attribute of an Ethernet port indicates how the port processes Ethernetpackets.

Ethernet packets are classified into tagged and untagged packets in 802.1q. A four-byte field isadded to the Ethernet frame header of a tagged packet. The 802.1q-compliant field is used toidentify the VLAN ID. An untagged packet does not have such a four-byte field.

An Ethernet port has the following three types, which are Tag aware, Access and Hybrid.



152

See Table 6-2 for details on how an Ethernet board processes tagged and untagged packets atthe ingress.

Table 6-2 Processing policy at ingress

Port Type Tagged Packet Untagged Packet

Tag aware Transparently transmitted Discarded

Access Discarded Added with the defaultVLAN tag

Hybrid Transparently transmitted Added with the defaultVLAN tag

See Table 6-3 for details on how an Ethernet board processes tagged and untagged packets atthe egress.

Table 6-3 Processing policy at egress

Port Type Tagged Packet Untagged Packet

Tag aware Transparently transmitted -

Access The VLAN tag is removed -

Hybrid The VLAN tag is removed ifit is the same as the defaulttag for the portTransparently transmitted ifthe VLAN tag is differentfrom the default tag for theport

-

As shown in Table 6-2 and Table 6-3, in an actual network, you need to set the port type forthe Ethernet board of an NE according to the Tag attribute of the messages sent from the user-side equipment. If the user-side equipment sends the Untag message, set the external port toAccess and set the internal port to Tag aware. If the user-side equipment sends the Tag message,set the external port to Tag aware and set the internal port to Tag aware.

For example, if the source equipment of a service does not support Tag messages but the sinkequipment supports Tag messages, you need to set the external port of the Ethernet board thatresides on the NE connected to the source to Access, and set the external port of the Ethernetboard that resides on the NE connected to the sink to Tag aware. Set the internal ports of theEthernet board that resides on the NEs connected to the source and the sink to Tag aware.

6.1.9 BridgesBridge is the functional unit that is used to implement the interconnection between two or moreLANs.

Various bridge (VB) is the unique concept for Huawei products. For Ethernet data boards thathave the Layer 2 switching capability, the switching domain can be divided into multiple sub-



153

switching domains. As a result, if no services are interconnected, different VBs cannot accesseach other. Each VB has an independent configuration mode and uses an independent VLAN.Different VBs can use the same VLAN.

By configuring the mounting relationship, you can mount multiple external ports andVCTRUNK ports to the same VB.

Figure 6-13 shows the relationship between the VBs, external ports, and VCTRUNK ports.

Figure 6-13 Relationship between the VBs, external ports, and VCTRUNKs

VB1

VB2

PORT1

PORT2

PORT3

PORT4

PORT5

PORT6

VCTRUNK5

VCTRUNK4

VCTRUNK6

VCTRUNK3

VCTRUNK2

VCTRUNK1

Types of Bridges

As listed in Table 6-4, Ethernet boards support three types of bridges.

Table 6-4 Types of bridges supported by Ethernet boards

Bridge Type Bridge Switch Mode Bridge LearningMode

IngressFilter

IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge SVL/Ingress FilterDisable

SVL Disabled

IEEE 802.1q virtual bridge IVL/Ingress FilterEnable

IVL Enabled

IEEE 802.1adprovider bridge

1 SVL/Ingress FilterDisable

SVL Disabled

2 IVL/Ingress FilterEnable

IVL Enabled



154

l IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge: The IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge does not check the contents ofthe VLAN tags in the data frames. It performs Layer 2 switching based on the destinationMAC addresses of the data frames.

l IEEE 802.1q bridge: The IEEE 802.1q bridge supports isolation by using one layer ofVLAN tags. This bridge checks the contents of the VLAN tags in the data frames andperforms Layer 2 switching based on the destination MAC addresses and VLAN IDs.

l The IEEE 802.1ad bridge: The IEEE 802.1ad bridge supports data frames with two layersof VLAN tags. This bridge adopts the outer S-VLAN tags to isolate different VLANs andsupports only the mounted ports whose attributes are C-Aware or S-Aware. This bridgesupports the following switching modes:

1. This bridge does not check the contents of the VLAN tags in the data frames. Itperforms Layer 2 switching based on the destination MAC addresses of the dataframes.

2. This bridge checks the contents of the VLAN tags in the data frames and performsLayer 2 switching based on the destination MAC addresses and the S-VLAN IDs ofthe data frames.

MAC Address Learning

To forward Layer 2 switching services, a bridge must learn the MAC addresses of the services.A bridge can learn MAC addresses in shared VLAN learning (SVL) mode or independenceVLAN learning (IVL) mode.

l When a bridge learns MAC addresses in SVL mode, it creates an entry in the MAC addresstable based on the source MAC address and the source port of a data frame. This entry isvalid to all VLANs

l When a bridge learns MAC addresses in IVL mode, it creates an entry in the MAC addresstable based on the source MAC address of a data frame, the VLAN ID contained in the dataframe, and the source port of the data frame. This entry is valid only to the VLAN identifiedby the VLAN ID contained in the data frame.

MAC Address Table

Entries in the MAC address table indicate the corresponding relationship between the MACaddresses and the ports. MAC address table contains the following entries:

l Dynamic entry

Indicates the entry that the bridge obtains by adopting the SVL/IVL learning mode. Thedynamic entry ages and is even lost after the Ethernet switching board is reset.

l Static entry

Indicates the entry corresponding to the MAC address and the port that the networkadministrator manually adds to the MAC address table on the NMS. The static entry doesnot age and is not lost after the Ethernet switching board is reset.

l Blackhole entry

Indicates the entry used to discard the data frame that contains the specified destinationMAC address, and is also referred to as the MAC address disable entry. The blackhole entryis configured by the network administrator. This entry does not age and is not lost after theEthernet switching board is reset.



155

NOTE

l If a routing entry is not updated within a specific period of time, that is, if the MAC address fails to be learnedbecause the new data frame from the MAC address is not received, this routing entry is automatically deleted.This mechanism is considered as aging, and this period of time is considered as the aging time. The agingtime of the MAC address table is five minutes by default and can be set by using the NMS.

l A limited number of MAC addresses can be learned at a time.

Hub/Spoke

Generally, the central station and non-central stations can access each other but the non-centralstations cannot access each other in the case of convergence services. Hence, the ports mountedto the bridge need to be defined as Hub ports or Spoke ports.

l Hub portHub ports can access each other. Hub ports and Spoke ports can also access each other.

l Spoke portSpoke ports cannot access each other. Hub ports and Spoke ports can access each other.

The mounted ports are Hub ports by default.

6.1.10 VLAN GroupCertain VLANs with consecutive VLAN IDs are allocated to the same VLAN group. Generally,these VLANs are of the same service type.

U2000 or Web LCT creates services operations on the VLAN specified with the first VLAN IDin a VLAN group so that other VLANs in the VLAN group are applied with the sameconfiguration.

6.1.11 Board Model (Standard Mode and Compatible Mode)Starting from V100R003C01, some boards support new board models. To distinguish newmodels from existing models, the new board models are marked as standard mode and theexisting board models are marked as compatible mode. Compared with the compatible mode,the standard mode facilitates operations and reduces maintenance costs. Service configurationson the NMS vary according to board models.

Boards Supporting Standard Mode

Table 6-5 lists the boards that support standard mode, the names of the boards in different modes,and the availability of the boards on different types of equipment.

Table 6-5 Names displayed on the NMS and availability on different types of equipment

Physical Board Name in Standard Mode(Standard Mode, addinglogical board)

Name in CompatibleMode (CompatibleMode, adding logicalboard)

F2LSX F2LSX LSX

F2LQM F2LQM LQM



156

Physical Board Name in Standard Mode(Standard Mode, addinglogical board)

Name in CompatibleMode (CompatibleMode, adding logicalboard)

F2LQM2 F2LQM2 LQM2

F2ELOM F2ELOM ELOM

F2LDGF2 F2LDGF2 LDGF2

F1LDX F1LDX -

NOTE

l The F1LDX boards support only the standard mode.

l The standard mode is applicable only to the boards listed in the table above. The boards not listed inthe table support only the compatible mode.

6.1.12 ODUflexStarting from V100R003C01, the equipment supports the ODUflex (ODUk with variablebandwidth) technology, which enables users to flexibly configure the container capacity basedon service sizes, leveraging line bandwidth.

Applicable Boards

OptiX OSN 1800 supports ODUflex that is applicable to the following boards:

l F2ELOM

NOTE

The F2ELOM board support ODUflex only when they work in Standard Mode and ODU TimeslotConfiguration Mode is set to Assign random.

ODUflex Involved Operations

The following describes the GUIs for creating services involving ODUflex on the NMS and thenavigation paths.

Table 6-6 GUIs and navigation paths

GUI on the NMS Description Navigation Path

WDM Interface When the board where you want tocreate services is a line board or theLOA board and the services need tobe encapsulated into ODUflexservices, set ODU TimeslotConfiguration Mode to Assignrandom.

In the NE Explorer, select therequired board and chooseConfiguration > WDMInterface > AdvancedAttributes from the FunctionTree.



157

GUI on the NMS Description Navigation Path

Create Cross-Connection Service

When Level is set to ODUflex, youmust set ODUflex Timeslots.

In the NE Explorer, select therequired NE and chooseConfiguration > WDMService Management fromthe Function Tree. In thedisplayed window, clickNew.

NOTE

l The value of ODUflex Timeslots is in the range of 3-7, which indicates that the service rate supportedby ODUflex is in the range of 3.75 Gbit/s (3 x 1.25 Gbit/s) to 8.75 Gbit/s (7 x 1.25 Gbit/s).

l The rule for calculating the value of ODUflex Timeslots is as follows: Value = Service rate mappingthe service type configured at a port/Bandwidth of each TS subtimeslot (1.25 Gbit/s). If the value isnot an integer, the value is the quotient plus 1. For example, if an FC400 service is received, the valueof ODUflex Timeslots is 4 (4.25 Gbit/s/1.25 Gbit/s = 3.4, 3 + 1 = 4).

ODUflex Configuration ProcedureFigure 6-14 shows the ODUflex configuration flowchart.

Figure 6-14 ODUflex configuration flowchart

Configure cross-connections

Configure the port working mode

Configure the timeslot

configuration mode

Configure the service type

1

2

3

4

Table 6-7 describes the ODUflex configuration procedure.



158

Table 6-7 Configuration procedure

No. Action Involved Board Description

1 Configure theport workingmode.

F2ELOM l Parameter settings: Set Port WorkingMode to ODUflex non-convergencemode.NOTE

Before setteing Port Working Mode, ensureService Type of the port is NULL.

l Operation description: In the NE Explorer,select the required board and chooseConfiguration > Working Mode from theFunction Tree. In the displayed window.

2 Configure thetimeslotconfigurationmode.

F2ELOM l Parameter settings: Set ODU TimeslotConfiguration Mode to Assign randomfor the required ports.

l Operation description: In the NE Explorer,select the required board and chooseConfiguration > WDM Interface >Advanced Attributes from the FunctionTree.

3 Configure theservice type.

F2ELOM l Parameter settings: Set the service typebased on the service plan.

l Operation description: ChooseConfiguration > WDM Interface from theFunction Tree.

5 Configurecross-connections.

F2ELOM: cross-connections fromLP ports to theWDM side

l Parameter settings:– Set Level to ODUflex and select the

source slot, sink slot, source optical port,sink optical port, source optical channel,and sink optical channel.

– Set ODUflex Timeslots based on theservice type that you set in step 3. Seethe note below Table 6-6 to calculate thevalue.

l Operation description: In the NE Explorer,select the required NE and chooseConfiguration > WDM ServiceManagement from the Function Tree. Inthe displayed window, click New.

6.2 Configuring Services on BoardsThe services that can be configured vary according to boards. The topic describes serviceconfigurations on some boards that provide comprehensive functions.



159

6.2.1 ELOM Service Configuration

Physical and Logical PortsThis section describes the display of ports on the board and provides the port models and theconfiguration steps for this board.

Display of Optical PortsTable 6-8 lists the sequence number displayed on an NMS of the optical port on the ELOMboard front panel.

Table 6-8 Display of the ELOM optical ports

Optical Ports on the FrontPanel Optical Port Displayed on the U2000

IN1/OUT1 1

IN2/OUT2 2

RX1/TX1 3

RX2/TX2 4

RX3/TX3 5

RX4/TX4 6

RX5/TX5 7

RX6/TX6 8

RX7/TX7 9

RX8/TX8 10

NOTE

An optical port number displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of actual optical ports, one for transmittingsignals, and the other for receiving signals.

Port Models of ELOM(COMP)l 1*AP8 ODU1 mode



160

Figure 6-15 Port model for the ELOM(COMP) board working in 1*AP8 ODU1 mode

1(IN1/OUT1)

2(IN2/OUT2)

ODU2

3(RX1/TX1)

5(RX3/TX3)

4(RX2/TX2)

6(RX4/TX4)

7(RX5/TX5)

9(RX7/TX7)

8(RX6/TX6)

10(RX8/TX8)

OTU2

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1




51ODU1

: Client-side services

: WDM-side services

: Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

: Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS

NOTE

The client-side signals received at client-side optical ports 3–10 (RX1/TX1 to RX8/TX8) can becross-connected to any 8 channels among 32 channels of logical ports 201–207.

– Alarms and performance events related to client signal overheads are reported throughchannel 1 of client-side optical ports 3–10 (RX1/TX1 to RX8/TX8).

– Alarms and performance events related to ODU1 electrical-layer overheads are reportedthrough channel 1 of logical ports 201, 203, 205, and 207.

– Alarms and performance events related to OTU2/ODU2 electrical-layer overheads arereported through channels 1 and 2 of logical port 51.

– Alarms related to the WDM-side optical module and optical-layer alarms andperformance events are reported through channel 1 of WDM-side optical ports 1 and 2(IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2).

l 1*AP4 ODU1 mode



161


1(IN1/OUT1)

2(IN2/OUT2)

ODU2

3(RX1/TX1)

5(RX3/TX3)

7(RX5/TX5)

9(RX7/TX7)

OTU2





51ODU1


: WDM-side services


– When the client services are not OTU1:

– Alarms and performance events related to client signal overheads are reportedthrough channel 1 of client-side optical ports 3, 5, 7, and 9 (RX1/TX1, RX3/TX3,RX5/TX5 and RX7/TX7).

– The downstream ODU1 alarms and performance events are reported throughchannel 1 of logical ports 201, 203, 205, and 207.

– When the client services are OTU1:– The upstream OTU1 and ODU1 alarms and performance events are reported through

channel 1 of client-side optical ports 3, 5, 7, and 9 (RX1/TX1, RX3/TX3, RX5/TX5and RX7/TX7).




l 1*AP1 ODU2 mode



162


1(IN1/OUT1)

2(IN2/OUT2)

ODU23(RX1/TX1) OTU2



: WDM-side services


– Alarms and performance events related to client signal overheads are reported throughchannel 1 of client-side optical port 3 (RX1/TX1).

– Alarms and performance events related to OTU2/ODU2 electrical-layer overheads arereported through logical port 201.


l 1*AP2 ODU2 mode


1(IN1/OUT1)

2(IN2/OUT2)

ODU2

3(RX1/TX1)

7(RX5/TX5)

OTU2



: WDM-side services




163

– Alarms and performance events related to client signal overheads are reported throughchannel 1 of client-side optical ports 3 and 7 (RX1/TX1 and RX5/TX5).

– Alarms and performance events related to OTU2/ODU2 electrical-layer overheads arereported through logical port 201.


l 1*AP8 ODU0&ODU1 mode

Figure 6-19 Port model for the ELOM(COMP) board working in 1*AP8 ODU0&ODU1 mode

1(IN1/OUT1)

2(IN2/OUT2)ODU2

3(RX1/TX1)

5(RX3/TX3)

4(RX2/TX2)

6(RX4/TX4)

7(RX5/TX5)

9(RX7/TX7)

8(RX6/TX6)

10(RX8/TX8)

OTU2

ODU1









51(LP1/LP1)-7169

51(LP1/LP1)-7170

51(LP1/LP1)-7171

51(LP1/LP1)-7172

51(LP1/LP1)-7173

51(LP1/LP1)-7174

51(LP1/LP1)-7175

51(LP1/LP1)-7176

51(LP1/LP1)-8705

51(LP1/LP1)-8706

51(LP1/LP1)-8707

51(LP1/LP1)-8708

ODU0


: WDM-side services



NOTE

The signals received at logical ports 201–208 can be cross-connected to any 8 channels among the12 channels at optical port 52, but the total bandwidth cannot exceed 10.3 Gbit/s.

– When the client services are not OTU1:– Alarms and performance events related to client signal overheads are reported

through channel 1 of client-side optical ports 3–10 (RX1/TX1 to RX8/TX8).– The downstream ODU0/ODU1 alarms and performance events are reported through

channel 1 of logical ports 201 to 208.– When the client services are OTU1:

– The upstream OTU1 and ODU1 alarms and performance events are reported throughchannel 1 of client-side optical ports 3 (RX1/TX1), 5 (RX3/TX3), 7 (RX5/TX5) and9 (RX7/TX7).





164

– Alarms related to the WDM-side optical module and optical-layer alarms andperformance events are reported through channel 1 of WDM-side optical ports 1 (IN1/OUT1) and 2 (IN2/OUT2).

Port Models of ELOM(STND)l 1*AP8 general mode

Figure 6-20 Port model for the ELOM(STND) board working in 1*AP8 general mode

1(IN1/OUT1)

2

OTU2ODU2

ODU1(8705)

2(IN2/OUT2)

1

201(LP1/LP1)-13(TX1/RX1)

5(TX3/RX3)

4(TX2/RX2)

6(TX4/RX4)

7(TX5/RX5)

9(TX7/RX7)

8(TX6/RX6)

10(TX8/RX8)

201(LP1/LP1)-8

202(LP2/LP2)-1

202(LP2/LP2)-8

OTU2ODU2

208(LP8/LP8)-1

208(LP8/LP8)-8

ODU0/ODU1/ODUflex

ODU0/ODU1/ODUflex

ODU0/ODU1/ODUflex

201

202

208

ODU1(8708)

ODU0(7169)

ODU0(7176)

ODUflex(8193)

ODUflex(8196)

ODU1(8705)

ODU1(8708)

ODU0(7169)

ODU0(7176)

ODUflex(8193)

ODUflex(8196)

ODU0(7681)

ODU0(7688)

ODU0(7681)

ODU0(7688)

: Client-side services: WDM-side services

: Active service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS

– Ports 201 to 208 can be set to ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0), ODU1

convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1), ODU1 non-convergence mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1), ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex), or None (not for ports)mode. The default mode of ports 201, 203, 205, and 207 is ODU1 non-convergencemode. The default mode of ports 202, 204, 206, and 208 is None (not for ports).

– After power is supplied to the board, straight-through cross-connections are configuredfrom channel 1 at ports 3(TX1/RX1)-10(TX8/RX8) to channel 1 at ports 201-208 bydefault. When a port works in ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1) mode, youcan configure cross-connections from channel 1 at any port among ports 3(TX1/RX1)-10(TX8/RX8) to any of the eight channels at the port.

– OTU1 services can be received only through ports 3(TX1/RX1), 5(TX3/RX3), 7(TX5/RX5), and 9(TX7/RX7) on the client side.– The upstream OTU1 and ODU1 alarms and performance events are reported through

channel 1 of corresponding client-side optical ports.– The downstream ODU1 alarms and performance events are reported through

channels 8705-8708 at optical ports 1 and 2.– When the client services are not OTU1:



165

– Alarms and performance events related to client signal overheads are reportedthrough channel 1 of corresponding client-side optical ports.

– ODU0 alarms and performance events are reported through channels 7169-7176 orchannels 7681-7688 at optical ports 1 and 2. ODU1 alarms and performance eventsare reported through channels 8705-8708 at optical ports 1 and 2. ODUflex alarmsand performance events are reported through channels 8193-8196 at optical ports 1and 2.

– When ODUk cross-connections are configured, the channel IDs vary according toODUk mapping paths. The following table lists the mapping between channel IDs andmapping paths.

Mapping Path Channel ID

ODU0->ODU1->ODU2a 7681-7688

ODU0->ODU2 7169-7176

ODU1->ODU2 8705-8708

ODUflex->ODU2 8193-8196

a: Eight ODU0 channels are encapsulated into four ODU1 channels in sequence witheach ODU1 channel containing two ODU0 channels. For example, ODU0 channels7681 and 7682 are encapsulated into ODU1 channel 8705 and ODU0 channels 7683and 7684 are encapsulated into ODU1 channel 8706.

– Alarms and performance events related to OTU2/ODU2 electrical-layer overheads are

reported through channel 1 of WDM-side optical ports 1 (IN1/OUT1) and 2 (IN2/OUT2).


NOTE

The total bandwidth for services received at ports 201(LP1/LP1)-208(LP8/LP8) cannot exceed 10Gbit/s if intra-board 1+1 protection is configured. If intra-board 1+1 protection is not configured, thetotal bandwidth can reach 20 Gbit/s.

l 1*AP1 ODU2 mode



166

Figure 6-21 Port model for the ELOM(STND) board working in 1*AP1 ODU2 mode

1(IN1/OUT1)

2(IN2/OUT2)

ODU23(RX1/TX1)

ODU2 OTU2

ODU2 OTU2

201 1

2




: Standby service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS

– Alarms and performance events related to client signal overheads are reported through

channel 1 of client-side optical ports 3 (RX1/TX1).– Alarms and performance events related to OTU2/ODU2 electrical-layer overheads are

reported through channel 1 of WDM-side optical ports 1 (IN1/OUT1) and 2 (IN2/OUT2).


– Intra-board 1+1 protection or ODU2 SNCP protection can be configured on the WDMside.

l 1*AP2 ODUflex mode



167

Figure 6-22 Port model for the ELOM(STND) board working in 1*AP2 ODUflex mode

1(IN1/OUT1)

2(IN2/OUT2)

ODUflex3(RX1/TX1) ODU2 OTU2

201 1

2

7(RX5/TX5) ODUflex

205

ODUflex(8193)

ODUflex(8196)

ODU2 OTU2

ODUflex(8193)

ODUflex(8196)





– Alarms and performance events related to client signal overheads are reported throughchannel 1 of client-side optical ports 3 (RX1/TX1) and 7 (RX5/TX5).

– Alarms and performance events related to OTU2/ODU2 electrical-layer overheads arereported through channel 1 of WDM-side optical ports 1 (IN1/OUT1) and 2 (IN2/OUT2).

– Alarms and performance events related to ODUflex electrical-layer overheads arereported through channel 8193 - 8196 of WDM-side optical ports 1 (IN1/OUT1) and 2(IN2/OUT2).


– Intra-board 1+1 protection or ODUflex SNCP protection can be configured on theWDM side.

Board Configuration

This section describes the cross-connections and provides the configuration steps for this boardon the NMS.

Cross-Connections

When working in ODU1 aggregation mode, the ELOM board supports intra-board cross-connections of the received Any services. When working in 1*AP8 ODU0&ODU1 mode, theELOM board supports intra-board cross-connections of the ODU0 and ODU1 services. Theboard provides intra-board cross-connections of the services after required timeslots areconfigured. Figure 6-23 and Figure 6-24 show an example in which intra-board cross-connections are configured on the ELOM board.



168

Figure 6-23 Cross-connections on the ELOM board (1*AP8 ODU1 mode)

Client Side WDM Side

3(TX1/RX1)

4(TX2/RX2)

1(IN1/OUT1)

2(IN2/OUT2)


51(LP1/LP1)-1

1

10(TX8/RX8)

9(TX7/RX7)

5(TX3/RX3)

6(TX4/RX4)

7(TX5/RX5)

8(TX6/RX6)51(LP1/LP1)-2





Figure 6-24 Cross-connections on the ELOM board (1*AP8 ODU0&ODU1 mode)

3(TX1/RX1)

4(TX2/RX2)

1(IN1/OUT1)

2(IN2/OUT2)


1

10(TX8/RX8)

9(TX7/RX7)

5(TX3/RX3)

6(TX4/RX4)

7(TX5/RX5)

8(TX6/RX6)








51(LP1/LP1)-7169

51(LP1/LP1)-7170

51(LP1/LP1)-7171

51(LP1/LP1)-7172

51(LP1/LP1)-7173

51(LP1/LP1)-7174

51(LP1/LP1)-7175

51(LP1/LP1)-7176

51(LP1/LP1)-8705

51(LP1/LP1)-8706

51(LP1/LP1)-8707

51(LP1/LP1)-8708

WDM SideClient Side

l Intra-board cross-connections

– In 1*AP8 ODU1 mode, client signals are cross-connected to channels 1-8 of logicalports 201, 203, 205, 207. An example is shown as (1) in Figure 6-23.

– In 1*AP8 ODU0&ODU1 mode, ODU0 signals of logical ports 201-208 are cross-connected to channels 7169-7176 of logical ports 51, ODU1 signals of logical ports201-208 are cross-connected to channels 8705-8708 of logical ports 51. An example isshown as (1) in Figure 6-24.

Configuration Procedure of ELOM(COMP)1. Set board working mode.

l In the NE Explorer, select the ELOM board and then choose Configuration > WorkingMode from the Function Tree.

l select the corresponding mode in Board Working Mode as required.

l Optional: Select the working mode for each port in Port Working Mode.



169

NOTE

You need to set the working mode for each port only when Board Working Mode is 1*AP8ODU0&ODU1 mode.

2. Set port parameters.l Set the service type for the client-side optical ports 3 (RX1/TX1)-10 (RX8/TX8).l Set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode based on the requirements for service

mapping paths.For details on the configurations, see 5.10.1 ELOM Parameters.

3. Optional: When Board Working Mode is set to 1*AP8 ODU1 mode for the ELOM board,cross-connections from the client-side optical ports to logical ports 201, 203, 205 and 207must be configured. When configuring cross-connections, set Level to Any and ServiceType to the same value as that in the WDM interface.l Configure intra-board cross-connections. For details, see (1) in Figure 6-23.

Table 6-9 ELOM intra-board cross-connections (1*AP8 ODU1 mode)

Level

ServiceType

SourceOpticalPort

SourceOpticalChannel

Sink Optical Port SinkOpticalChannel

Any STM-1,STM-4...

3 (TX1/RX1) to 10(RX8/TX8)

1 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)203 (ClientLP3/ClientLP3)205 (ClientLP5/ClientLP5)207 (ClientLP7/ClientLP7)

1 to 8

4. Optional: When Board Working Mode is set to 1*AP8 ODU0&ODU1 mode for the

ELOM board, cross-connections from the logical ports 201-208 to logical ports 51 mustbe configured. When configuring cross-connections.l Configure intra-board cross-connections. For details, see (1) in Figure 6-24.



170

Table 6-10 ELOM intra-board cross-connections (1*AP8 ODU0&ODU1 mode)

Level

ServiceType

SourceOpticalPort



Any ODU0

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)

1 51(LP1/LP1) 7169 to 7176

Any ODU1

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)

1 51(LP1/LP1) 8705 to 8708

Configuration Procedure of ELOM(STND)1. Set board working mode.

l In the NE Explorer, select the ELOM board and then choose Configuration > WorkingMode from the Function Tree.

l select the corresponding mode in Board Working Mode as required.

l Optional: Select the working mode for each port in Port Working Mode.

NOTE

You need to set the working mode for each port only when Board Working Mode is 1*AP8 generalmode.

2. Set port parameters.

l Set the service type for the client-side optical ports 3 (RX1/TX1)-10 (RX8/TX8).

For details on the configurations, see 5.10.1 ELOM Parameters.

3. Configure intra-board pass-through services.

l In the NE Explorer, select the target NE. In the navigation tree, chooseConfiguration > WDM Service Management.

l Click New. In the Create Cross-Connection Service window that is displayed, setrelated parameters.

The detailed configuration is as follows:

l 1*AP8 general mode



171

Table 6-11 Configuration for intra-board pass-through services on the ELOM board

Levela

Source Board (ELOM) Sink Board (ELOM)

SourceOptical Port b


Sink OpticalPort b

Sink OpticalChannel

GE(GFP_T), orAny

3(TX1/RX1) 1 201(LP1/LP1) 1

GE(GFP_T), orAny

4(TX2/RX2) 1 202(LP2/LP2) 1

GE(GFP_T), orAny

5(TX3/RX3) 1 203(LP3/LP3) 1

GE(GFP_T), orAny

6(TX4/RX4) 1 204(LP4/LP4) 1

GE(GFP_T), orAny

7(TX5/RX5) 1 205(LP5/LP5) 1

GE(GFP_T), orAny

8(TX6/RX6) 1 206(LP6/LP6) 1

GE(GFP_T), orAny

9(TX7/RX7) 1 207(LP7/LP7) 1

GE(GFP_T), orAny

10(TX8/RX8) 1 208(LP8/LP8) 1

a: When Level is set to ANY, you need to set Service Type. The Service Type settingmust be the same as the service type specified in the WDM Interface window.b: When Port Working Mode is set to ODU1 convergence mode, a source opticalport can be cross-connected to any sink optical port.

l 1*AP1 ODU2 mode



172

In this mode, you do not need to configure intra-board pass-through or cross-connectionservices.

l 2*AP2 ODUflex modeIn this mode, you do not need to configure intra-board pass-through or cross-connectionservices.

4. Configure ODUk SNCP protection.l In the NE Explorer, select the target NE. In the navigation tree, choose

Configuration > WDM Service Management.l Click Create SNCP Service. In the Create SNCP Service window that is displayed,

set related parameters.

Table 6-12 Configuration for SNCP protection on the ELOM board

Item 1*AP8generalmode

1*AP1 ODU2 mode 1*AP2 ODUflexmode

Protection Type ODUK SNCP ODUK SNCP ODUK SNCP

Service Type ODU0,ODU1,ODUflex

ODU2 ODUflex

WorkingService

SourceOpticalPort

1(IN1/OUT1) 1(IN1/OUT1) 1(IN1/OUT1)

SourceOpticalChannel a

- - -

SinkOpticalPort

201(LP1/LP1) to 208(LP8/LP8)

201(LP1/LP1) 205(LP5/LP5)

SinkOpticalChannel

1 1 1

ProtectionService

SourceOpticalPort

2(IN2/OUT2) 2(IN2/OUT2) 2(IN2/OUT2)


- - -

a: To select an optical channel, click the button behind Source Slot. Mapping paths forservices are automatically displayed in Source Optical Channel based on the ServiceType and channel settings.

6.2.2 LEM18 Service Configuration



173

Physical and Logical PortsThis section describes how the ports on the LEM18 board front panel are displayed on the NMSand how to configure services for this board.

Display of PortsTable 6-13 lists the sequence numbers of the ports on the LEM18 board front panel displayedon the U2000.

Table 6-13 Display of the LEM18 ports

Port on the FrontPanel

Port Displayedon the NMS

Layer 2 ExternalPort

Layer 2 Internal Port

IN1/OUT1 3 PORT3 VCTRUNK1

IN2/OUT2 4 PORT4 VCTRUNK2

TX1/RX1 5 PORT5 VCTRUNK3

TX2/RX2 6 PORT6 /

… … … /

TX18/RX18 22 PORT22 /

NOTE

l An optical port displayed on the NMS indicates a pair of actual optical ports, one for transmitting signalsand the other for receiving signals.

l The Layer 2 logical ports that map ports IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2 vary according to board modes. Whenthe board works in OTN mode, the mapping Layer 2 logical ports are internal ports VCTRUNK1 andVCTRUNK2; when the board works in 10GE mode, the mapping Layer 2 logical ports are external portsPORT3 and PORT4.

l PORT5 and VCTRUNK3 share the same virtual port and only one port is valid at a time. PORT5 is validby default. When VCTRUNK3 is used, VCTRUNK3 can be displayed on the NMS only when TX1/RX1is deleted from the NMS.

l VCTRUNK3 is used only to enable cascading of boards housed in paired slots.

Port Modell OTN mode

The port model for LEM18 board in OTN mode is shown in Figure 6-25.



174

Figure 6-25 Port model for the LEM18 board working in OTN mode

6(RX2/TX2)

7(RX3/TX3)

8(RX4/TX4)

9(RX5/TX5)

10(RX6/TX6)

11(RX7/TX7)

22(RX18/TX18)

3(IN1/OUT1)

4(IN2/OUT2)

……

PORT6

PORT7

PORT8

PORT9

PORT10

PORT11

PORT22…

…

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2

VCTRUNK3

Backplane

5(RX1/TX1) PORT5

ODU2 OTU2

ODU2 OTU2


: WDM-side services

: Ethernet service link, which needs to be configured on the NMS

One-in-two module, which selects signals from only one of the two virtual ports (VCTRUNK3 and PORT5). The service to be received needs to be configured on the NMS.


– Alarms and performance events related to client signal overheads are reported through

ports VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK3 or channel 1 of client-side optical ports 5-22 (RX1/TX1 to RX18/TX18).

– Alarms and performance events related to OTN electrical-layer overheads are reportedthrough channel 1 of optical ports 3 (IN1/OUT1) and 4 (IN2/OUT2).


l 10GE modeThe port model for LEM18 board in 10GE mode is shown in Figure 6-26.



175

Figure 6-26 Port model for the LEM18 board working in 10GE mode

6(RX2/TX2)

7(RX3/TX3)

8(RX4/TX4)

9(RX5/TX5)

22(RX18/TX18)

3(IN1/OUT1)

4(IN2/OUT2)

……

……

PORT6

PORT7

PORT8

PORT9

PORT22

……

VCTRUNK3

PORT3

PORT4

Backplane

5(RX1/TX1) PORT5


: Ethernet service link, which needs to be configured on the NMS

One-in-two module, which selects signals from only one of the two virtual ports (VCTRUNK3 and PORT5). The service to be received needs to be configured on the NMS.


Alarms and performance events related to client signal overheads are reported through portVCTRUNK3 or channel 1 of client-side optical ports 3 (IN1/OUT1), 4 (IN2/OUT2), and5-22 (RX1/TX1 to RX18/TX18).

Board ConfigurationThis section describes how the ports on the LEM18 board front panel are displayed on the NMSand how to configure services for this board.

Configuration Procedure1. Set the optical port parameters of the board. Exercise caution when setting the following

parameters.


Board Mode The default value is OTN mode. If the board is not used in OTNapplication scenarios, set this parameter to 10GE mode.



176


ServiceType

Set the service type for client-side ports RX1/TX1 to RX18/TX18 basedon the actual service that is received.

For details on the description and configuration method of the parameters, see 5.10.6LEM18 Parameters.

2. Optional: When port VCTRUNK3 is used to enable board cascading, delete port 5 (RX1/TX1) and then port VCTRUNK3 will be valid automatically. For details, see B.21 DeletingPorts.

3. Set the Ethernet port parameters of the board. Exercise caution when setting the followingparameters.

Classification

Parameter

Description

Basicattributes

Enabled/Disabled

Set this parameter to Enabled for ports in use.

WorkingMode

Set the working mode to a value consistent with the workingmode of the client equipment.

MaximumFrame

The value must be equal to or greater than the user-definedmaximum frame length for transmitting data flows.

Networkattributes

PortAttributes

Set this parameter to C-Aware or S-Aware when the QinQtechnology is used for processing data packets.

Tagattributes

TAG When Port Attributes is UNI, set this parameter to a propervalue based on the VLAN tag contained in the data packets.

For details on the description and configuration method of the parameters, see 5.10.6LEM18 Parameters.

4. Configure Ethernet services, including EPL, EVPL, EPLAN and EVPLAN services. Fordetails, see 6.4 Configuring EPL/EVPL Services and 6.5 Configuring EPLAN/EVPLAN Services.

6.2.3 LQG Service Configuration

Physical and Logical PortsThis section describes the display of ports on the board and provides the configuration rules forthis board on the NMS.

Display of PortsTable 6-14 lists the sequence number displayed in an NMS system of the ports on the LQGboard front panel.



177

Table 6-14 Display of the LQG ports

Ports on the Front Panel Port Displayed on the U2000

IN1/OUT1 1

IN2/OUT2 2

TX1/RX1 3

TX2/RX2 4

TX3/RX3 5

TX4/RX4 6

NOTE


Port modelFigure 6-27 shows the port model on the LQG board.

Figure 6-27 Schematic diagram of the cross-connect ports on the LQG board

1(IN1/OUT1)

2(IN2/OUT2)

3(RX1/TX1)

5(RX3/TX3)

4(RX2/TX2)

6(RX4/TX4)

201(LP/LP)-2

201(LP/LP)-3

201(LP/LP)-1

201(LP/LP)-4

ODU5G OTU5G


: WDM-side services



l Alarms and performance events related to client signal overheads are reported through

channel 1 of client-side optical ports 3-6 (RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2, RX3/TX3, and RX4/TX4).l Alarms and performance events related to OTN electrical-layer overheads are reported

through channels 1 and 2 of logical port 201.l Alarms related to the WDM-side optical module and OTN optical-layer alarms and

performance events are reported through channel 1 of WDM-side optical ports 1 and 2(IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2).



178

Cross-Connect PortsThe LQG board supports inter-board cross-connections and intra-board cross-connections ofGE optical signals. This board implements service cross-connections through its cross-connectmodule. Figure 6-28 shows the cross-connections implemented on the LQG board.

Figure 6-28 Example of cross-connections of the LQG board

LQG

3(TX1/RX1)

4(TX2/RX2) 1(IN1/OUT1)

2(IN2/OUT2)Client Side

201(LP/LP)-1

OTU5G5(TX3/RX3)

6(TX4/RX4)

ODU5G

2

1

201(LP/LP)-2

201(LP/LP)-3

201(LP/LP)-4

Another board

3(TX1/RX1)


2(IN2/OUT2)ODU1

201(LP1/LP1)-1

8(TX6/RX6)

7(TX5/RX5)

201(LP1/LP1)-2

201(LP1/LP1)-5

201(LP1/LP1)-6

OTU1Client Side

WDM Side

WDM Side

Another board: LQG or LQM2. The figure uses the LQM2 board in AP8 mode as an example.

l Inter-board cross-connection

– The GE optical signals on the client side of the LQG board are cross-connected to theWDM-side ports 201 of LQM2 board or another LQG board. For details, see (1) inFigure 6-28.

l Intra-board cross-connection– The client-side GE optical signals of the LQG board are cross-connected to the WDM-

side ports 201 of this board. For details, see (2) in Figure 6-28.

Board ConfigurationThis section describes the display of ports on the board and provides the configuration rules forthis board on the NMS.

Cross-Connect PortsThe LQG board supports inter-board cross-connections and intra-board cross-connections ofGE optical signals. This board implements service cross-connections through its cross-connectmodule. Figure 6-29 shows the cross-connections implemented on the LQG board.



179

Figure 6-29 Example of cross-connections of the LQG board

LQG

3(TX1/RX1)


2(IN2/OUT2)Client Side

201(LP/LP)-1

OTU5G5(TX3/RX3)

6(TX4/RX4)

ODU5G

2

1

201(LP/LP)-2

201(LP/LP)-3

201(LP/LP)-4

Another board

3(TX1/RX1)


2(IN2/OUT2)ODU1

201(LP1/LP1)-1

8(TX6/RX6)

7(TX5/RX5)

201(LP1/LP1)-2

201(LP1/LP1)-5

201(LP1/LP1)-6

OTU1Client Side

WDM Side

WDM Side

Another board: LQG or LQM2. The figure uses the LQM2 board in AP8 mode as an example.


– The GE optical signals on the client side of the LQG board are cross-connected to the

WDM-side ports 201 of LQM2 board or another LQG board. For details, see 1 inFigure 6-29.

l Intra-board cross-connection– The client-side GE optical signals of the LQG board are cross-connected to the WDM-

side ports 201 of this board. For details, see 2 in Figure 6-29.

Configuration Procedure1. Set board parameters.

l Set the service types at ports 3 to 6 (that is, TX1/RX1 to TX4/RX4) on the client side.The service types are set at the IN1/OUT1 port to GE or GE (GFP-T).

For details on the configurations and other parameters, see 5.10.8 LQG Parameters.2. Configure cross-connections. The Level should be set the same value as Service Type of

the WDM-side ports.

l Configure inter-board cross-connections. For details, see 1 in Figure 6-29.



180

Table 6-15 LQG inter-board cross-connections

Level

Source board(LQG)

Sink board (LQM2in AP8 mode)

Sink board(LQM2 in2LQM mode)

Sink board(anotherLQG)

SourceOpticalPort


SinkOpticalPort

SinkOpticalChannel

SinkOpticalPort

SinkOpticalChannel

SinkOpticalPort

SinkOpticalChannel

GE

3(TX1/RX1)4(TX2/RX2)5(TX3/RX3)6(TX4/RX4)

1 201(LP1/LP1)

1, 2, 5,6

201(LP1/LP1)202(LP2/LP2)

1, 2 201(LP1/LP1)

1 to 4

GE(GFP-T)


1 201(LP1/LP1)

1, 2, 5,6

201(LP1/LP1)202(LP2/LP2)

1, 2 201(LP1/LP1)

1 to 4

l Configure intra-board cross-connections. For details, see 2 in Figure 6-29.

Table 6-16 LQG intra-board cross-connections

Level Source board (LQG) Sink board (LQG)

SourceOptical Port


Sink OpticalPort

Sink OpticalChannel

GE 3(TX1/RX1)4(TX2/RX2)5(TX3/RX3)6(TX4/RX4)

1 201(LP1/LP1) 1 to 4



181

Level Source board (LQG) Sink board (LQG)

SourceOptical Port


Sink OpticalPort

Sink OpticalChannel

GE(GFP-T)


1 201(LP1/LP1) 1 to 4

For details on the configurations, see 6.3.1 Configuring Cross-Connection Service.

6.2.4 LQM2 Service Configuration

Physical and Logical Ports

This section describes the display of ports on the board and provides the configuration rules forthis board on the NMS.

Display of Ports

Table 6-17 lists the sequence number displayed on the U2000 of the port on the LQM2 boardfront panel.

Table 6-17 Display of the LQM2 ports


IN1/OUT1 1

IN2/OUT2 2

TX1/RX1 3

TX2/RX2 4

TX3/RX3 5

TX4/RX4 6

TX5/RX5 7

TX6/RX6 8

TX7/RX7 9

TX8/RX8 10



182

NOTE

l An EVOA optical module can be installed at any client-side port on the TNF2LQM2 board. When anEVOA module is installed at a client-side port, the attenuation of the EVOA optical module isconfigured at the client-side port, and the related alarms are also reported at the client-side port.

l An optical port number displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of actual optical ports, one fortransmitting signals, and the other for receiving signals.

Port model of TNF1LQM2 boardl AP8 mode

Figure 6-30 shows the port model of the LQM2 board in AP8 mode.

Figure 6-30 Port model of the LQM2 board (AP8 mode)


: WDM-side services



1(IN1/OUT1)

2(IN2/OUT2)

ODU1

201(LP1/LP1)-13(RX1/TX1)

5(RX3/TX3)

4(RX2/TX2)

6(RX4/TX4)

7(RX5/TX5)

9(RX7/TX7)

8(RX6/TX6)

10(RX8/TX8)

201(LP1/LP1)-2

201(LP1/LP1)-3

201(LP1/LP1)-4

201(LP1/LP1)-5

201(LP1/LP1)-6

201(LP1/LP1)-7

201(LP1/LP1)-8

OTU1

– Alarms and performance events related to client signal overheads are reported on

channel 1 of client-side optical ports 3-10 (RX1/TX1 to RX8/TX8).– Alarms and performance events related to OTN electrical-layer overheads are reported

on channels 1 and 2 of logical port 201.– Alarms related to the WDM-side optical module and optical-layer alarms and

performance events are reported on channel 1 of WDM-side optical ports 1 and 2 (IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2).

l 2LQM modeFigure 6-31 shows the port model of the LQM2 board in 2LQM mode.



183

Figure 6-31 Port model of the LQM2 board (2LQM mode)

1(IN1/OUT1)

2(IN2/OUT2)

ODU1201(LP1/LP1)-13(RX1/TX1)

5(RX3/TX3)

4(RX2/TX2)

6(RX4/TX4)

7(RX5/TX5)

9(RX7/TX7)

8(RX6/TX6)

10(RX8/TX8)

202(LP2/LP2)-1

201(LP1/LP1)-2

201(LP1/LP1)-3

201(LP1/LP1)-4OTU1

202(LP2/LP2)-2

202(LP2/LP2)-3

202(LP2/LP2)-4

ODU1 OTU1


: WDM-side services




channel 1 of client-side optical ports 3-10 (RX1/TX1 to RX8/TX8).– Alarms and performance events related to OTN electrical-layer overheads are reported

on channel 1 of logical ports 201 and 202.– Alarms related to the WDM-side optical module and optical-layer alarms and


Port model of TNF2LQM2 boardThe TNF2LQM2 board can work in four different modes: 1 x AP8 ODU1 mode, 2 x AP4 ODU1mode, 2 x AP2 ODU0 mode, 2 x AP3 ODU1 mode.

l 1 x AP8 ODU1 modeFigure 6-32 shows the port model of the TNF2LQM2 board in 1 x AP8 ODU1 mode.



184

Figure 6-32 Port model of the TNF2LQM2 board (1 x AP8 ODU1 mode)

1(IN1/OUT1)

2(IN2/OUT2)

ODU1

201(LP1/LP1)-13(RX1/TX1)

5(RX3/TX3)

4(RX2/TX2)

6(RX4/TX4)

7(RX5/TX5)

9(RX7/TX7)

8(RX6/TX6)

10(RX8/TX8)

201(LP1/LP1)-2

201(LP1/LP1)-3

201(LP1/LP1)-4

201(LP1/LP1)-5

201(LP1/LP1)-6

201(LP1/LP1)-7

201(LP1/LP1)-8

ODU1 OTU1

ODU1 OTU1

201 1

2






channel 1 of client-side optical ports 3-10 (RX1/TX1 to RX8/TX8).– Alarms, performance events, and configurations related to OTU1/ODU1 overheads are

reported on channel 1 of optical ports 1 and 2.– Alarms related to the WDM-side optical module and optical-layer alarms and

performance events are reported on channel 1 of WDM-side optical ports 1 (IN1/OUT1)and 2 (IN2/OUT2).

– The 201 port supports ODU1 convergence mode and ODU1 non-convergence mode. Itworks in ODU1 convergence mode by default.




185


1(IN1/OUT1)

2(IN2/OUT2)

ODU1201(LP1/LP1)-13(RX1/TX1)

5(RX3/TX3)

4(RX2/TX2)

6(RX4/TX4)

7(RX5/TX5)

9(RX7/TX7)

8(RX6/TX6)

10(RX8/TX8)

202(LP2/LP2)-1

201(LP1/LP1)-2

201(LP1/LP1)-3

201(LP1/LP1)-4OTU1

202(LP2/LP2)-2

202(LP2/LP2)-3

202(LP2/LP2)-4

ODU1 OTU1

ODU1

ODU1

1

2

201

202


: Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS: Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS


channel 1 of client-side optical ports 3-10 (RX1/TX1 to RX8/TX8).– Alarms, performance events, and configurations related to OTU1/ODU1 overheads are



– The 201 and 202 ports support ODU1 convergence mode and ODU1 non-convergencemode. They work in ODU1 convergence mode by default.




186


1(IN1/OUT1)

9(TX7/RX7)

3(RX1/TX1)

4(RX2/TX2)

7(RX5/TX5)

8(RX6/TX6)

202(LP2/LP2)-1

201(LP1/LP1)-1

OTU1ODU1

2

203(LP3/LP3)-1

204(LP4/LP4)-1

ODU0(4353)

ODU0(4354)

OTU1ODU1

ODU0(4353)

ODU0(4354)

2(IN2/OUT2)OTU1ODU1

ODU0(4353)

ODU0(4354)

10(TX8/RX8)OTU1ODU1

ODU0(4353)

ODU0(4354)

1

9

10

201(LP1/LP1)-2

202(LP2/LP2)-2

203(LP3/LP3)-2

204(LP4/LP4)-2





channel 1 of client-side optical ports 3(RX1/TX1), 4(RX2/TX2), 7(RX5/TX5), 8(RX6/TX6).

– Alarms, performance events, and configurations related to ODU0 signal overheads arereported on channels 4353 and 4354 of WDM-side optical ports.

– Alarms, performance events, and configurations related to ODU1/OTU1 signaloverheads are reported on channel 1 of optical ports 1, 2, 9, and 10.

– Alarms, performance events, and configurations related to WDM-side optical modulesand the optical layer are reported on channel 1 of WDM-side optical ports 1, 2, 9, and10.

– Cross-connections from ports 3(RX1/TX1), 4(RX2/TX2), 7(RX5/TX5), 8(RX6/TX6)to channel 1 of ports 201–204 need to be configured. When the board is interconnectedwith a TN52TOM board for NG WDM products, you can configure the cross-connections from optical ports 3(RX1/TX1), 4(RX2/TX2), 7(RX5/TX5), 8(RX6/TX6)to channel 2 of ports 201–204 to ensure channel ID consistency for the TN52TOMboard.



187



1(IN1/OUT1)

9(TX7/RX7)

3(RX1/TX1)

4(RX2/TX2)

7(RX5/TX5)

8(RX6/TX6)

2

OTU1ODU1

2(IN2/OUT2)OTU1ODU1

10(TX8/RX8)

1

9

10

5(RX3/TX3)

6(RX4/TX4)

ODU1

OTU1ODU1

OTU1ODU1

ODU1

201(LP1/LP1)

202(LP2/LP2)






channel 1 of client-side optical ports 3-8 (RX1/TX1 to RX6/TX6).– Alarms, performance events, and configurations related to OTU1/ODU1 signal

overheads are reported on channel 1 of optical ports 1, 2, 9, and 10.– Alarms, performance events, and configurations related to WDM-side optical modules

and the optical layer are reported on channel 1 of WDM-side optical ports 1, 2, 9, and10.

– Alarms related to the WDM-side optical module and optical-layer alarms andperformance events are reported on channel 1 of WDM-side optical ports 1 (IN1/OUT1), 2 (IN2/OUT2), 9 (IN9/OUT9), 10 (IN10/OUT10).

– The 201 and 202 ports support ODU1 convergence mode and ODU1 non-convergencemode. They work in ODU1 convergence mode by default.



188

Board Configuration

This section describes the display of ports on the board and provides the configuration rules forthis board on the NMS.

Service Package

The TNF1LQM2 board supports two types of service packages, as shown in Table 6-18.

Table 6-18 Configuration of the service packages of the TNF1LQM2 board

Service PackageMode

Port Accessed Service ConfigurationMethod

GE service package 3 (TX1/RX1) GE See 6.3.2ConfiguringServices in ServicePackage Mode.

4 (TX2/RX2) GE

5 (TX3/RX3) Null

6 (TX4/RX4) Null

7 (TX5/RX5) Null

8 (TX6/RX6) Null

9 (TX7/RX7) Null

10 (TX8/RX8) Null

GE/SDH(STM-1)service package

3 (TX1/RX1) GE

4 (TX2/RX2) GE

5 (TX3/RX3) STM-1

6 (TX4/RX4) STM-1

7 (TX5/RX5) Null

8 (TX6/RX6) Null

9 (TX7/RX7) Null

10 (TX8/RX8) Null

NOTE

Only TNF1LQM2 board supports service packages.

Cross-Connect Ports

The LQM2 board supports inter-board cross-connections and intra-board cross-connections ofoptical services with rate lower than 1.25 Gbit/s. This board implements service cross-connections through its cross-connect module. Figure 6-36 and Figure 6-37 show the cross-connections implemented on the LQM2 board.



189

Figure 6-36 Example of cross-connections of the LQM2 board (AP8 mode of TNF1LQM2, 1x AP8 ODU1 mode of TNF2LQM2)

2LQM2

Another board

3(TX1/RX1)

4(TX2/RX2)

5(TX3/RX3)

6(TX4/RX4)

3(TX1/RX1)

4(TX2/RX2)

1(IN1/OUT1)

2(IN2/OUT2)

1(IN1/OUT1)

2(IN2/OUT2)

3

ODU1

201(LP1/LP1)-11

201(LP/LP)-1

8(TX6/RX6)

7(TX5/RX5)

251(LP1/LP1)-1

252(LP2/LP2)-2

Another board: LQG, LQM2, or TSP. The 201 ports uses the LQG board as an example and the 251 ports uses the TSP board as an example.

201(LP1/LP1)-2

201(LP1/LP1)-5

201(LP1/LP1)-6

201(LP/LP)-2

201(LP/LP)-3

201(LP/LP)-4

OTU1 WDM Side

WDM Side

Client Side

Client Side

Figure 6-37 Example of cross-connections of the LQM2 board (2LQM mode of TNF1LQM2,2 x AP4 ODU1 mode of TNF2LQM2)

2LQM2

Another board

3(TX1/RX1)

4(TX2/RX2)

5(TX3/RX3)

6(TX4/RX4)

3(TX1/RX1)

4(TX2/RX2)

1(IN1/OUT1)

2(IN2/OUT2)

1(IN1/OUT1)

2(IN2/OUT2)

3

ODU1201(LP1/LP1)-1

1

201(LP/LP)-1

8(TX6/RX6)

7(TX5/RX5)

251(LP1/LP1)-1

252(LP2/LP2)-1

201(LP1/LP1)-2

202(LP2/LP2)-1

202(LP2/LP2)-2

201(LP/LP)-2

201(LP/LP)-3

201(LP/LP)-4

OTU1

Client Side

Client Side WDM Side

WDM Side

Another board: LQG, LQM2, or TSP. The 201 ports uses the LQG board as an example and the 251 ports uses the TSP board as an example.

ODU1 OTU1

l Intra-board cross-connection

– The client-side optical services with rate lower than 1.25 Gbit/s are cross-connected to

the WDM-side ports 201 of the LQM2 board. For details, see 1 in Figure 6-36 andFigure 6-37.



190

l Inter-board cross-connection– The GE signals on the client side of the LQM2 board are cross-connected to the WDM-

side ports 201 of the LQG board, or the optical services with rate lower than 1.25 Gbit/s on the client side of the LQM2 board are cross-connected to the WDM-side ports 201of another LQM2 board. For details, see 2 in Figure 6-36 and Figure 6-37.

– The STM-4/STM-1 signals on the WDM-side ports 201 or 202 of the LQM2 board arecross-connected to the WDM-side ports 251 and 252 of the TSP board. For details, see

3 in Figure 6-36 and Figure 6-37.

NOTE

Only the client-side optical ports 3 (RX1/TX1), 4 (RX2/TX2), 7 (RX5/TX5), and 8 (RX6/TX6) on theLQM2 board support the cross-connection function.

Configuration Procedure of TNF1LQM21. Set board parameters.

l In the NE Explorer, select the LQM2 board and then choose Configuration > WDMinterface from the Function Tree.

l select By Board/Port(Channel) and choose Board from the drop-down list, and selectthe corresponding mode in Board Mode as required.

l Choose Channel from the drop-down list, and set the service type for client-side ports.For details on the configurations and other parameters, see 5.10.10 LQM2 Parameters.

2. Configure cross-connections. Set Level to Any and Service Type to the same value as thatof the WDM-side ports.

l Configure intra-board cross-connections. For details, see 1 in Figure 6-36 and Figure6-37.

Table 6-19 LQM2 intra-board cross-connections (AP8 mode of TNF1LQM2, 1 x AP8ODU1 mode of TNF2LQM2)

Level

ServiceType

Source board (LQM2) Sink board (LQM2)

SourceOpticalPort



Any STM-1,STM-4...(theservicelessthan1.25Gbit/s)

3(TX1/RX1)4(TX2/RX2)7(RX5/TX5)8(RX6/TX6)

1 201(LP1/LP1) 1, 2, 5, 6



191

Table 6-20 LQM2 intra-board cross-connections (2LQM mode of TNF1LQM2, 2 xAP4 ODU1 mode of TNF2LQM2)

Level

ServiceType

Source board (LQM2) Sink board (LQM2)

SourceOpticalPort



Any STM-1,STM-4...(theservicelessthan1.25Gbit/s)


1 201(LP1/LP1)202(LP2/LP2)

1, 2

l Configure inter-board cross-connections. For details, see 2 and 3 in Figure 6-36 andFigure 6-37.

Table 6-21 Inter-board cross-connections between LQM2 and LQG

Level

ServiceType

Source board (LQM2) Sink board (LQG)

SourceOpticalPort



Any GE 3(TX1/RX1)4(TX2/RX2)7(RX5/TX5)8(RX6/TX6)

1 201(LP1/LP1) 1 to 4



192

Table 6-22 Inter-board cross-connections between LQM2 and another LQM2

Level

ServiceType

Source board(LQM2)

Sink board (anotherLQM2 in AP8 mode)

Sink board (anotherLQM2 in 2LQMmode)

SourceOpticalPort


Sink OpticalPort

SinkOpticalChannel

SinkOpticalPort

SinkOpticalChannel

Any

STM-1,STM-4...(theservicelessthan1.25Gbit/s)


1 201(LP1/LP1) 1, 2,5, 6

201(LP1/LP1)202(LP2/LP2)

1, 2

Table 6-23 Inter-board cross-connections between LQM2 and TSP

Level

ServiceType

Source board (LQM2) Sink board (TSP)

SourceOpticalPort


Sink OpticalPort

Sink OpticalChannel

Any STM-1,STM-4

AP8 mode:201(LP1/LP1)2LQMmode: 201(LP1/LP1),202(LP2/LP2)

AP8 mode:1, 2, 5, 62LQMmode: 1, 2

251(LP1/LP1)252(LP2/LP2)

1


Configuration Procedure of TNF2LQM21. Set board working mode.



193

l In the NE Explorer, select the target TNF2LQM2 board. In the navigation tree, chooseConfiguration > Working Mode. Then select Board Working Mode as required.

l Select Port Working Mode as required.

NOTE

You need to set Port Working Mode only when Board Working Mode is set to 1*AP8 ODU1mode, 2*AP4 ODU1 mode or 2*AP3 ODU1 mode.

2. Set board parameters.l In the NE Explorer, select the F2LQM2 board. In the navigation tree, choose

Configuration > WDM interface.l Choose Channel from the drop-down list, and set the service type for client-side ports.For details on the configurations and other parameters, see 5.10.10 LQM2 Parameters.

3. Configure intra-board and inter-board cross-connections. See 2.4. Configure intra-board pass-through services.


l Click New. In the Create Cross-Connection Service window that is displayed, setrelated parameters.

The detailed configuration is as follows:l 1*AP8 ODU1 mode


l 2*AP4 ODU1 modeIn this mode, you do not need to configure intra-board pass-through or cross-connectionservices.

l 2*AP2 ODU0 mode

Table 6-24 Configuration for intra-board pass-through services on the TNF2LQM2board

Levela

Source Board (LQM2) Sink Board (LQM2)

SourceOptical Port


Sink OpticalPort

Sink OpticalChannel

GE(GFP_T), orAny

3(TX1/RX1) 1 201(LP1/LP1) 1b

GE(GFP_T), orAny

4(TX2/RX2) 1 202(LP2/LP2) 1b



194

Levela


SourceOptical Port


Sink OpticalPort

Sink OpticalChannel

GE(GFP_T), orAny

7(TX5/RX5) 1 203(LP3/LP3) 1b

GE(GFP_T), orAny

8(TX6/RX6) 1 204(LP4/LP4) 1b

a: When Level is set to ANY, you need to set Service Type. The Service Type settingmust be the same as the service type specified in the WDM Interface window.b: When the TNF2LQM board is interconnected with the TN52TOM board intendedfor NG WDM products, set Sink Optical Channel as optical channel 2 for theTNF2LQM board so that services are over the same channel between the two boards.

l 2*AP3 ODU1 mode

Table 6-25 Configuration for intra-board pass-through services on the TNF2LQM2board

Levela


SourceOptical Port


Sink OpticalPort

Sink OpticalChannel

GE(GFP_T), orAny

3(TX1/RX1), 4(TX2/RX2)

1 201(LP1/LP1) 1b

GE(GFP_T), orAny

7(TX5/RX5), 8(TX6/RX6)

1 202(LP2/LP2) 1b

a: When Level is set to ANY, you need to set Service Type. The Service Type settingmust be the same as the service type specified in the WDM Interface window.

5. Configure ODUk SNCP protection.


l Click Create SNCP Service. In the Create SNCP Service window that is displayed,set related parameters.



195

Table 6-26 Configuration for SNCP protection on the TNF2LQM2 board

Item 1*AP8ODU1mode

2*AP2 ODU0 mode 2*AP3 ODU1 mode

Protection Type ODUK SNCP ODUK SNCP ODUK SNCP

Service Type ODU1 ODU0 ODU1

WorkingService

SourceOpticalPort

1(IN1/OUT1) 1(IN1/OUT1)9(RX7/TX7)

1(IN1/OUT1)9(RX7/TX7)


- - -

SinkOpticalPort

201(LP1/LP1)

201(LP1/LP1), 202(LP2/LP2)203(LP3/LP3), 204(LP4/LP4)

201(LP1/LP1)202(LP2/LP2)

SinkOpticalChannel

1 1 1

ProtectionService

SourceOpticalPort

2(IN2/OUT2) 2(IN2/OUT2)10(RX8/TX8)



- - -


NOTE

When the board works in 2*AP4 ODU1 mode, the ODUk SNCP is not supported.

6.2.5 TSP Service Configuration

Physical and Logical PortsThis section describes the display of ports on the TSP board and provides the configuration rulesfor this board on the U2000.



196

Display of PortsTable 6-27 lists the sequence number displayed on the U2000 of the port on the TSP board frontpanel.

Table 6-27 Display of the TSP ports


IN1/OUT1 1

IN2/OUT2 2

TX1/RX1 3

TX2/RX2 4

E1/T1 (1) 5

E1/T1 (2) 6

... ...

E1/T1 (21) 25

Port modelFigure 6-38 shows the port model of the TSP board.

Figure 6-38 Port model of the TSP board

3(RX1/TX1)

4(RX2/TX2)

5(E1/T1-1)

6(E1/T1-2)

7(E1/T1-3)

8(E1/T1-4)

9(E1/T1-5)

251(LP1/LP1)-1

25(E1/T1-21)

202(LP202/LP202)

1(IN1/OUT1)-1

2(IN2/OUT2)-1

……

201(LP201/LP201)

252(LP2/LP2)-1


: WDM-side services



: SDH timeslot mapping, which needs to be configured on the NMS



197

l Alarms and performance events related to client-side signal overheads are reported through

channel 1 of client-side optical ports 3 (RX1/TX1) and 4 (RX2/TX2).l Alarms and performance events related to tributary-side signal overheads are reported

through tributary-side electrical ports 5 (E1/T1-1) to 25 (E1/T1-21).l If the types of services at optical ports 251 (LP1/LP1) and 252 (LP2/LP2) are set to

STM-4, alarms and performance events related to SDH electrical-layer overheads arereported through channels 1–4 of logical ports 201 and 202 in the board model. If the typesof services at optical ports 251 (LP1/LP1) and 252 (LP2/LP2) are set to STM-1, alarms andperformance events related to SDH electrical-layer overheads are reported through channel1 of logical ports 201 and 202 in the board model.

l Alarms related to the WDM-side optical module and optical-layer alarms and performanceevents are reported through channel 1 of WDM-side optical ports 1 and 2 (IN1/OUT1 andIN2/OUT2).

Board ConfigurationThis section describes the display of ports on the TSP board and provides the configuration rulesfor this board on the U2000.

Cross-ConnectionsThe TSP board supports inter-board cross-connections of STM-4/STM-1 signals and intra-boardcross-connections of VC-4/VC-12 signals. This board implements service cross-connectionsthrough its cross-connect module. Figure 6-39 shows the cross-connections implemented onthe TSP board.

Figure 6-39 Example of cross-connections on the TSP board

2

TSP

3(TX1/RX1)

4(TX2/RX2)

5(E1/T1)

1(IN1/OUT1)

2(IN2/OUT2)3

201(LP201/LP201)

202(LP202/LP202)

251(LP1/LP1)

252(LP2/LP2)6(E1/T1)

7(E1/T1)

25(E1/T1)

1

4

5

6

LQM2

3(TX1/RX1)


2(IN2/OUT2)ODU1

201(LP1/LP1)-1

8(TX6/RX6)

7(TX5/RX5)

201(LP1/LP1)-2

201(LP1/LP1)-5

201(LP1/LP1)-6

OTU1

WDM Side

WDM Side

Client Side

Tributary Side

Client Side




198

– The STM-4/STM-1 signals on the WDM side of the TSP board are cross-connected to

the cross-connect ports on the client side of the LQM2 board. For details, see 1 inFigure 6-39.

l Intra-board cross-connection– The tributary-side VC-12 signals are cross-connected to the client side of the TSP board.

For details, see 2 in Figure 6-39.– The tributary-side VC-12 signals are cross-connected to the WDM side of the TSP

board. For details, see 3 and 4 in Figure 6-39.– The client-side VC4/VC-12 signals are cross-connected to the WDM side of the TSP

board. For details, see 5 and 6 in Figure 6-39.NOTE

In addition, the TSP board can pass through services without using its cross-connect module. For example,the services received from optical port 3 (TX1/RX1) can be directly transmitted by optical port 4 (TX2/RX2); the services received from optical port 1 (IN1/OUT1) can be directly transmitted by optical port 2(IN2/OUT2).

Configuration Procedure1. Set board parameters.

l Set the types of the services at the 251/252 (LP1/LP2)-1 port on the WDM side to STM-1or STM-4. The settings of the service types at ports 251 (LP1/LP1)-1 and 252 (LP2/LP2)-1 take effect simultaneously and the service types are the same.

l Set the service mode to E1 or T1 for PDH ports 5 (E1/T1-1) to 25 (E1/T1-21). Note thatthe service modes at the ports must be the same.

For details on the configurations and other parameters, see 5.10.16 TSP Parameters.2. Configure intra-board SDH timeslot mapping relationships.

l Configure timeslot mapping from the tributary side to the client side. For details, see2 in Figure 6-39.

Table 6-28 Timeslot mapping relationship from the tributary side to the client side ofthe TSP board

Level

Source board (TSP) Sink board (TSP)

SourcePort

Source TimeslotRange

Sink Port SinkTimeslotRange

VC-12

5 to 25(That is, E1/T1-1 to E1/T1-21.Whenconfiguringthe ports,you mustselect TSPon theNMS.)

- 3(RX1/TX1)4(RX2/TX2)

1 to 63



199

l Configure timeslot mapping from the tributary side to the WDM side. For details, see

3 in Figure 6-39.

Table 6-29 Timeslot mapping relationship from the tributary side to the WDM side ofthe TSP board

Level

ServiceType ofWDMports


SourcePort

Source TimeslotRange


VC-12

STM-1

5 to 25(That is,E1/T1-1 toE1/T1-21.Whenconfiguring the ports,you mustselectTSP on theNMS.)

- 201(LP201/LP201)202(LP202/LP202)

1 to 63

VC-12

STM-4

5 to 25(That is,E1/T1-1 toE1/T1-21.Whenconfiguring the ports,you mustselectTSP on theNMS.)

- 201(LP201/LP201)202(LP202/LP202)

1 to 4 x63: 1 to 4VC4channelswith eachVC4channelcontaining 1 to 63VC12channels.

l Configure timeslot mapping from the client side to the WDM side. For details, see

5 in Figure 6-39.



200

Table 6-30 Timeslot mapping relationship from the client side to the WDM side of theTSP board

Level

ServiceType ofWDMports


SourcePort

SourceTimeslotRange


VC-4

STM-4

3(RX1/TX1)4(RX2/TX2)

1 201(LP201/LP201)202(LP202/LP202)

1 to 4

VC-4

STM-1


1 201(LP201/LP201)202(LP202/LP202)

1

VC-12

STM-4


1 to 63 201(LP201/LP201)202(LP202/LP202)

1 to 4 x 63: 1to 4 VC4channelswith eachVC4 channelcontaining 1to 63 VC12channels.

VC-12

STM-1


1 to 63 201(LP201/LP201)202(LP202/LP202)

1 to 63

NOTE

Set Level to VC12 only when the STM-1/STM-4 signals received at ports 3 (RX1/TX1) and 4 (RX2/TX2) are encapsulated in VC12 channels; otherwise, services will be unavailable.

For details, see 6.6 Configuring SDH Service.3. Configure cross-connections. Set Level to Any and Service Type to the same value as that

of the WDM ports.

l Configure intra-board cross-connections. For details, see 4 and 6 in Figure 6-39.



201

Table 6-31 TSP intra-board cross-connections

Level

ServiceType


SourceOpticalPort


Sink OpticalPort

Sink OpticalChannel

Any STM-1 251(LP1/LP1)252(LP2/LP2)

1 1(IN1/OUT1)2(IN2/OUT2)

1

Any STM-4 251(LP1/LP1)252(LP2/LP2)

1 1(IN1/OUT1)2(IN2/OUT2)

1

l Configure inter-board cross-connections. For details, see 1 in Figure 6-39.

Table 6-32 TSP inter-board cross-connections

Level

ServiceType

Source board(TSP)

Sink board (LQM2 inAP8 mode)

Sink board (LQM2 in2LQM mode)

SourceOpticalPort


SinkOpticalPort

SinkOpticalChannel

SinkOpticalPort

SinkOpticalChannel

Any

STM-1

251(LP1/LP1)252(LP2/LP2)

1 201(LP1/LP1)

1, 2, 5, 6 201(LP1/LP1)202(LP2/LP2)

1, 2

Any

STM-4

251(LP1/LP1)252(LP2/LP2)

1 201(LP1/LP1)

1, 2, 5, 6 201(LP1/LP1)202(LP2/LP2)

1, 2


6.2.6 LQM Service Configuration



202

Physical and Logical PortsThis section describes the display of ports on the board and provides the configuration rules forthis board on the NMS.

Display of PortsTable 6-33 lists the sequence number displayed in an NMS system of the ports on the LQMboard front panel.

Table 6-33 Display of the LQM ports


IN1/OUT1 1

IN2/OUT2 2

TX1/RX1 3

TX2/RX2 4

TX3/RX3 5

TX4/RX4 6

VO1/VI1 7

VO2/VI2 8

NOTE


Port model of TNF1LQMFigure 6-40 shows the port model of the TNF1LQM board.

Figure 6-40 Port model of the TNF1LQM board

1(IN1/OUT1)

2(IN2/OUT2)

ODU1

201(LP1/LP1)-13(RX1/TX1)

5(RX3/TX3)

4(RX2/TX2)

6(RX4/TX4)

201(LP1/LP1)-2

201(LP1/LP1)-3

201(LP1/LP1)-4

OTU1

201


: WDM-side services




203

l Alarms and performance events related to client signal overheads are reported on channel1 of client-side optical ports 3-6 (RX1/TX1 to RX4/TX4).

l Alarms and performance events related to OTN electrical-layer overheads are reported onchannels 1 and 2 of logical port 201.

l Alarms related to the WDM-side optical module and optical-layer alarms and performanceevents are reported on channel 1 of WDM-side optical ports 1 and 2 (IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2).

l Cross-connections are automatically generated and no configuration is required on theNMS.

Port model of TNF2LQM

The TNF2LQM board can work in three different modes: 1 x AP4 ODU1 mode, 1 x AP2 ODU0mode, 1 x AP2 regeneration mode.

l 1 x AP4 ODU1 mode

Figure 6-41 shows the port model of the TNF2LQM board in 1 x AP4 ODU1 mode.

Figure 6-41 Port model of the TNF2LQM board (1 x AP4 ODU1 mode)





1(IN1/OUT1)

2(IN2/OUT2)

ODU1

201(LP1/LP1)

3(RX1/TX1)

5(RX3/TX3)

4(RX2/TX2)

6(RX4/TX4)

OTU1

ODU1 OTU1

1

2

ODU1

– Alarms and performance events related to client signal overheads are reported onchannel 1 of client-side optical ports 3-6 (RX1/TX1 to RX4/TX4).

– Alarms, performance events, and configurations related to OTU1/ODU1 overheads arereported on channel 1 of optical ports 1 and 2.

– Alarms related to the WDM-side optical module and optical-layer alarms andperformance events are reported on channel 1 of WDM-side optical ports 1 and 2 (IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2).



204

– The 201 port supports ODU1 convergence mode and ODU1 non-convergence mode. Itworks in ODU1 convergence mode by default.

– Supports intra-board 1+1 protection and ODUk (k = 1) SNCP protection.– After the board is powered on, the cross-connection from the 201 port to optical port 1

is configured by default. After intra-board 1+1 protection is configured, the system willautomatically configure the cross-connection from the 201 port to optical port 2.

l 1xAP2 ODU0 modeFigure 6-42 shows the port model of the TNF2LQM board in 1 x AP2 ODU0 mode.

Figure 6-42 Port model of the TNF2LQM board (1 x AP2 ODU0 mode)

1(IN1/OUT1)

2(IN2/OUT2)

201(LP1/LP1)-13(RX1/TX1)

4(RX2/TX2) 202(LP2/LP2)-1

1

2

OTU1ODU1

ODU0(4353)

ODU0(4354)

OTU1ODU1

ODU0(4353)

ODU0(4354)

201(LP1/LP1)-2

202(LP2/LP2)-2





channel 1 of client-side optical ports 3 and 4 (RX1/TX1 and RX2/TX2).– Alarms, performance events, and configurations related to ODU0 signal overheads are

reported on channels 4353 and 4354 of WDM-side optical ports 1 and 2.– Alarms, performance events, and configurations related to ODU1/OTU1 overheads are



– Supports intra-board 1+1 protection and ODUk (k = 0) SNCP protection.– Cross-connections from optical ports 3 (RX1/TX1) and 4 (RX2/TX2) to channel 1 of

ports 201 and 202 need to be configured. When the board is interconnected with aTN52TOM board for NG WDM products, you can configure the cross-connections fromoptical ports 3 (RX1/TX1) and 4 (RX2/TX2) to channel 2 of optical ports 201 and 202to ensure channel ID consistency for the TN52TOM board.

l 1 x AP2 regeneration mode



205

Figure 6-43 shows the port model of the TNF2LQM board in 1 x AP2 regeneration mode.

Figure 6-43 Port model of the TNF2LQM board (1 x AP2 regeneration mode)

1(IN1/OUT1)

2(IN2/OUT2)

3(RX1/TX1)

4(RX2/TX2)

1

2

OTU1ODU1

OTU1ODU1

ODU1OTU1

ODU1OTU1


: WDM-side services



channel 1 of client-side optical ports 3 and 4 (RX1/TX1 and RX2/TX2).– Alarms, performance events, and configurations related to client ODU1/OTU1 signal

overheads are reported on channel 1 of optical ports 3 and 4 (RX1/TX1 and RX2/TX2).– Alarms, performance events, and configurations related to ODU1/OTU1 overheads are



Board ConfigurationThis section describes the display of ports on the board and provides the configuration rules forthis board on the NMS.

Service PackageThe TNF1LQM board supports two types of service packages for the GE/STM-1 service, asshown in Table 6-34.

Table 6-34 Configuration for service packages of the TNF1LQM board

Service PackageMode


GE service package 3(TX1/RX1) GE See 6.3.2ConfiguringServices in ServicePackage Mode.

4(TX2/RX2) GE



206

Service PackageMode


5(TX3/RX3) Null

6(TX4/RX4) Null

GE/SDH(STM-1)service package

3(TX1/RX1) GE

4(TX2/RX2) GE

5(TX3/RX3) STM-1

6(TX4/RX4) STM-1

NOTE

Only TNF1LQM board supports service packages.

Configuration Procedure of TNF1LQM1. Set board parameters.

l In the NE Explorer, select the LQM board. In the navigation tree, chooseConfiguration > WDM interface.

l Select By Board/Port(Channel) and choose Channel from the drop-down list, and setthe service type for client-side ports.

For details on the configurations and other parameters, see 5.10.9 LQM Parameters.

Configuration Procedure of TNF2LQM1. Set board working mode.

l In the NE Explorer, select the target TNF2LQM board. In the navigation tree, chooseConfiguration > Working Mode. Then select Board Working Mode as required.

l Select Port Working Mode as required.

NOTE

You need to set Port Working Mode only when Board Working Mode is set to 1*AP4 ODU1mode.

2. Set board parameters.l In the NE Explorer, select the F2LQM board. In the navigation tree, choose

Configuration > WDM interface.l Choose Channel from the drop-down list, and set the service type for client-side ports.For details on the configurations and other parameters, see 5.10.9 LQM Parameters.

3. Configure intra-board pass-through services.l In the NE Explorer, select the target NE. In the navigation tree, choose

Configuration > WDM Service Management.l Click New. In the Create Cross-Connection Service window that is displayed, set

related parameters.The detailed configuration is as follows:



207

l 1*AP4 ODU1 mode


l 1*AP2 ODU0 mode

Table 6-35 Configuration for intra-board pass-through services on the TNF2LQMboard

Levela

Source Board (LQM) Sink Board (LQM)

SourceOptical Port


Sink OpticalPort

Sink OpticalChannel

GE(GFP_T), orAny

3(TX1/RX1) 1 201(LP1/LP1) 1b

GE(GFP_T), orAny

4(TX2/RX2) 1 202(LP2/LP2) 1b

a: When Level is set to ANY, you need to set Service Type. The Service Type settingmust be the same as the service type specified in the WDM Interface window.b: When the TNF2LQM board is interconnected with the TN52TOM board intendedfor NG WDM products, set Sink Optical Channel as optical channel 2 for theTNF2LQM board so that services are over the same channel between the two boards.

l 1*AP2 relay mode


4. Configure ODUk SNCP protection.


l Click Create SNCP Service. In the Create SNCP Service window that is displayed,set related parameters.

Table 6-36 Configuration for SNCP protection on the TNF2LQM board

Item 1*AP4 ODU1mode

1*AP2 ODU0 mode

Protection Type ODUK SNCP ODUK SNCP

Service Type ODU1 ODU0

WorkingService

Source OpticalPort

1(IN1/OUT1) 1(IN1/OUT1)



208

Item 1*AP4 ODU1mode

1*AP2 ODU0 mode

Source OpticalChannel a

- -

Sink OpticalPort

201(LP1/LP1) 201(LP1/LP1), 202(LP2/LP2)

Sink OpticalChannel

1 1

ProtectionService

Source OpticalPort

2(IN2/OUT2) 2(IN2/OUT2)

Source OpticalChannel a

- -


6.2.7 LDGF2 Service Configuration

Physical and Logical PortsThis section describes the display of ports on the board.

Display of PortsTable 6-37 lists the sequence number displayed in an NMS system of the ports on the LDGF2board front panel.

Table 6-37 Display of the LDGF2 ports


IN1/OUT1 1

IN2/OUT2 2

IN3/OUT3 3

IN4/OUT4 4

TX1/RX1 5

TX2/RX2 6

TX3/RX3 7

TX4/RX4 8



209

NOTE


Port model of TNF1LDGF2 board

Figure 6-44 Port model of the TNF1LDGF2 board


6(RX2/TX2)

7(RX3/TX3)

8(RX4/TX4)

2(IN2/OUT2)

3(IN3/OUT3)

4(IN4/OUT4)

201(LP1/LP1) ODU1

202(LP2/LP2) ODU1

OTU1

OTU1



l Alarms and performance events related to client signal overheads are reported on channel1 of client-side optical ports 5-8 (RX1/TX1 to RX4/TX4).

l Alarms and performance events related to OTN electrical-layer overheads are reported onchannels 1 and 2 of logical ports 201 and 202.

l Alarms related to the WDM-side optical module and optical-layer alarms and performanceevents are reported on channel 1 of WDM-side optical ports 1 (IN1/OUT1) to 4 (IN4/OUT4).

l Cross-connections are automatically generated and no configuration is required on theNMS.

Port model of TNF2LDGF2 board

The TNF2LDGF2 board can work in two different modes: 2 x AP2 ODU0 mode, 2 x AP2 ODU1mode.

l 2 x AP2 ODU0 mode



210

Figure 6-45 Port model of the TNF2LDGF2 board (2 x AP2 ODU0 mode)

1(IN1/OUT1)

5(RX1/TX1)

6(RX2/TX2)

7(RX3/TX3)

8(RX4/TX4)

202(LP2/LP2)-1

201(LP1/LP1)-1

OTU1ODU1

2

203(LP3/LP3)-1

204(LP4/LP4)-1

ODU0(4353)

ODU0(4354)

OTU1ODU1

ODU0(4353)

ODU0(4354)

2(IN2/OUT2)OTU1ODU1

ODU0(4353)

ODU0(4354)

OTU1ODU1

ODU0(4353)

ODU0(4354)

1

3

4

3(IN3/OUT3)

4(IN4/OUT4)

201(LP1/LP1)-2

202(LP2/LP2)-2

203(LP3/LP3)-2

204(LP4/LP4)-2




– Alarms and performance events related to client signal overheads are reported onchannel 1 of client-side optical ports 5-8 (RX1/TX1 to RX4/TX4).

– Alarms, performance events, and configurations related to ODU0 signal overheads arereported on channels 4353 and 4354 of WDM-side optical ports.

– Alarms, performance events, and configurations related to ODU1/OTU1 signaloverheads are reported on channel 1 of optical ports 1, 2, 3, and 4.

– Alarms related to the WDM-side optical module and optical-layer alarms andperformance events are reported on channel 1 of WDM-side optical ports 1 (IN1/OUT1)to 4 (IN4/OUT4).

– Supports intra-board 1+1 protection and ODUk (k = 0) SNCP protection.

– Cross-connections from ports 5–8 (RX1/TX1–RX4/TX4) to channel 1 of ports 201–204 need to be configured. When the board is interconnected with a TN52TOM boardfor NG WDM products, you can configure the cross-connections from optical ports 5–8 (RX1/TX1–RX4/TX4) to channel 2 of ports 201–204 to ensure channel ID consistencyfor the TN52TOM board.



211

l 2 x AP2 ODU1 mode

Figure 6-46 Port model of the TNF2LDGF2 board (2 x AP2 ODU1 mode)

1(IN1/OUT1)

5(RX1/TX1)

6(RX2/TX2)

7(RX3/TX3)

8(RX4/TX4)

2

OTU1ODU1

2(IN2/OUT2)OTU1ODU1

1

3(IN3/OUT3)

4(IN4/OUT4)

201(LP1/LP1) ODU1

4

OTU1ODU1

OTU1ODU1

3

202(LP2/LP2) ODU1






channel 1 of client-side optical ports 5-8 (RX1/TX1 to RX4/TX4).– Alarms, performance events, and configurations related to OTU1/ODU1 signal

overheads are reported on channel 1 of optical ports 1, 2, 3, and 4.– Alarms related to the WDM-side optical module and optical-layer alarms and

performance events are reported on channel 1 of WDM-side optical ports 1 (IN1/OUT1)to 4 (IN4/OUT4).

– Supports intra-board 1+1 protection and ODUk (k = 1) SNCP protection.

Board ConfigurationThis section describes the display of ports on the board.

Configuration Procedure of TNF1LDGF21. Set board parameters.



212

l In the NE Explorer, select the LDGF2 board. In the navigation tree, chooseConfiguration > WDM interface.

l Select By Board/Port(Channel) and choose Channel from the drop-down list, and setthe service type for client-side ports.

For details on the configurations and other parameters, see 5.10.4 LDGF2 Parameters.

Configuration Procedure of TNF2LDGF21. Set board parameters.

l In the NE Explorer, select the LDGF2 board. In the navigation tree, chooseConfiguration > WDM interface.

l Select By Board/Port(Channel) and choose Board from the drop-down list, and selectthe corresponding mode in Board Mode as required.

l Choose Channel from the drop-down list, and set the service type for client-side ports.For details on the configurations and other parameters, see 5.10.4 LDGF2 Parameters.

2. Configure intra-board pass-through services.l In the NE Explorer, select the target NE. In the navigation tree, choose

Configuration > WDM Service Management.l Click New. In the Create Cross-Connection Service window that is displayed, set

related parameters.The detailed configuration is as follows:l 2*AP2 ODU0 mode

Table 6-38 Configuration for intra-board pass-through services on the TNF2LDGF2board

Level a Source Board (LDGF2) Sink Board (LDGF2)

Source OpticalPort


Sink OpticalPort

Sink OpticalChannel

GE(TTT-AGMP), GE(GFP_T)

5(TX1/RX1) 1 201(LP1/LP1) 1b


6(TX2/RX2) 1 202(LP2/LP2) 1b



213

Level a Source Board (LDGF2) Sink Board (LDGF2)

Source OpticalPort


Sink OpticalPort

Sink OpticalChannel


7(TX3/RX3) 1 203(LP3/LP3) 1b


8(TX4/RX4) 1 204(LP4/LP4) 1b

a: The Level setting must be the same as the service type specified in the WDMInterface window.b: When the TNF2LDGF2 board is interconnected with the TN52TOM boardintended for NG WDM products, set Sink Optical Channel as optical channel 2 forthe TNF2LDGF2 board so that services are over the same channel between the twoboards.

l 2*AP2 ODU1 mode


3. Configure ODUk SNCP protection.l In the NE Explorer, select the target NE. In the navigation tree, choose

Configuration > WDM Service Management.l Click Create SNCP Service. In the Create SNCP Service window that is displayed,

set related parameters.

Table 6-39 Configuration for SNCP protection on the TNF2LDGF2 board

Item 2*AP2 ODU0 mode 2*AP2 ODU1 mode

Protection Type ODUK SNCP ODUK SNCP

Service Type ODU0 ODU1

WorkingService

SourceOptical Port

1(IN1/OUT1)3(IN3/OUT3)



- -



214

Item 2*AP2 ODU0 mode 2*AP2 ODU1 mode

Sink OpticalPort

201(LP1/LP1), 202(LP2/LP2)203(LP3/LP3), 204(LP4/LP4)

201(LP1/LP1)202(LP2/LP2)

Sink OpticalChannel

1 1

Protection Service

SourceOptical Port




- -


6.3 Configuring WDM ServicesAfter setting board parameters, you need to configure WDM service grooming for boards thatsupport cross-connections based on WDM services and protection planning.

6.3.1 Configuring Cross-Connection ServiceConfiguring cross-connections is mandatory for deploying services and also a method ofgrooming services. The TSP, LQG and LQM2 boards support configuration of cross-connections and the methods of configuring cross-connections on the two boards are the same.By default, a cross-connection created on the is a direct cross-connection.

PrerequisiteYou must have logged in to the NE.

Service types must be set for WDM optical interfaces on the board.


Precautions

CAUTIONWhen configuring a cross-connection, ensure that the WDM-side path numbers at the transmitand receive ends are consistent. Otherwise, the service cannot be available.



215

CAUTIONWhen the board that supports cross-connection carries electrical interface services, non-straight-through cross-connections cannot be configured for the electrical interface services on the board.

TIP

When configuring cross-connections for a service, you need to configure one cross-connection on the NEwhere this service is added and another cross-connection on the NE where this service is dropped. Whenyou need to configure cross-connections for multiple services on a network, select either of the followingmethods to configure the cross-connections for all these services:

l On a per-NE basis: Configure cross-connections on one NE and then on another NE. In this manner,configure cross-connections on all NEs on the network in turn.

l On a per-service basis: Configure cross-connections for one service and then for another service. Inthis manner, configure cross-connections for all services in turn.

NOTE

In the case of the TSP board, when configuring a cross-connection, set Level to Any. In addition, set theservice type to STM-1 or STM-4 as required and select 251(LP1/LP1) or 252(LP2/LP2) as the LP opticalport.

Procedure on the Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-

Connection Service Management from the Function Tree.

2. Click the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab. Click New and the CreateCross-Connection Service dialog box is displayed.

3. Select corresponding values for Service Level and Service Type and set other parametersfor the service.

4. Click OK and the created cross-connection is displayed in the user interface.

Procedure on the U20001. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service

Management from the Function Tree.

2. Click the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab. Click New and the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box is displayed.

3. Select corresponding values for Level and Service Type and set other parameters for theservice.

4. Click OK. A prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful.

5. Click Close.


See this section to learn how to delete a cross-connection.

l WDM cross-connection configuration

See this section to learn how to set the parameters for configuring a WDM cross-connection.



216

6.3.2 Configuring Services in Service Package ModeThe service package module enables you to configure services on an NE in a one-click manner.This configuration method is easier and quicker. The OptiX OSN 1800 supports two types ofservice packages: GE service package and GE/STM-1 integrated service package. The LQM,LQM2, and LWX2 boards support the function of configuring services in service package mode.

PrerequisiteYou must have logged in to the NE where the LQM, LQM2, or LWX2 board resides.


Background InformationYou can select the required service package during the deployment. Then, you can run thecommands in the service package to configure services and query information the servicepackage.

You can run a command to manually apply a service package to an NE. In this manner, theservices on all the service boards on this NE are configured automatically. In the process ofapplying a service package to an NE, the original configurations on the NE are deleted and theconfiguration commands are then executed. A service package actually contains a series ofconfiguration commands. Some of these configuration commands are used for configuring cross-connections, and the other are used for configuring service types for optical interfaces. There isan exception that a service rate other than service type is configured for an optical port in thecase of the LWX2 board.

Table 6-40 lists the service configurations for the LQM board in service package mode.

Table 6-40 Service configurations for the LQM board in service package mode

ServicePackage Type

3(TX1/RX1) 4(TX2/RX2) 5(TX3/RX3) 6(TX4/RX4)

GE bypass GE GE Null Null

GE/STM1hybrid

GE GE STM-1 STM-1

Table 6-41 lists the service configurations for the LQM2 board in service package mode.

Table 6-41 Service configurations for the LQM2 board in service package mode

ServicePackage Type

3(TX1/RX1)

4(TX2/RX2)

5(TX3/RX3)

6(TX4/RX4)

7(TX5/RX5)

8(TX6/RX6)

9(TX7/RX7)

10(TX8/RX8)

GEbypass

GE GE Null Null Null Null Null Null



217

ServicePackage Type

3(TX1/RX1)

4(TX2/RX2)

5(TX3/RX3)

6(TX4/RX4)

7(TX5/RX5)

8(TX6/RX6)

9(TX7/RX7)

10(TX8/RX8)

GE/STM1hybrid

GE GE STM-1 STM-1 Null Null Null Null

Table 6-42 lists the service configurations for the LWX2 board in service package mode.

Table 6-42 Service configurations for the LWX2 board in service package mode

Service Package Type 5(TX1/RX1) 6(TX2/RX2)

GE bypass GE GE

GE/STM1 hybrid GE GE

Precautions

CAUTIONIn the case of the LQM2 board, after the configuration commands in a service package areexecuted, a direct cross-connection between optical port 3 and optical port 4 is configuredautomatically. In the case of the LWX2 and LQM boards, the configuration commands in aservice package cannot be used to create any cross-connection.

CAUTIONPrecautions for configuring services in service package model Service packages do not support expansion based on the existing services. If expansion is

required, you need to delete the existing services before configuring services in servicepackage mode.

l In the process of applying a service package to an NE, the configurations on all boards onthis NE are deleted and the service package is then implemented.

l If the NE is reset in the process of configuring scripts, you need to restart the service packagebefore you configure services.



218

CAUTIONIn the case of the LQM2 board, take the following precautions before configuring services inservice package mode:l After configuring services in service package mode, if one of optical interfaces 3 to 6 on the

LQM2 board needs to access another type of service, you need to reconfigure the servicetype manually for this optical port. Otherwise, the service is unavailable.

l If the current working mode of the LQM2 board is the 2LQM mode, the working mode ofthe board automatically changes to AP8 after service types are configured for the board inservice package mode.

Procedure on the Web LCT1. Apply the correct service package to an NE according to network service planning.

(1) Select the NE in the NE Explorer and choose Configuration > Service Package fromthe Function Tree.

(2) Click Query to view the existing service package types.(3) Select Package Type according to the service planning requirement and then click

Start. Then, the Performing this operation will interrupt services? Continue?dialog box is displayed. Click OK. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that theoperation is successful. Click OK.

2. Optional: To view the cross-connections created after the service package is configured,select the NE in the NE Explorer and then choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-Connection Service Management from the Function Tree; to view the attributes of anoptical port on the board, select the board in the NE Explorer and then chooseConfiguration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.

Procedure on the U20001. Apply the correct service package to an NE according to network service planning.

(1) Select the NE in the NE Explorer and choose Configuration > Service Package fromthe Function Tree.

(2) Click Query to view the existing service package types.(3) Select Package Type according to the service planning requirement and then click

Start. Then, the Performing this operation will interrupt services? Continue?dialog box is displayed. Click OK. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that theoperation is successful. Click OK.

2. After configuring the service package, upload the NE data.

(1) In the Main Menu, choose Configuration > NE Configuration DataManagement.

(2) In the left topology tree, select a created NE and click . In Configuration DataManagement List, select an NE whose NE Status is Unconfigured.

(3) Click Upload. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK to start the upload.(4) When the upload is complete, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click

Close.



219

3. Optional: To view the cross-connections created after the service package is configured,select the NE in the NE Explorer and then choose Configuration > WDM ServiceManagement from the Function Tree; to view the attributes of an optical port on the board,select the board in the NE Explorer and then choose Configuration > WDM Interfacefrom the Function Tree.

Reference Informationl Deleting Cross-Connections

See this section to learn how to delete a cross-connection.l WDM Cross-Connection Configuration Parameters

See this section to learn how to set the parameters used for configuring a WDM cross-connection.

6.4 Configuring EPL/EVPL ServicesEPL/EVPL services belong to Ethernet services and are carried in WDM service signals.

6.4.1 EPL/EVPL Service OverviewEPL/EVPL services include Ethernet private line (EPL) services and Ethernet virtual privateline (EVPL) services.

EPL ServicesTwo nodes are used to access EPL services and implement transparent transmission of theEthernet services to the users. Service of one user occupies one VCTRUNK and need not sharethe bandwidth with the services of the other users, as shown in Figure 6-47. Therefore, in thecase of EPL services, a bandwidth is exclusively occupied by the service of a user and the servicesof different users are isolated. In addition, the extra QoS scheme and security scheme are notrequired.

Figure 6-47 EPL services

PORT2

NE1

PORT2

NE2

PORT1 PORT1TRUNKLINK2

TRUNKLINK1

VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK2

VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1

B

A

B'

A'

EVPL ServicesIn the case of EVPL services, services of different users share the bandwidth. Therefore, theVLAN/QinQ scheme needs to be used for differentiating services of different users. If the



220

services of different users need to be configured with different quality levels, you need to adoptthe corresponding QoS scheme. EVPL services are classified into two types, depending onwhether the PORT or VCTRUNK is shared.

There are two types of EVPL services:l PORT-shared EVPL servicesl VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services

– VLAN tag-based convergence and distribution of EVPL services

– QinQ technology-based convergence and distribution of EVPL services

PORT-shared EVPL services

As shown in Figure 6-48, the services of different users are accessed through an external port(that is, PORT) at a station, and are then isolated from each other by using the VLAN IDs.Services are transmitted to other PORTs at different station through different VCTRUNKs.

Figure 6-48 PORT-shared EVPL services

NE1PORT2

NE3PORT1

PORT1TRUNKLINK1

VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1

A

A''

A'

VLAN22

VLAN11

VLAN22

VLAN11NE2

TRUNKLINK2VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK2

VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services

As shown in Figure 6-49, the services of different users are isolated by using the VLAN/QinQscheme. Therefore, the services of different users can be transmitted in the same VCTRUNK.

l VLAN tag-based convergence and distribution of EVPL services

Figure 6-49 VLAN tag-based convergence and distribution of EVPL services

PORT2

NE1

PORT2

NE2


VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1

B

A

B'

A'

VLAN22

VLAN11

VLAN22

VLAN11



221

l QinQ technology-based convergence and distribution of EVPL servicesThe implementation principle of the QinQ technology-based EVPL services and theimplementation principle of the VLAN tag-based EVPL services are similar. Users ofVLAN tag-based EVPL services are identified by only one layer of VLAN IDs. Users ofQinQ technology-based EVPL services are identified by multiple layers of VLAN IDs. Inthis manner, the number of VLANs is extended and more users can be identified.

Figure 6-50 QinQ technology-based convergence and distribution of EVPL services

PORT2

NE1

PORT2

NE2


VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1

BA

B'A'

C-VLAN1 S-VLAN2C-VLAN1

C-VLAN1

RemoveTags C-VLAN1

C-VLAN1

C-VLAN1 S-VLAN1

C-VLAN1 S-VLAN2

C-VLAN1 S-VLAN1

Add Tags

Add Tags RemoveTags

6.4.2 Configuring EPL ServicesEPL services provide a solution for the point-to-point transparent transmission of Ethernetservices over an exclusive bandwidth. EPL services are applied to the scenarios where the user-side data communication equipment connected to the transmission network does not supportVLANs or where the VLAN planning is kept secret from the network carrier.

PrerequisiteThe parameters of WDM interfaces and Ethernet interfaces on a board must be configured.


Procedure on the U2000 or Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, select the board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Service

> Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Click the EPL Service tab.2. Click New at the bottom of the window. The Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is

displayed.3. Enter the attributes of the Ethernet private line service in the dialog box.



222

Field Value Remarks

ServiceType

EPL, EVPL(QinQ)Default: EPL

Select EPL for this parameter for other E-Line servicesexcept the QinQ technology-based EVPL services.

Direction Unidirectional,BidirectionalDefault:Bidirectional

Set this parameter based on the service transmissiondirection. Generally, set this parameter toBidirectional.

Source Port Internal orexternal port

Name of the source port.

Source C-VLAN (e.g.1,3-6)

1-4095Default: -

This parameter is not required when you configure EPLservices.

Sink Port Internal orexternal port

Name of the sink port.

Sink C-VLAN (e.g.1, 3-6)

1-4095Default: -

This parameter is not required when you configure EPLservices.

NOTE

The Source C-VLAN and Sink C-VLAN parameters specify the VLAN IDs of the services receivedat the source and sink ports respectively when configuring PORT-shared EVPL services andVCTRUNK-shared EVPL services based on VLAN tags.

4. Click OK. The created Ethernet private line service is displayed on the interface.

Reference Informationl Formats of Ethernet Frames

Describes the formats of Ethernet frames that contain different VLAN information, asdefined by the IEEE 802.1q and IEEE 802.1ad protocols.

l External Ports and Internal PortsDescribes the definition of external ports and internal ports on Ethernet boards.

l Auto-NegotiationDescribes the auto-negotiation function.

l Flow ControlDescribes the flow control methods and implementation principle.

l Tag AttributesDescribes the tag attributes.

l BridgesDescribes the types and functions of various bridges.

l VLAN Group



223

Describes the basic concept of the VLAN group.l Configuring the Aging Time for MAC Addresses

Describes how to modify the MAC address aging time as required. Generally, retain thedefault value.

l Configuring Port MirroringDescribes how to configure port mirroring to monitor and analyze packets received ortransmitted at a port being observed.

6.4.3 Configuring EVPL ServicesEVPL services are applied to the scenario where multiple users share bandwidth. In this scenario,the VLAN or QinQ mechanism is used to identify data of different users.

Prerequisite

The parameters of WDM interfaces and Ethernet interfaces on a board must be configured.


Web LCT or U2000


With the bandwidth-sharing feature, EVPL services can be configured and applied flexibly. Onetypical application scenario is to implement the VLAN multicast function by configuringmultiple unidirectional EVPL services. These EVPL services have the same source but differentsinks, and are called a VLAN multicast group. Services in a VLAN multicast group are alsocalled member services of the VLAN multicast group. The sink ports of the member servicesare also called member ports of the VLAN multicast group. The LEM18 board supports amaximum of 2048 member services in a VLAN multicast group. Take the following precautionswhen configuring member services of a VLAN multicast group:

l Only unidirectional services can be configured as the member services.l All member ports must have the same network attributes.l A member port cannot be added to a LAG group.

Users of PORT-shared EVPL services and VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services based on VLANtags are identified by one layer of VLAN tags. Each such service is considered as an EPL servicewith the VLAN ID. Compared with EPL services with exclusive PORT or VCTRUNK ports,VLAN IDs must be specified at the shared PORT or VCTRUNK ports for PORT-shared EVPLservices or VCTRUNK-shard EVPL services based on VLAN tags. For details about theconfiguration method, see 6.4.2 Configuring EPL Services. This section describes how toconfigure QinQ technology-based EVPL services.

The QinQ technology is implemented by adding a layer of 802.1Q tags to 802.1Q packets.Therefore, the number of VLANs is increased to 4096 x 4096. With the development of themetro Ethernet and the requirement of fine operation, QinQ double tags can be implemented inother scenarios. The inner and outer tags can represent different information. The inner tag(namely the C-VLAN) represents the client and the outer tag (namely the S-VLAN) representsthe service. Table 6-43 lists the operation types of the QinQ technology-based EVPL services,short for the EVPL (QinQ) services, supported by the OptiX OSN 1800.



224

Table 6-43 EVPL (QinQ) service operation types

Operation Type Description Illustration

Add S-VLAN Adds the S-VLANto a PORT port asrequired.

C-VLANData S-VLANData C-VLAN

Strip S-VLAN Strips the S-VLANfrom a PORT portas required.

C-VLANData S-VLAN Data C-VLAN

Transparentlytransmit C-VLAN

Transparentlytransmits the C-VLAN.

Data Data C-VLANC-VLAN

Transparentlytransmit S-VLAN

Transparentlytransmits the S-VLAN.

Data S-VLANData S-VLAN

Transparentlytransmit S-VLANand C-VLAN

Transparentlytransmits the S-VLAN and C-VLAN.

Data C-VLAN S-VLANData C-VLAN S-VLAN

Translate S-VLAN Switches the S-VLAN of a PORTport as required.

S-VLAN1 S-VLAN2DataData

Procedure on the U2000 or Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, select the board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Service

> Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Click the EPL Service tab.2. Click New at the bottom of the window. The Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is

displayed.3. Enter the attributes of the EVPL services in the dialog box.

Field Value Remarks

Service Type EPL, EVPL(QinQ)Default: EPL

Select EVPL(QinQ) for the QinQ technology-based EVPL services.

Direction Unidirectional,BidirectionalDefault:Bidirectional

Set this parameter based on the service transmissiondirection. Generally, set this parameter toBidirectional. However, set this parameter toUnidirectional when configuring member servicesof a VLAN multicast group.



225

Field Value Remarks

Operation Type Add S-VLAN,Strip S-VLAN,Transparentlytransmit C-VLAN,Transparentlytransmit S-VLAN,Transparentlytransmit S-VLAN and C-VLAN,Translate S-VLANDefault: Add S-VLAN

Set this parameter based on the VLAN plan of thereceived service. For the description of differentoperation types, see Table 6-43.The value "Strip S-VLAN" is valid only forunidirectional services.

Source Port Internal orexternal port

Name of the source port.

Source C-VLAN(e.g.1,3-6)

1-4095Default: -

Set this parameter based on the received service.The value ranges from 1 to 4095.

Source S-VLAN

1-4095Default: -

Set the S-VLAN ID. The value ranges from 1 to4095.

Sink Port Internal orexternal port

Name of the sink port.

Sink C-VLAN(e.g.1, 3-6)

1-4095Default: -

Set this parameter based on the received service.The value ranges from 1 to 4095.

Sink S-VLAN 1-4095Default: -

Set the S-VLAN ID. The value ranges from 1 to4095.

4. Click OK. The created EVPL (QinQ) service is displayed in the window.

NOTE

If the window does not display the created EVPL (QinQ) service, select Display QinQ SharedService in the lower-right area of the window.




l Auto-Negotiation



226

Describes the auto-negotiation function.l Flow Control

Describes the flow control methods and implementation principle.l Tag Attributes

Describes the tag attributes.l Bridges

Describes the types and functions of various bridges.l VLAN Group

Describes the basic concept of the VLAN group.l Creating VLAN Groups

Describes how to create a VLAN group when you want to apply the same serviceconfigurations to specific VLANs or extend the number of VLANs.

l Configuring the Aging Time for MAC AddressesDescribes how to modify the MAC address aging time as required. Generally, retain thedefault value.


6.5 Configuring EPLAN/EVPLAN ServicesEPLAN/EVPLAN services belong to Ethernet services and are carried in WDM service signals.

6.5.1 EPLAN/EVPLAN Service OverviewEPLAN/EVPLAN services include Ethernet private local area network (EPLAN) and Ethernetvirtual private local area network (EVPLAN) services.

EPLAN ServicesCurrently, E-LAN services mainly refer to Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN) services. Based onthe Layer 2 switching function, the EPLAN implements transmission of the accessed data basedon the destination media access control (MAC) address of the data.

The EPLAN services can be accessed from a minimum of two nodes. The services of differentusers do not need to share the bandwidth. That is, for EPLAN services, a bandwidth is exclusivelyoccupied by the service of a user and the services of different users are separated. In addition,the extra QoS scheme and security scheme are not required. There is more than one node inEPLAN services, and therefore the nodes need to learn the MAC addresses and forward databased on MAC addresses. Therefore, Layer 2 switching is involved. See Figure 6-51.



227

Figure 6-51 EPLAN services

NE 1

NE 2

NE3VCTRUNK1

PORT1

PORT1

PORT1

Department 2

VCTRUNK1

PORT1 VB

VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2

PORT1

VB

IEEE 802.1d bridge

PORT1VB

Department 1

Department 3

VCTRUNK

As shown in Figure 6-51, three branches of user F need to communicate with each other. OnNE1, the IEEE 802.1d bridge is established to implement EPLAN services. IEEE 802.1d bridgecan create the MAC address-based forwarding table, which is periodically updated by using theself-learning function of the system. Accessed data can be forwarded or broadcasted within thedomain of the IEEE 802.1d bridge based on the destination MAC addresses.

To avoid a broadcast storm, EPLAN services cannot be set as a ring. If the EPLAN services areset as a ring, the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) must be started in the network.

EVPLAN ServicesEVPLAN services of different users need to share the bandwidth. Therefore, the VLAN/QinQscheme needs to be used for differentiating the data of different users. If the services of differentusers need to be configured with different quality levels, you need to adopt the correspondingQoS scheme.

EVPLAN services can be implemented by establishing the IEEE 802.1q bridge and the IEEE802.1ad bridge.

IEEE 802.1q bridge: The IEEE 802.1q bridge supports isolation by using one layer of VLANtags. This bridge checks the contents of the VLAN tags in the data frames and performs Layer2 switching based on the destination MAC addresses and VLAN IDs.

As shown in Figure 6-52, three branches of user G need to communicate with each other.Services of user G need to be isolated from the services of user H. In this case, the operator needsto separately groom the VoIP services and HSI services, be established on NE1 to implementEVPLAN services.



228

Figure 6-52 EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge)

VCTRUNK1

PORT1

PORT1

PORT1

PORT2

PORT2

PORT2

VLAN22VLAN11

VLAN22

VLAN11

NE 1

NE 2

NE3 PORT1

PORT2

VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2VB

IEEE 802.1q bridge

PORT1

VB

PORT2

VCTRUNK1

VB PORT1PORT2

VLAN22

VLAN11

Company ADepartment 2

Company BDepartment 2





VCTRUNK

IEEE 802.1ad bridge: The IEEE 802.1ad bridge supports data frames with two layers of VLANtags. This bridge adopts the outer S-VLAN tags to isolate different VLANs and supports onlythe mounted ports whose attributes are C-Aware or S-Aware. This bridge supports the followingswitching modes:

l This bridge does not check the contents of the VLAN tags in the data frames, and performsLayer 2 switching based on the destination MAC addresses of the data frames.

l This bridge checks the contents of the VLAN tags in the data frames, and performs Layer2 switching based on the destination MAC addresses and the S-VLAN IDs of the dataframes.

As shown in Figure 6-53, the GE services from user M and the FE services from user N needto access network respectively. In this case, the operator needs to separately groom the GEservices and FE services, and isolate the data on the transmission network side. On NE1, theIEEE 802.1ad bridge must be established to support the EVPLAN services.



229

Figure 6-53 EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1ad bridge)

NE 1

NE 2

NE3VCTRUNK1

PORT1

PORT2

PORT1

Service C-VLANGEFE

1020

Service C-VLANGEFE

1020

VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2

PORT2

VB

VCTRUNK1

PORT1 VB

IEEE 802.1ad bridge

PORT3

VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2

PORT3

VB

IEEE 802.1ad bridge

PORT1VB

S-VLAN 100 S-VLAN 200

Department 4

Department 2 Department 1

Department 3

VCTRUNK

Service S-VLANGEFE

100200

Service S-VLANGEFE

100200

GE FE

6.5.2 Configuring EPLAN ServicesEPLAN services are applied to point-to-multipoint scenarios and are generally configured ataggregation nodes in a network. For non-aggregation nodes, EPL or EVPL services areconfigured.

Prerequisite

The parameters of WDM interfaces and Ethernet interfaces on a board must be configured.


Web LCT or U2000

Procedure on the U2000 or Web LCT1. Create the IEEE 802.1d bridge.

(1) In the NE Explorer, select the board and then choose Configuration > EthernetService > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Select the ServiceMount tab.

(2) Click New at the bottom of the window. The Create Ethernet LAN Service dialogbox is displayed.

(3) Enter the attributes of the E-LAN service in the dialog box.



230

Field Value Remarks

VB Name A maximumof 16 Englishletters ornumerals

This parameter is a character string used to describethe bridge. It is recommended that you set thisparameter to a character string that contains theinformation about the detailed application of thebridge.

VB Type IEEE 802.1d,IEEE 802.1q,IEEE 802.1adDefault:IEEE 802.1q

Select IEEE 802.1d for this parameter whenconfiguring EPLAN services. The IEEE 802.1dMAC bridge learns and forwards the packets basedon the MAC addresses of the user packets. Theinformation in the VLAN tags of the user packets,however, is not considered in the learning andforwarding process. The IEEE 802.1d MAC bridgeis used when the entire information of the VLANsused by the client cannot be learned or when thedata between the VLANs of the client does not needto be separated.

BridgeSwitchMode

SVL/IngressFilterDisable, IVL/Ingress FilterEnableDefault: IVL/Ingress FilterEnable

Set this parameter to SVL/Ingress Filter Disablefor the IEEE 802.1d bridge. All the VLANs sharethe same MAC address table. That is, the bridgelearns and forwards the packets based on the MACaddress of the user packets only. The informationin the VLAN tags of the user packets, however, isnot considered in the learning and forwardingprocess.

(4) Click Configure Mount.... The Service Mount Configuration dialog box is

displayed.(5) Select the ports that you want to mount to the bridge from Available Mounted

Ports, and then click . The selected ports are displayed in SelectedForwarding Ports.

(6) Click OK. The configured mounting ports are displayed in Service Mount.(7) Click OK. The created EPLAN services are displayed in the window.

2. Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the ports mounted to the bridge.

(1) Select the created bridge and click the Service Mount tab.(2) Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the mounted ports based on the service planning.

l Ports of the Hub attribute can communicate with ports of the Spoke attribute.l Ports of the Hub attribute can communicate with each other.l Ports of the Spoke attribute cannot communicate with each other.

TIP

In the window, you can also modify the port attributes such as the tag attribute, auto-negotiationmode, and port enable status of the ports mounted to the bridge.

(3) After setting the parameters, click Apply.



231








l VLAN GroupDescribes the basic concept of the VLAN group.



6.5.3 Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.lq Bridge)EVPLAN services are applied to multipoint-to-point scenarios and are generally configured ataggregation nodes in a network. For non-aggregation nodes, EPL or EVPL services areconfigured.

PrerequisiteWDM interface and Ethernet interface parameters on a board must be configured.


Procedure on the U2000 or Web LCT1. Establish the IEEE 802.1q bridge.

(1) In the NE Explorer, select the board and then choose Configuration > EthernetService > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Click the ServiceMount tab.


(3) Enter the attributes of the Ethernet LAN service in the dialog box.



232

Field Value Remarks

VB Name A maximum of16 Englishletters ornumerals

This parameter is a character string used todescribe the bridge. It is recommended that you setthis parameter to a character string that containsthe information about the detailed application ofthe bridge.

VB Type IEEE 802.1d,IEEE 802.1q,IEEE 802.1adDefault: IEEE802.1q

Set this parameter to IEEE 802.1q whenconfiguring EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1qbridge). The IEEE 802.1q bridge supportsisolation by using one layer of VLAN tags. Thisbridge checks the contents of the VLAN tags thatare in the data frames and performs Layer 2switching according to the destination MACaddresses and VLAN IDs.

BridgeSwitchMode

IVL/IngressFilter Enable,SVL/IngressFilter DisableDefault: IVL/Ingress FilterEnable

Set the parameter to IVL/Ingress Filter Enablefor the IEEE 802.1q bridge. The bridge checks thecontents of the VLAN tags that are in the packetsand performs Layer 2 switching according to thedestination MAC addresses and the VLAN IDs ofthe packets.

(4) Click Configure Mount.... The Service Mount Configuration dialog box is

displayed.(5) Select the ports that need to be mounted to the bridge forAvailable Mounted Ports.

Click . Then the selected ports are displayed in Selected ForwardingPorts.

(6) Click OK. The configured ports that are mounted to the bridge are displayed in ServiceMount.

(7) Click OK. The created Ethernet LAN services are displayed.2. Create a VLAN filtering table for each VLAN based on the VLAN design for the services.

(1) Select the created bridge and click the VLAN Filtering tab.(2) Click New.(3) Enter the ID of the VLAN that needs a VLAN filtering table for VLAN ID.(4) Select the ports that are required to forward data from Available Forwarding

Ports. Click . Then the selected ports are displayed in Selected ForwardingPorts.

(5) Click Apply to complete creating the VLAN filtering table.(6) Create VLAN filtering tables for all VLANs by performing the preceding operations.

Then click OK.3. Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the ports mounted to the bridge.

(1) Select the created bridge and click the Service Mount tab.(2) Change the Hub/Spoken attribute of a port mounted to the bridge based on the service

plan.



233

l Ports of the Spoke attribute can communicate with ports of the Hub attribute.

l Ports in the Hub mode can communicate each other.

l Ports in the Spoke mode cannot communicate each other.TIP

The attributes such as the tag attribute,the enable status of the auto-negotiation mode, and theenable status of the port of a port mounted to the bridge can be modified in the window.









l VLAN GroupDescribes the basic concept of the VLAN group.



6.5.4 Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.laq Bridge)EVPLAN services are applied to multipoint-to-point scenarios and are generally configured ataggregation nodes in a network. For non-aggregation nodes, EPL or EVPL services are generallyconfigured.

Prerequisite

WDM interface and Ethernet interface parameters on a board must be configured.


Web LCT or U2000



234

Background InformationThe IEEE 802.1ad bridge supports ports with the C-Aware and S-Aware attributes only.

The C-Aware ports are used to add and strip the S-VLAN tags. The S-Aware ports are used totransparently transmit the S-VLAN tag.

The IEEE 802.1ad bridge supports the following operation types:

l Adding the S-VLAN tag based on the portl Adding the S-VLAN tag based on the port and C-VLANl Performing port mounting based on the portl Performing port mounting based on the port and the S-VLAN

When Bridge Switch Mode of the IEEE 802.1ad bridge is IVL/Ingress Filter Enable, thepreceding four operation types are supported. When Bridge Switch Mode of the IEEE 802.1adbridge is SVL/Ingress Filter Disable, only the first operation type (adding the S-VLAN tagbased on the port) and the third operation type (performing port mounting based on the port) aresupported. This section describes the four operaton types in the condition that Bridge SwitchMode of the IEEE 802.1ad bridge is IVL/Ingress Filter Enable

l Adding the S-VLAN based on the port: The packets that enter the C-Aware port are addedwith the preset S-VLAN tag, and are forwarded in the bridge according to the S-VLANfiltering table. Before the packets leave the C-Aware port, the S-VLAN tag is stripped.

l Adding the S-VLAN tag based on the port and C-VLAN: Then entry detection is performedfor the packets that enter the C-Aware port. Then, the corresponding S-VLAN tags areadded to the packets according to the mapping between the C-VLAN tags and the S-VLANtags of the packets. If the mapping relationship does not exist, the packets are discarded.After the S-VLAN tags are added, the packets enter the bridge, where the packets areforwarded according to the S-VLAN filtering table. Before the packets leave the C-Awareport, the S-VLAN tag is stripped.

NOTE

l The same C-Aware port supports different C-VLAN tags being mapped to different S-VLANtags, but does not support the same C-VLAN tag being mapping to multiple S-VLAN tags.

l Performing port mounting based on the port: The packets that enter the S-Aware port arenot filtered. Instead, the S-VLAN switch is performed directly. The packets must have theS-VLAN tags. Otherwise, the packets are discarded. When the packets leave the S-Awareport, the packets are transparently transmitted.

l Performing port mounting based on the port and the S-VLAN: The entry filtering isperformed according to the preset S-VLAN tag. The packets that do not belong to the S-VLAN are discarded. Then, the packets are forwarded according to the S-VLAN filteringtable. When the packets leave the S-Aware port, the packets are transparently transmitted.

In the case of the four operation types, the following conditions must be met before the packetsleave a port:

l The port is contained in the S-VLAN filtering table that is created by the user.l The S-VLAN ID corresponding to the port must be specified when the user manually

mounts the port to the bridge.– In the case of a C-VLAN port, the S-VLAN ID corresponding to the port is the S-VLAN

ID that is added when the packets enter the port.– In the case of an S-VLAN port, the S-VLAN ID corresponding to the port is the S-

VLAN ID that is set when the user mounts the port to the bridge. If the S-Aware port



235

is mounted based on the port, the S-VLAN ID is considered to contain all the legal S-VLAN IDs.

Procedure on the U2000 or Web LCT1. Establish the IIEEE 802.1ad bridge.

(1) In the NE Explorer, select the board and then choose Configuration > EthernetService > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Click the ServiceMount tab.


(3) Enter the attributes of the Ethernet LAN service in the dialog box.

Parameter Value Remarks

VB Name A maximum of16 Englishletters ornumerals

This parameter is a character string used todescribe the bridge. It is recommended that youset this parameter to a character string thatcontains the information about the detailedapplication of the bridge.

VB Type IEEE 802.1d,IEEE 802.1q,IEEE 802.1adDefault: IEEE802.1q

Set the parameter to IEEE 802.1aq whenconfiguring EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1aqbridge). The IEEE 802.1ad bridge supportspackets with two layers of VLAN tags and adoptsthe outer S-VLAN tags to isolate services ofdifferent VLANs. It can be mounted to the portswhose attributes are C-Aware and S-Aware only.

BridgeSwitchMode

IVL/IngressFilter Enable,SVL/IngressFilter DisableDefault: IVL/Ingress FilterEnable

The IVL/Ingress Filter Enable and SVL/Ingress Filter Disable modes can be adopted bythe IEEE 802.1ad bridge.l IVL/Ingress Filter Enable: VLAN tags in the

data frames received at the bridge are checked.Layer 2 switch is performed based on thedestination MAC adresses and the S-VLANID of a data frame.

l SVL/Ingress Filter Disable: VLAN tags in thedata frames received at the bridge are notchecked. Layer 2 switch is performed basedon the destination MAC adresses of a dataframe.

(4) Click Configure Mount.... A Service Mount Configuration dialog box is displayed.(5) Set service mounting attributes.



236

Field Value Remarks

OperationType

Add S-VLANbase for Port,Add S-VLANbase for Portand C-VLAN,Mount Port,Mount Port andbase for Portand S-VLANDefault: Add S-VLAN base forPort

Select the proper operation types based onreceived services at a port. For detaileddescription of operation types, see BackgroundInformation.

VB Port The VB logicalport number.For example, 1.

Set the number of the mounted VB port.

Mount Port An internal orexternal port

Select the external port or internal port to bemounted.

C-VLAN 1-4095Default: -

Specifies the CVLAN ID of a service received ata port. The parameter is valid only whenOperation Type is Add S-VLAN base for portand C-VLAN.

S-VLAN 1-4095Default: -

Specifies the S-VLAN ID to be identified oradded in the services received at a port. Theparameter is valid only when Operation Type isnot Mount Port.

(6) Click Add Mount Port. The mounted ports are displayed in the window.

(7) After mounting all ports, click OK. The created E-LAN services are displayed in thewindow.

2. Create a VLAN filtering table for each S-VLAN based on the S-VLAN design for theservices.

(1) Select the created bridge and click the VLAN Filtering tab.

(2) Click New.

(3) Enter the ID of the VLAN that needs a VLAN filtering table for VLAN ID.

(4) Select the ports that are required to forward data from Available Forwarding

Ports. Click . Then the selected ports are displayed in Selected ForwardingPorts.

(5) Click Apply to complete creating the VLAN filtering table.

(6) Create VLAN filtering tables for all VLANs by performing the preceding operations.Then click OK.

3. Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the ports mounted to the bridge.

(1) Select the created bridge and click the Service Mount tab.



237

(2) Modify the Hub/Spoken attribute of a port mounted to the bridge according to serviceplan.

l Ports of the Spoke attribute can communicate with ports of the Hub attribute.

l Ports of the Hub attribute can communicate each other.

l Ports of the Spoke attribute cannot communicate each other.TIP

The attributes such as the tag attribute,the enable status of the auto-negotiation mode, and theenable status of the port of a port mounted to the bridge can be modified in the window.




l External Ports and Internal Ports

Describes the definition of external ports and internal ports on Ethernet boards.

l Auto-Negotiation

Describes the auto-negotiation function.

l Flow Control

Describes the flow control methods and implementation principle.

l Tag Attributes

Describes the tag attributes.

l Bridges

Describes the types and functions of various bridges.

l VLAN Group

Describes the basic concept of the VLAN group.

l Configuring the Aging Time for MAC Addresses

Describes how to modify the MAC address aging time as required. Generally, retain thedefault value.

l Configuring Port Mirroring

Describes how to configure port mirroring to monitor and analyze packets received ortransmitted at a port being observed.

6.6 Configuring SDH ServiceThe TSP board supports configuration of SDH service.

Prerequisite

You must have logged in to the NE where the TSP board resides.

Service types must be set for WDM optical interfaces on the board.



238


Background InformationWhen configuring an SDH service, select a proper timeslot according to the service level. Table6-44 lists the timeslots available for optical interfaces on the TSP board.

Table 6-44 Timeslots available for optical interfaces on the TSP board

Service Level Timeslot for E1/T1 Interface

Timeslot for TX1/RX1 and TX2/RX2Interfaces

Timeslot for IN1/OUT1and IN2/OUT2Interfaces

VC12 5-25 1-63 1-63

VC4 - 1 l When the service typeis STM-1, the timeslotmust be 1.

l When the service typeis STM-4, the timeslotranges from 1 to 4.

NOTE

In the case of the TSP board, the default service type is STM-1.

Procedure on the Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Cross-Connection

Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click New on the right of the window, and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.3. Set Level, Direction, Source, Source Port, Source VC4, Source Timeslot Range(e.g.

1,3–6), Sink, Sink Port, Sink VC4 and Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3–6) according to theSDH service planning.

4. Click OK.

Procedure on the U20001. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > SDH Service

Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click Create on the right of the window, and the Create SDH Service dialog box is

displayed.3. Set Level, Direction, Source Slot, Source Timeslot Range, Sink Slot, Sink Timeslot

Range and Activate Immediately according to the SDH service planning. Click OK. TheOperation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. ClickOK.

NOTE

Activate Immediately is generally set to Active.



239

7 Follow-up Operations (Including DataBackup)

About This Chapter

7.1 Creating FibersCorrect logical fiber connections enable users to understand the network structure easily and tolocate faults rapidly during operation and maintenance of a network. In addition, correct andcomplete fiber connections are one of the prerequisites for configuring services using WDMtrails.

7.2 Configuring WDM TrailsThe U2000 manages WDM trails by using functions such as creating, viewing, combining,separating, and deleting end-to-end WDM trails, and provides signal flow diagrams of the WDMtrails to show the signal flows of the WDM trails.

7.3 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC BoardBy backing up an NE database to an SCC board, you can ensure that the NE automaticallyrestores to the normal state in case a power failure occurs. When you back up an NE databaseto an SCC board, you actually back up the NE data to the flash memory of the SCC board. Aftera power-off reset occurs on the NE, the SCC board automatically reads the configuration datafrom the flash memory and applies the data to the boards on this NE.

7.4 Checking Optical Power of BoardsBy checking the optical power of a board, you can ensure that the transmit and receive opticalpower of the board is within the normal range. When commissioning the OptiX OSN 1800, youcan adjust the optical power of a board at the site by adding, replacing, or removing a fixedoptical attenuator (FOA) or adjusting a variable optical attenuator (VOA) before an optical port.

7.5 Querying Bit Errors Before and After FECThe count of bit errors before and after FEC is a key specification for measuring the systemoperation quality.

7.6 Viewing Current Alarms on an NE and Removing Abnormal AlarmsViewing the current alarms on an NE helps you to intuitively and quickly locate an exceptionon the network. This helps you to identify a fault on the network.

7.7 Testing Protection Switching

OptiX OSN 1800 Compact Multi-Service Edge OpticalTransport PlatformCommissioning and Configuration Guide 7 Follow-up Operations (Including Data Backup)


240

In the commissioning or configuration phase, you can run a manual switching command to checkwhether protection switching can be performed normally.

7.8 Querying and Saving the Networkwide Optical Power and Alarm DataAfter commissioning a network, you need to query and save the optical power and alarm dataof the entire network. This type of data can help you analyze and understand the operating statusof the network in future.

7.9 Backing Up NE Data to the NMS Server or ClientYou can manually back up the data of one or more NEs of the same type to an NMS server orclient.



241

7.1 Creating FibersCorrect logical fiber connections enable users to understand the network structure easily and tolocate faults rapidly during operation and maintenance of a network. In addition, correct andcomplete fiber connections are one of the prerequisites for configuring services using WDMtrails.

PrerequisiteOptical NEs, NEs, and logical boards must be created.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsThe U2000 must be used.

Procedure on the U20001. Create fibers between NEs.

(1) Click the shortcut icon on the Main Topology and the cursor is displayed as "+" .(2) Click the source NE of the fiber on the Main Topology.(3) Select the source board and source port in the Select Fiber/Cable Source dialog box

displayed.(4) Click OK. The Main Topology is displayed and the cursor is displayed as "+" again.(5) Click the sink NE of the fiber in the Main Topology.(6) Select the sink board and sink port in the Select Fiber/Cable Sink dialog box

displayed.(7) Click OK and enter the attributes of the fiber in the Create Fiber/Cable dialog box

displayed.(8) Click OK. The created fiber is displayed between the source NE and the sink NE on

the Main Topology.TIP

To delete a fiber, right-click a fiber that has been created and choose Delete.

2. Create internal fibers of an NE.

(1) Double-click an optical NE on the Main Topology. Click the Signal Flow Diagramtab.

(2) In the Signal Flow Diagram, right-click in the blank area and choose Create Fiberfrom the shortcut menu. The cursor is displayed as "+".

(3) Select the source board and port and click OK. The cursor is displayed as "+".(4) Select the sink board and port and click OK.

TIP

When a wrong source or sink board or port is selected, right-click to cancel the operation andexit object selection.

(5) In the Create Fiber/Cable dialog box, enter the attributes of the fiber.(6) Click OK.



242

TIP

To delete a fiber, right-click a fiber that has been created and choose Delete.

Reference Informationl Creating Fibers in List Mode

You can also create fibers in list mode on the U2000. Creating fibers in list mode is notintuitive when compared with creating fibers in graphic mode; however, you can manageall fibers/cables through a same user interface when creating fibers in list mode.


7.2 Configuring WDM TrailsThe U2000 manages WDM trails by using functions such as creating, viewing, combining,separating, and deleting end-to-end WDM trails, and provides signal flow diagrams of the WDMtrails to show the signal flows of the WDM trails.

This section describes how to configure the WDM trails supported by the OptiX OSN 1800. Fordetails about searching for, creating, and managing WDM trails, see the U2000 Help.

NOTE

When the ELOM board works in 8*Any->ODU0_ODU1 mode, end-to-end configurations of services arenot supported.

7.2.1 Searching WDM TrailsAfter configuring services on an NE, search for WDM trails on the NE so that you can manageservices based on WDM trails.

PrerequisiteAll fibers must be created properly.

All required services must be configured properly on the NE.


Background InformationThe OptiX OSN 1800 supports searching for the following WDM trails on the U2000:

l Client traill ODUk traill OTUk traill OCh traill OMS trail



243

l OTS trail

Of these WDM trails, you can manage OTS trails directly without searching for them, becausethe OTS trail data is stored at the network layer when fibers are connected.

PrecautionsNOTE

In the process of searching and creating WDM trails, discrete services may be generated. You need toanalyze and remove the discrete services to ensure that no discrete service exist on the network at last.

Procedure on the U20001. In the Main Menu, choose Service > WDM Trail > Search for WDM Trail to display

the WDM Trail Search navigation.2. In the Advanced settings area, set various handling policies associated with trail searching.

NOTE

l When you search for WDM trails for the first time, it is recommended to select Query attributesof boards from the NE before searchingto obtain board attribute information such as thewavelengths on the board. For other items, retain the default values.

l In the mode of searching for WDM trails by subnet, it is recommended that the selected subnetshould be separate from the other portions of the network. That is, no fiber connection existsbetween the selected subnet and any other portion on the network.

3. Click Next to start searching for WDM trails. Wait until the status bar shows the end of thesearching.



244

NOTE

l If certain cross-connections conflict with each other and thus fail to form an end-to-end trail, theinformation about these cross-connections is displayed in the search result when the searchingis complete. You can rectify the problem according to the conflict information.

l Certain cross-connections may conflict with each other when the network architecture is changedor a trail that may cause an interruption of service flows exists. You can determine whetherconflicting cross-connections exist by deleting certain routing information such as deleting across-connection or a fiber

4. Optional: Click Next to view the information about the conflicting trails. Right-click atrail, you can configure it with a management flag.

NOTE

If you have selected Automatically create trails after searching in the search policies, skip thisstep.

If you perform this step, the NMS will remove the trails that are not configured with managementflags from the network in the next step. The deletion does not affect the actual services on the NEand the data of the NE saved on the NMS.

5. Click Next to view all discrete services on the network.

NOTE

The possible causes of discrete services and the method for removing discrete services are as follows:

l The data on the NE is inconsistent with that on the NMS. In this case, upload the configurationdata to the NMS.

l Fibers are created inappropriately and the created fiber connections are inconsistent with thephysical fiber connections. In this case, check and ensure that the fiber connections created onthe NMS are consistent with the physical fiber connections between real equipment.

l NE configuration data is incorrect and service configuration is incomplete. In this case, correctthe NE configuration data and configure services completely.

6. When the search is complete, click Finish. In the displayed dialog box indicating that thesearch is complete, click OK.

Follow-up Procedure


7.2.2 Creating WDM TrailsYou can create OCh, ODUk, or client trails by specifying the sources and sinks of the trails.

Prerequisite

All fibers must be created properly.

A trail at the corresponding server layer must be searched out or created.

All the NEs on the trail must communicate with each other properly.


The U2000 must be used.



245

Background InformationBefore creating a WDM trail, you need to search for or create a trail at the corresponding serverlayer. The details are as follows:

l Before creating an OCh trail, you need to search for an appropriate trail at the OMS serverlayer.

l Before creating an ODUk trail, you need to search for an appropriate trail at the OTUkserver layer.

l Before creating a client trail, you need to search for or create an appropriate trail at the OChand ODUk server layer.

When OCh trails exist, client trails can be directly created. The ODUk service-layer trails arecreated automatically. Note that client trails may exist on multiple ODUk service-layer trails ofdifferent levels in a scenario where the OptiX OSN 1800 is interconnected with other NG WDMseries products. In this scenario, create all ODUk trails section by section before creating end-to-end client trails. For example, part of a client trail exists on an ODU1 trail and the other partof the client trail exists on an ODU0 trail. In this scenario, create an ODU1 trail and an ODU0trail for the client trail and then create the whole end-to-end client trail.

For the OptiX OSN 1800,

l For boards or ports that do not support cross-connections, all the existing WDM trails arecreated automatically after searching WDM trials are complete. You do not need to createWDM trails.

l For boards or ports that support cross-connections,– If the cross-connections on the boards or ports are correctly configured before WDM

trails are searched out, all the existing WDM trails are created automatically aftersearching WDM trials are complete. You do not need to create WDM trails.

– If cross-connections are not configured on the boards or ports before WDM trails aresearched out, configure cross-connections by creating client trails after searchingWDM trials. This method of creating trails is called "configuring services by creatingtrails".

PrecautionsNOTE

You can configure services by creating client trails for only boards that support the cross-connectionfunction.

Procedure on the U20001. In the Main Menu, choose Service > WDM Trail > Create WDM Trail to display the

Create WDM Trail navigation.2. Set Level, Rate, and Direction for the trail to be created.



246

3. Click Browse next to Source or Sink. In the displayed window, select the desired NE onthe left and select the desired board in the board layout on the right. Then, select the desiredoptical port in Available Timeslots/Port. Click OK.

In the case of the master/slave subrack mode, you can switch the NE panel views of thesubracks by clicking the tabs on the top of the NE panel view.

4. Optional: Click a server tail between the source and sink NEs. In the displayed dialog box,specify a route as the explicit route for the services. You can click the route again and cancelthe selected explicit route in the displayed dialog box.

5. Optional: Double-click another NE in the subnet to specify it as an excluded NE. The

sign is shown on the NE. Double-click the NE again to cancel your selection.

6. Optional: Click Specify Route Channel to display the Specify Route Channel dialogbox. After selecting the working channel of the services, click OK.

7. Click the General Attributes tab and then set the basic attributes such as name and ID ofthis trail on the tab page.

8. Select the Activate the trail check box and click Apply to create this trail. A dialog boxis displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

7.2.3 Managing WDM TrailsYou can manage WDM trails after searching out or creating the WDM trails.

Prerequisite

All fibers must be created properly.

WDM trails must be searched out or created.

All the NEs on the trail must communicate with each other properly.


The U2000 must be used.


U2000 describes various WDM management functions, such as viewing WDM trails, modifyingWDM trails, and maintaining WDM trails. You can perform WDM management as required.This section describes how to navigate to the specific window on the NMS for managing WDMtrails. For details about WDM management functions and operations on the U2000, see theU2000 Help.



247

Procedure on the U20001. In the Main Menu, choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail.2. In the displayed Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box, specify filtering conditions.

Click Filter All. The information about the trails that are filtered are displayed in thewindow.l If you need to filter all trails that meet the set filtering conditions, click Filter All.l If you need to add trails that meet new conditions to the existing trails, click Incremental

Filter.l If you need to filter the existing trails according to new filtering conditions, click

Secondary Filter.3. Right-click the trail that needs to be managed, and then perform required management

operations.

7.3 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC BoardBy backing up an NE database to an SCC board, you can ensure that the NE automaticallyrestores to the normal state in case a power failure occurs. When you back up an NE databaseto an SCC board, you actually back up the NE data to the flash memory of the SCC board. Aftera power-off reset occurs on the NE, the SCC board automatically reads the configuration datafrom the flash memory and applies the data to the boards on this NE.


The NE must be configured properly.


PrecautionsNOTE

After backing up an NE database to an SCC board, you can restore the NE database from the SCC boardby performing a warm or cold reset on the SCC board.

Procedure on the U20001. In the Main Menu, choose Configuration > NE Configuration Data Management.

2. Select the NE from the Function Tree, and then click .3. In Configuration Data Management List, select an NE or multiple NEs of which the

database you want to back up. Click Back Up NE Data and select Back Up Database toSCC. In the displayed confirmation dialog box, click OK.

4. The Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

Reference Informationl Compare the methods of backing up and restoring NE data



248

The backup or restored NE database can be saved on the SCC board, NMS server, or NMSclient. Different storage locations determine different backup and restoration methods.

l Restore the NE database from the SCC boardWhen a database file is lost due to a factor such as NE maintenance or NE fault, you canrestore the DRDB database that has been backed up in the flash memory of the SCC board.

Follow-up Procedure


7.4 Checking Optical Power of BoardsBy checking the optical power of a board, you can ensure that the transmit and receive opticalpower of the board is within the normal range. When commissioning the OptiX OSN 1800, youcan adjust the optical power of a board at the site by adding, replacing, or removing a fixedoptical attenuator (FOA) or adjusting a variable optical attenuator (VOA) before an optical port.

Prerequisite

The performance monitoring function must be enabled.

Fiber connections must be established properly and lasers must be enabled.


The Web LCT or U2000 is used for querying the optical power of a board. The U2000 must beused for querying the optical power of the entire network.

Procedure on the Web LCT1. Query the current optical power of the board. Check whether the input optical power for

each optical port is in the range of Input Power Lower Threshold(dBm) and Input PowerUpper Threshold(dBm).

(1) In the NE Explorer, select the board whose optical power you need to query. ChooseConfiguration > Optical Power Management from the Function Tree.

(2) Click Query to read the current optical power value from the NE.2. Rectify incorrect input optical power.

l If the input optical power for an optical port is greater than Input Power LowerThreshold(dBm), add a FOA or replace the existing FOA before the optical port toensure that the input optical power meets the design requirement.

l If the input optical power value is smaller than Input Power Upper Threshold(dBm), do as follows:

– Check the transmit optical power of the opposite board. If the transmit optical powerof this board is abnormal, replace the transmitter on this board.

– Check whether appropriate FOAs are installed on the link against the FOAinstallation table.

– Check and clean the fiber endfaces and flanges on the ODF.



249

– Check whether fiber jumpers are bent seriously or bundled too tightly.– If the attenuation of line fibers is excessive, recommend customers to rectify the line

fibers or add an REG station to ensure that the actual line attenuation is smaller thanthe line attenuation specified in the design document.

TIP

At the site, you can also use the following methods to determine whether the input optical power atan optical port on a board meets the design requirement:

l Use an optical power meter to measure the input optical power at an optical port. Then, determinewhether the input optical power is normal according to the permitted optical power range.

l Check the status of the LED corresponding to this optical port, such as IN, IN1, IN2, IN3, IN4,RM1, or RM2, on the front panel of the board.

l Always on (red): indicates that the receive optical power is excessively low.

l Blink (red): indicates that the receive optical power is excessively high.

l Always on (green): indicates that the receive optical power is normal.

3. Check the value of Output Power(dBm) for each optical port on the board. The value mustbe within the specified range. If the value for an optical port is out of the specified range,replace the optical module at the optical port.For detailed specifications of a board, see the Hardware Description.

Procedure on the U20001. Query optical power networkwide.

(1) Choose Configuration > Optical Power Management from the Main Menu of theU2000.

(2) Select all the stations from the navigator on the left, click .(3) Click Query, in the Result dialog box, click Close.

2. Customize an optical power management template. After customizing the template, youcan determine whether the optical power is in the normal range by directly checking thetemplate.For the OptiX OSN 1800, the Input Power Reference Upper Threshold(dBm) and InputPower Upper Threshold(dBm) fields have the same value, and the Input PowerReference Lower Threshold(dBm) and Input Power Lower Threshold(dBm) fieldshave the same value.

(1) In the Main Menu, choose Configuration > Optical Power Management to displaythe Optical Power Management window.

(2) Select the NEs in the NE list on the left of the window, and then click .(3) On the right of the window, click Query. In the displayed dialog box, click Close.(4) Right-click the title field and then choose Column Setting from the shortcut menu.

In the displayed dialog box, select the desired parameters. Display or hide the selectedparameters as required. You can also change the position where a parameter isdisplayed and customize the width of the display field and the parameter name. Forexample, in the case of a network with no optical amplifier (OA) boards, you arerecommended to hide the Pump Max Output Power (dBm) and Pump Min OutputPower (dBm) fields. After the setting, click OK.

TIP

After clicking the title area, select a parameter field directly and then hide or display it asrequired.



250

(5) Set Input Power Reference Upper Threshold (dBm) and Input Power ReferenceLower Threshold (dBm).The U2000 compares the obtained Input Power (dBm) with the Input PowerReference Upper Threshold (dBm) and Input Power Reference Lower Threshold(dBm) values to determine whether the input optical power is normal.If Input Power (dBm) is in the range of Input Power Reference Upper Threshold(dBm) and Input Power Reference Lower Threshold (dBm), the input opticalpower is normal. If the input optical power exceeds either of the preceding thresholdsby less than 2 dB, the Input Power State field is displayed as warning alert; if thedeviation is greater than 2 dB, the input power state is displayed as critical alert.The Input Power Reference Upper Threshold (dBm) and Input Power ReferenceLower Threshold (dBm) fields have no default values. If either of them is not set,the U2000 does not check for the input power state.

NOTE

If the Input Power Reference Value (dBm) field is set but the Input Power Reference UpperThreshold (dBm) and Input Power Reference Lower Threshold (dBm) fields are not set,the U2000 automatically generates Input Power Reference Upper Threshold (dBm) andInput Power Reference Lower Threshold (dBm) according to Input Power ReferenceValue (dBm). In this case, the following formulas must be satisfied:

l Input Power Reference Upper Threshold (dBm) = Input Power Reference Value(dBm) + 3dB

l Input Power Reference Lower Threshold (dBm) = Input Power Reference Value(dBm) - 5dB

To ensure that the U2000 displays a correct power state, you are recommended to set the InputPower Reference Upper Threshold (dBm) and Input Power Reference Lower Threshold(dBm) fields.

(6) Set Output Power Reference Value (dBm).

Output Power Reference Value (dBm) must be set according to the output opticalpower specification of the optical module at the specified optical interface. TheU2000 compares the obtained Output Power (dBm) with the preset Output PowerReference Value (dBm) to determine whether the output optical power is abnormal.If Output Power (dBm) deviates from Output Power Reference Value (dBm) byless than 2 dB, the U2000 displays Output Power State as normal; if the deviationis 2 dB to 4 dB, the U2000 displays Output Power State as Warning Alert; if thedeviation is greater than 4 dB, the U2000 displays Output Power State as CriticalAlert.

(7) To save the customized template, choose Filter by Template > Save As. In thedisplayed dialog box, enter the template name and then click OK. The Result dialogbox is displayed. Click Close.

3. Check the value of the Input Power State field. If the field is displayed as CriticalAlert or Warning Alert, it indicates that the optical power of the specified optical port isoutside of the normal range. In this case, proceed to analyze the problem. That is, rectifythis problem in the same way as used to rectify such a problem by using the Web LCT.



251

TIP

You can also compare Input Power(dBm) of each optical port with Input Power Lower Threshold(dBm) and Input Power Upper Threshold(dBm). If the input optical power is outside of the rangeof Input Power Lower Threshold(dBm) and Input Power Upper Threshold(dBm), it indicatesthat the input optical power is abnormal.

4. Check Output Power(dBm) for each optical port on the board according to the value ofOutput Power State. The output optical power must be within the specified range. If theoutput optical power at an optical port is outside of the specified range, replace the opticalmodule at the optical port.

Reference Informationl The receive optical power is normal but the LDGF board reports an OTU1_LOF

alarm.In the case of a board with the dual fed and selective receiving function, if only optical port2 or 4 is in normal state before the board is configured with protection, the ESCcommunication will be unavailable.

l The receive optical power is normal but the LDGF board reports a LINK_ERR alarm.If an FE interface on the LDGF board does not access any service and the channel use statusis set as used, the board will report a LINK_ERR alarm.

l The receive optical power is normal but an OTU board reports an REM_SF alarm.If the OTU board at the remote end does not access any service on the client side, the OTUboard at the local end will report an REM_SF alarm.

l Commission optical powerIf a query operation shows that the optical power is abnormal, you may need to commissionthe optical power at the site. In this case, see this section to learn the method and procedurefor commissioning optical power.


7.5 Querying Bit Errors Before and After FECThe count of bit errors before and after FEC is a key specification for measuring the systemoperation quality.



252

Prerequisite

The performance monitoring function must be enabled and the current NE time must be withinthe specified performance monitoring time range.

FEC Working State of an OTU board must be set to Enabled.


Web LCT or U2000

Precautions

CAUTIONDuring the deployment commissioning, ensure that the bit errors before FEC meet the customerrequirements and the bit errors after FEC is zero by taking into account the line attenuation andthe configurations.

Procedure on the Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, select the desired board.

2. Choose Performance > Current Performance from the Function Tree.

3. In Performance Event Type, select the desired item and then click Query.

4. View the current values in Performance Event and Performance Value.

Procedure on the U20001. Choose Performance > Browse WDM Performance from the Main Menu of the

U2000, and then click the Current Performance Data tab.

2. Select the option from the drop-down list next to Monitored Object Filter Criteria.

3. In Monitor Period, select 15-Minute or 24-Hour.

4. Select one or multiple boards in the left pane, and click the .

5. Click the Count tab. Select options under Performance Event Type, and select DisplayZero Data for the Display Options.

6. Click Query to query the performance value for bit error on the NE side.

7. In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close to finish the operation.

Reference Informationl Set performance thresholds for a specified board

When an NE detects that a certain performance value exceeds the specified threshold, theNE reports a corresponding performance event. See this section to learn how to change theperformance threshold of a specified board.

l Set performance monitoring parameters of a board



253

The Web LCT/U2000 can monitor the performance of all boards on a network. Theautomatic reporting of detected performance values, however, is disabled by default. Youcan change the default setting as required.

l Set performance monitoring parameters of an NESet the performance monitoring parameters of a specified NE properly and then enable theNE performance monitoring function. By doing so, you can obtain detailed description ofperformance records during the operation of the NE. This facilitates monitoring of theexisting services and the equipment status.

l Reset the performance register of a boardAfter a network test or fault recovery, you need to reset the performance register of a boardas required before the board is put into operation. This is to start a new performancemonitoring period.


7.6 Viewing Current Alarms on an NE and RemovingAbnormal Alarms

Viewing the current alarms on an NE helps you to intuitively and quickly locate an exceptionon the network. This helps you to identify a fault on the network.

PrerequisiteThe NMS computer must communicate with the NE properly.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsWeb LCT or U2000. When you need to view alarms on all NEs on the network, use theU2000.

Procedure on the Web LCT1. Query the current alarms on an NE.

(1) In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Alarm > Browse Alarms from theFunction Tree.

(2) In the displayed window, click the Browse Current Alarms tab.2. Analyze and handle the reported abnormal alarms. In the case of on-site maintenance,

handle Critical and Major alarms before handling other abnormal alarms.Analyze and handle alarms one by one according to the network situations. According tonetwork conditions, certain alarms are reported inevitably, whereas certain alarms cannotbe reported. For example, in general no service is accessed on the WDM side duringdeployment commissioning. In this case, relevant alarms are reported inevitably. Thesealarms, however, are cleared automatically after real services are accessed on the clientside.In the commissioning and configuration phases of deployment, you need to analyze everyreported alarm. In general, focus on the following alarms:



254

l Optical power low or high alarml Temperature threshold-crossing alarml Abnormal communication alarml Bit error-related alarml Abnormal service alarmTo handle a reported alarm, see the Alarms and Performance Events Reference.

Procedure on the U20001. Query the current alarms on all NEs.

(1) Click the current critical alarm indicator (red) in the upper right corner of theU2000 window. to browse the current network-wide critical alarms.

NOTEThe figure in the center of the indicator indicates the number of the current critical alarms.

When the indicator is surrounded by a square frame , it indicates that there arecritical alarms to be acknowledged.

(2) Click the current major alarm indicator (orange) in the upper right corner ofthe U2000 window to browse the current network-wide major alarms.

NOTEThe figure in the center of the indicator indicates the number of the current major alarms. When

the indicator is surrounded by a square frame , it indicates that there are majoralarms to be acknowledged.

(3) Click the current minor alarm indicator (yellow) in the upper right corner ofthe U2000 window to browse the current network-wide minor alarms.

NOTEThe figure in the center of the indicator indicates the number of the current minor alarms. When

the indicator is surrounded by a square frame , it indicates that there are minoralarms to be acknowledged.

(4) Click the current warning alarm indicator (blue) in the upper right corner ofthe U2000 window to browse the current network-wide warning alarms.

NOTEThe figure in the center of the indicator indicates the number of the current warning alarms.

When the indicator is surrounded by a square frame , it indicates that there arewarning alarms to be acknowledged.

2. Analyze and handle the reported abnormal alarms. In the case of on-site maintenance,handle Critical and Major alarms before handling other abnormal alarms.Analyze and handle alarms one by one according to the network situations. According tonetwork conditions, certain alarms are reported inevitably, whereas certain alarms cannotbe reported. For example, in general no service is accessed on the WDM side duringdeployment commissioning. In this case, relevant alarms are reported inevitably. Thesealarms, however, are cleared automatically after real services are accessed on the clientside.In the commissioning and configuration phases of deployment, you need to analyze everyreported alarm. In general, focus on the following alarms:



255

l Optical power low or high alarm

l Temperature threshold-crossing alarm

l Abnormal communication alarm

l Bit error-related alarm

l Abnormal service alarm

To handle a reported alarm, see the Alarms and Performance Events Reference.

Reference Informationl The optical path is reachable but the NE cannot be logged in to remotely.

In the case of a board with the dual fed and selective receiving function, if only optical port2 or 4 is in normal state before the board is configured with protection, the ESCcommunication will be unavailable.

l Commission optical power

If a query operation shows that the optical power is abnormal, you may need to commissionthe optical power at the site. In this case, read this section to learn the method and procedurefor commissioning optical power.

Follow-up Procedure


7.7 Testing Protection SwitchingIn the commissioning or configuration phase, you can run a manual switching command to checkwhether protection switching can be performed normally.

7.7.1 Testing SW SNCP SwitchingAfter configuring SW SNCP protection, you can run a manual switching command to checkwhether the SW SNCP switching can be performed successfully.

Prerequisite

The NMS computer must communicate with the NE properly.

Protection groups must be configured correctly.

The working and protection channels of a protection group on the network must be in normalstate.


Web LCT or U2000



256

Precautions

CAUTIONIn the case of revertive protection, services can be switched only to the protection channel byperforming a manual switching.

Procedure on the Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Subwavelength SNCP

Service from the Function Tree.2. Click Query to view the values of the Channel Status and Revertive Mode fields of the

working and protection cross-connections of all the existing SNCP protection groups onthe NE.Regardless of the working or protection cross-connections, the value of the ChannelStatus field should be Normal.

NOTE

If the value of the Channel Status field of a working or protection cross-connection is notNormal, check whether the channel corresponding to this cross-connection is in normal state.Proceed with the protection switching test after rectifying the fault.

3. Right-click the desired protection group and choose Manual to Working or Manual toProtection. Observe the changes in parameter values and determine whether protectionswitching can be performed successfully.When Revertive Mode of the protection group is set to Non-Revertive:l After you choose Manual to Protection from the right-click menu, the protection

switching should be performed successfully and the working cross-connection becomesthe protection cross-connection.

l After you choose Manual to Working from the right-click menu, the protectionswitching should be performed successfully and the protection cross-connectionbecomes the work cross-connection.

When Revertive Mode of the protection group is set to Revertive:l After you choose Manual to Protection from the right-click menu, the protection

switching should be performed successfully and the working cross-connection becomesthe protection cross-connection. After the time specified in the WTR Time (mm:ss)field elapses, the protection cross-connection of the protection group automaticallyrestores to the working cross-connection.

NOTE

When verifying the ODUk SNCP dual-ended switching, pay attention to the following points:

l Ensure that Switching Mode is set to Bidirectional.l Ensure that both Current Channel of the local NE and that of the peer NE are the protection channel.

l If manual or forced protection switching is performed, channel status can be restored only on the NEwhose Switching Type is Near-End.



257

NOTE

If the protection switching fails or an exception occurs in the protection switching process after yourun a manual switching command, check whether the channel corresponding to the working orprotection cross-connection is in normal state, and whether the protection group is in the switchingstate of higher priority, and whether the protection group and the working and protection cross-connections are configured properly. Proceed with the protection switching test after removing thefault.


Management from the Function Tree. In the displayed window, click the SNCP ServiceControl tab.

2. Click Query to view the status of all the existing protection groups on the NE.Regardless of the working or protection cross-connections, the value of the ChannelStatus field should be Normal.

NOTE


3. Click Function to display a drop-down list. Choose Manual to Working or Manual toProtection. Observe the changes in parameter values and determine whether protectionswitching can be performed successfully.When Revertive Mode of the protection group is set to Non-Revertive:l After you choose Manual to Protection from the right-click menu, the protection




switching should be performed successfully and the working cross-connection becomesthe protection cross-connection. After the time specified in the WTR Time(mm:ss)field elapses, the protection cross-connection of the protection group automaticallyrestores to the working cross-connection.

NOTE


l Ensure that Switching Mode is set to Bidirectional.

l Ensure that both Current Channel of the local NE and that of the peer NE are the protection channel.


NOTE




258


See this section to learn how to delete a cross-connection.l Convert a service with SNCP protection into a service with no protection

A service with SNCP protection can be converted into a service with no protection.l WDM cross-connection configuration


l SNCP service controlSee this section to learn how to set the parameters for controlling services with SNCPprotection.

Follow-up Procedure


7.7.2 Testing SNCP SwitchingAfter configuring SNCP protection, you can run a manual switching command to check whetherthe SNCP switching can be performed successfully.

Prerequisite





Web LCT or U2000

Precautions


Procedure on the Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > SNCP Service Control

(SDH) from the Function Tree.



259

2. Click Query to view the values of the Current Status and Revertive Mode fields of theworking and protection cross-connections of all the existing SNCP protection groups onthe NE.Regardless of the working or protection cross-connections, the value of the CurrentStatus field should be Normal.

NOTE

If the value of the Current Status field of a working or protection cross-connection is notNormal, check whether the channel corresponding to this cross-connection is in normal state.Proceed with the protection switching test after rectifying the fault.

3. Right-click the desired protection group and choose Manual to Working channel orManual to Protection channel. Observe the changes in parameter values and determinewhether protection switching can be performed successfully.When Revertive Mode of the protection group is set to Non-Revertive:

l After you choose Manual to Protection Channel from the right-click menu, theprotection switching should be performed successfully and the working cross-connection becomes the protection cross-connection.

l After you choose Manual to Working Channel from the right-click menu, theprotection switching should be performed successfully and the protection cross-connection becomes the work cross-connection.

When Revertive Mode of the protection group is set to Revertive:

l After you choose Manual to Protection Channel from the right-click menu, theprotection switching should be performed successfully and the working cross-connection becomes the protection cross-connection. After the time specified in theWTR Time(mm:ss) field elapses, the protection cross-connection of the protectiongroup automatically restores to the working cross-connection.

NOTE


Procedure on the U20001. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > SNCP Service Control

from the Function Tree.2. Click Query to view the status of all the existing protection groups on the NE.

Regardless of the working or protection cross-connections, the value of the ChannelStatus field should be Normal.

NOTE


3. Click Function to display a drop-down list. Choose Manual to Working or Manual toProtection. Observe the changes in parameter values and determine whether protectionswitching can be performed successfully.When Revertive Mode of the protection group is set to Non-Revertive:



260

l After you choose Manual to Protection from the right-click menu, the protectionswitching should be performed successfully and the working cross-connection becomesthe protection cross-connection.




NOTE





Follow-up Procedure


7.7.3 Testing ODUk SNCP SwitchingAfter configuring ODUk SNCP protection, you can run a manual switching command to checkwhether the ODUk SNCP switching can be performed successfully.

Prerequisite





Web LCT or U2000



261

Procedure on the Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Subwavelength SNCP

Service from the Function Tree.2. Click Query to view the values of the Channel Status and Revertive Mode fields of the

working and protection cross-connections of all the existing SNCP protection groups onthe NE.Regardless of the working or protection cross-connections, the value of the ChannelStatus field should be Normal.

NOTE


3. Right-click the desired protection group and choose Manual to Working or Manual toProtection. Observe the changes in parameter values and determine whether protectionswitching can be performed successfully.When Revertive Mode of the protection group is set to Non-Revertive:l After you choose Manual to Protection from the right-click menu, the protection





NOTE


l Ensure that Switching Mode is set to Bidirectional.

l Ensure that both Current Channel of the local NE and that of the peer NE are the protection channel.


NOTE



Management from the Function Tree. In the displayed window, click the SNCP ServiceControl tab.

2. Click Query to view the status of all the existing protection groups on the NE.



262


NOTE






switching should be performed successfully and the working cross-connection becomesthe protection cross-connection. After the time specified in the WTR Time(mm:ss)field elapses, the protection cross-connection of the protection group automaticallyrestores to the working cross-connection.

NOTE


l Ensure that Switching Mode is set to Bidirectional.l Ensure that both Current Channel of the local NE and that of the peer NE are the protection channel.


NOTE








263

7.7.4 Testing Port Protection SwitchingIn the case of intra-board 1+1 protection, optical line protection, client 1+1 protection, you canrun a manual switching command in a same user interface.

Prerequisite



The working and protection channels of a port protection group on the network must be in normalstate.


Web LCT or U2000

Precautions


Procedure on the Web LCT or U20001. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > SNCP Service Control

from the Function Tree.2. Click Query to view the status of all the existing protection groups on the NE.


NOTE





When Revertive Mode of the protection group is set to Revertive:



264

l After you choose Manual to Protection from the right-click menu, the protectionswitching should be performed successfully and the working cross-connection becomesthe protection cross-connection. After the time specified in the WTR Time (mm:ss)field elapses, the protection cross-connection of the protection group automaticallyrestores to the working cross-connection.

NOTE


Reference Informationl Port protection

See this section to learn how to set the parameters for configuring port protection.


7.7.5 Testing ERPS ProtectionAfter completing configuration, you can verify the Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS)protection by disconnecting involved fibers and then checking the service status on the ringnetwork and alarm information.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NMS user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

The Ethernet ring protection must be configured.


Procedure on the Web LCT or U20001. In the NE Explorer window, click the NE. Select the board to be tested, and choose

Configuration > Ethernet Protection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree.2. In the lower right part of the ERPS Management window, click Query.3. In the query result, check whether Status of State Machine is Idle.4. Disconnect fibers connecting to the IN and OUT optical ports (east ports or west ports) to

trigger ERPS switching.5. In the alarm list, check for the R_LOS alarm reported by the board, and the ERPS switching

event reported by the NE.6. In the ERPS Management window, check whether Status of State Machine is

Protection on the current NE.



265

7. Restore fiber connection. Query the alarm and performance event list. The R_LOS alarmreported by the board should be cleared. After the WTR time expires, the system shouldreport that the ERPS status is Idle.

8. In the ERPS Management window, check whether Status of State Machine is Idle.

Follow-up Procedure


7.8 Querying and Saving the Networkwide Optical Powerand Alarm Data

After commissioning a network, you need to query and save the optical power and alarm dataof the entire network. This type of data can help you analyze and understand the operating statusof the network in future.

Prerequisite

The performance monitoring function must be enabled.

Fiber connections must be established properly and lasers must be enabled.


The U2000 must be used for querying the optical power and alarms of the entire network.

Procedure on the U20001. Query optical power networkwide.

(1) Choose Configuration > Optical Power Management from the Main Menu of theU2000.

(2) Select all the stations from the navigator on the left, click .

(3) Click Query, in the Result dialog box, click Close.

2. Check the optical power on the entire network and ensure that the optical power of all theequipment on the network is proper.

3. Set the current optical power of the entire network to this reference value. This will facilitatefuture maintenance of the network. Click Reset Networkwide Reference Value. TheConfirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.Click Close.

TIP

After all the commissioning and configuration tasks are performed during deployment, the opticalpower of the network obtained at the time when the network starts working is the reference valueindicating the optimal performance of the network.

4. Click Save As. Select the path for saving the optical power report and enter the name forthis report. After that, click Save. At this point, the optical power data of the entire networkis saved on the specified path.



266

5. In the Main Menu, choose Fault > NE Alarm Synchronize. In the displayed NE

Selector dialog box, select ROOT on the left and then click to select all the NEson the subnet.

NOTE

To save all the data of the current alarms, ensure that all the alarms can be displayed properly whensetting alarm filter conditions.

6. Click Save As. Select the path for saving the alarm data and enter the file name. After that,click OK. At this point, the data of the current alarms is saved on the specified path.

Reference Informationl Check optical power of boards

If the obtained optical power is outside of the normal range, see this section to learn howto rectify a problem with abnormal optical power.

l Query current alarms on an NE and remove abnormal alarms

If a query of alarms shows that abnormal alarms are generated at that time on the network,see this section to learn how to handle an abnormal alarm.

Follow-up Procedure


7.9 Backing Up NE Data to the NMS Server or ClientYou can manually back up the data of one or more NEs of the same type to an NMS server orclient.

Prerequisite

The path for saving the backup data and the TFTP/FTP/SFTP server must be configured and theTFTP/FTP/SFTP service must be started.


The U2000 must be used when you back up NE data to an NMS server or client.

PrecautionsNOTE

Observe the following precautions when backing up NE data to an NMS server or client:

l The backup operation can be performed to multiple NEs at the same time if these NEs are of the sametype.

l If you select a node of a certain NE type in the Navigation Tree, the Device View tab page displaysthe information and version information of all the NEs of this type.

l The Backup Information tab page displays the information of the backup file.



267

Procedure on the U20001. Choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Data Backup/Restoration

from the Main Menu.2. Right click the device(s) that you want to backup in the NE View table.

NOTE

The Backup Information tab is unavailable when multiple devices are selected.

3. Select Backup... to open the Backup dialog.4. Select the option NMS Server or NMS Client to backup the selected device information.

NOTE

By default the NMS Server is selected. If the NMS Server is selected, the selected device informationis stored on the NMS server.

5. Optional: If the NMS Client is selected, click to select the location where the devicedata have to be backed up.

6. Click Start to start the backup operation for the selected device(s). On the NE View tabpage, the backup progress is displayed.

7. When the backup operation is successful, the NMS creates the dbf.pkg file in the NEName/yyyymmddhhmmss directory. "NEName" indicates the name of the NE, "yyyymmdd"indicates the date when the backup is created, and "hhmmss" indicates the time when thebackup is created.

Reference Informationl Compare the methods of backing up and restoring NE data

The backup or restored NE database can be saved on the SCC board, NMS server, or NMSclient. Different storage locations determine different backup and restoration methods.

l Restore NE data from the NMS server or clientAfter backing up NE data to the NMS server or client, you can see this section to learn howto restore NE data from the NMS server or client.




268

A Handling Common CommissioningProblems

This chapter describes the methods of analyzing and handling the most common problemshappening in the deployment process. You need to analyze and handle problems according toactual situations.

In the commissioning or configuration phase of deployment, alarms are generally generatedwhen a problem happens. For example, alarms are generated if no service is received on theclient side or if the configuration is incomplete. You need to analyze each alarm reported byequipment to determine which alarms do not reflect abnormal running status and which alarmsindicate running status in the current engineering conditions. Abnormal alarms must be handledproperly in the commissioning or configuration phase of deployment.

Equipment may report various alarms. Different alarms have different causes. This chapterdescribes the common causes of the common alarms and the common methods of handling suchalarms generated during deployment. There may be other causes of such alarms. Thus, analyzeand handle alarms in the commissioning or configuration phase of deployment according toactual situations. For details on how to handle alarms of the OptiX OSN 1800, see the Alarmsand Performance Events Reference.

When reporting an alarm, the NMS also displays the position where the alarm is generated.Determine the slot, board name, and optical port where the alarm is generated according to thedisplayed position information. For example, 1-LDGF2-201(LP1/LP1)-OTU1:1. In the case ofthe LDGF2 board, 201(LP1/LP1) indicates the IN1 and IN2 optical interfaces, and 202(LP2/LP2) indicates the IN3 and IN4 optical interfaces. The digit 1 at the end of the positioninformation indicates the IN1 or IN3 optical port. If the digit is 2, it indicates the IN2 or IN4optical port. That is, 1-LDGF2-201(LP1/LP1)-OTU1:1 indicates that the alarm is generated atthe IN1 optical port on the LDGF2 board in slot 1. The indication of the position informationfor other boards is similar.

A.1 The Receive Optical Power Is Normal But the LDGF Board Reports an OTU1_LOF Alarm

A.2 The Receive Optical Power Is Normal But the LDGF Board Reports a LINK_ERR Alarm

A.3 The Receive Optical Power is Normal But an OTU Board Reports an REM_SF Alarm

A.4 The Optical Path Is Reachable But the NE Cannot Be Logged in Remotely

OptiX OSN 1800 Compact Multi-Service Edge OpticalTransport PlatformCommissioning and Configuration Guide A Handling Common Commissioning Problems


269

A.1 The Receive Optical Power Is Normal But the LDGFBoard Reports an OTU1_LOF Alarm

KeywordsLDGF, OTU1_LOF, LWX2 regeneration board

SymptomThe receive optical power on the WDM side of the LDGF board is normal but the board reportsan OTU1_LOF alarm.

The LDGF board that reports an OTU1_LOF alarm works with the LWX2 regeneration board.Figure A-1 shows the network where the LDGF and LWX2 board are used. The ALS functionof a laser on the LWX2 regeneration board is disabled and all lasers on this board are enabled.As shown in Figure A-1, the optical cable between the two LWX2 regeneration boards isunavailable. That is, the optical path between the two regeneration boards is absent. Thus, thedownstream LWX2 regeneration board reports an R_LOS alarm.

Figure A-1 LDGF board networking mode

LWX2

LWX2

LDGF

LDGF2

IN1

IN1 OUT1

OUT1

Cause AnalysisThe receive optical power on the WDM side of the LDGF board is normal but the board reportsan OTU1_LOF alarm. This indicates that the frame structure of the received optical signals isinvalid or the board is faulty. In general, the probability that the board is faulty is very small.Thus, you can first check whether the received optical signals are normal.

As described previously, the upstream optical path is unavailable, and thus the downstreamLWX2 regeneration board cannot receive valid optical signals. The lasers on the downstreamLWX2 regeneration board, however, are forcibly enabled. Thus, the downstream LWX2regeneration board transmits white light signals that have no frame structure. Thus, althoughoptical power of the optical signals received by the LDGF, the LDGF board reports anOTU1_LOF alarm because the received optical signals have no frame structure.

ProcedureAfter an analysis, this is normal for the LDGF board to an OTU1_LOF alarm in the currentengineering situation. When the optical cable between the two LWX2 regeneration boards is



270

installed and the optical path between them are present, the OTU1_LOF alarm will be clearedautomatically.


None.

A.2 The Receive Optical Power Is Normal But the LDGFBoard Reports a LINK_ERR Alarm

Keywords

LDGF, LINK_ERR

Symptom

The receive optical power on the WDM side of the LDGF board is normal, the ETH port,however, reports the LINK_ERR alarm. No service gains access to the ETH port on the LDGFboard where the alarm is reported.

Cause Analysis

The LINK_ERR alarm indicates that valid links between two data ports fail to be established,however, the receive optical power on the WDM side of the LDGF board is normal and the lineis normal.

No service gains access to the ETH port on the LDGF board, and therefore valid links fail to beestablished and the LINK_ERR alarm is reported.

Procedure

Under the current engineering condition, the situation is normal.

1. If the ETH port on the LDGF board is planned to access services in the network planning,the alarm is cleared automatically after the ETH port accesses services normally.

2. If the ETH port on the LDGF board is not planned to access services in the networkplanning, set the ETH channel to unused so that the channel does not detect the alarms thatare irrelevant with normal network operation.


None.

A.3 The Receive Optical Power is Normal But an OTU BoardReports an REM_SF Alarm



271

KeywordsOTU, REM_SF, client-side service

SymptomAs shown in Figure A-2, the receive optical power of the OTU board is normal but the clientside of the OTU board at station A reports the REM_SF alarm.

Figure A-2 Schematic diagram of the OTU board reporting the REM_SF alarm

OTU

OTU

IN1

IN1 OUT1

OUT1

TX

RX

RX

TX

A B

Cause AnalysisThe REM_SF alarm indicates that the receive signals on the client side of the OTU board at theopposite station fail. At the deployment commissioning phase, no service gains access to theclient side of the OTU board at station B, and therefore the alarm is reported.

ProcedureAfter services gain access to the client side of the OTU board at station B, the alarm is cleared.

Reference InformationNone.

A.4 The Optical Path Is Reachable But the NE Cannot BeLogged in Remotely

KeywordsLDGF2, NE unreachable, remote login

SymptomThe communication between stations A and B is achieved through only the ESC provided bythe LDGF2 board. Because the optical fibers are not connected at the deployment commissioningphase, the optical paths of IN1/OUT1 on the LDGF2 board are unavailable. The optical paths



272

of IN2/OUT2, however, are normal. See Figure A-3. Station B cannot be logged in remotely atstation A.

Figure A-3 Schematic diagram of the network of the LDGF2 board

LDGF2

LDGF2

IN1

IN1 OUT1

OUT1

A B

IN2

IN2 OUT2

OUT2

Cause AnalysisThe LDGF2 board receives ESC overhead bytes through the channels of IN1/OUT1. The opticalpaths of IN1/OUT1 on the LDGF2 board are unavailable. Therefore, the ESC overhead bytesfail to be received, communication between NEs fails to be established, and the NE fails to belogged in remotely.

ProcedureUnder the current engineering condition, establish normal communication routes according tothe network planning:

l Configure intra-board 1+1 protection on the LDGF2 boards at stations A and B respectivelyto establish normal communication between the two stations by using the channels of IN2/OUT2.

l Restore the fiber connections.

Reference InformationIn the case of the OTU boards with the dual fed and selective receiving function, before theprotection is configured, overhead bytes are received through only the channels of IN1/OUT1or IN3/OUT3. If the optical paths of IN1/OUT1 or IN3/OUT3 are unavailable, the ESCcommunication fails even if the optical paths of IN2/OUT2 or IN4/OUT4 are normal. After theprotection is configured, the ESC communication is normal even if only one channel is normal.



273

B Reference Operations for theCommissioning and Configuration

This chapter lists the reference operations for the commissioning and configuration. You canperform proper operations according to the network condition.

B.1 Creating a VLAN GroupThe VLAN group can extend the number of supported VLAN flows. You can follow theprocedure described in this section to create a VLAN group.

B.2 Configuring the Aging Time for MAC AddressesYou can configure the aging time for MAC addresses, to realize the dynamic address agingfunction. If the MAC addresses that do not appear again in the transport network during theaging time, the system considers that no information needs to be sent to these MAC addresses.The MAC addresses are deleted from the MAC address table, so that the MAC address tablecan contain more MAC addresses.

B.3 Configuring Port MirroringYou can configure port mirroring to analyze only packets for mirrored ports. In this way, youcan monitor all mirrored ports. This helps you to manage the ports.

B.4 Obtaining NE IP Addresses at the SiteIn the case of onsite commissioning, if the U2000 or Web LCT is unavailable, you can obtainthe IP address of an NE by running a command directly in the Windows operating system.

B.5 Creating a Single NEAfter the NE is created, you can use the U2000 to manage the NE. Although creating a singleNE is not as fast and exact as creating NEs in batches, you can use this method regardless ofwhether the data is configured on the NE or not. Creating NEs one by one is applicable no matterwhat way of communication an NE adopts. The NEs that use serial ports to communicate do notsupport the NE search function and you must create them one by one.

B.6 Checking the NE Software VersionThis topic describes how to check the NE software version.

B.7 Creating an NE UserTo ensure NE data security, only the users with NE user authority can log in to the NEs. An NEuser is able to perform operations on the NEs according to the assigned authority. The U2000/Web LCT administrator is advised to create NE users before configuring services.

B.8 Switching a Logged-In NE User


B Reference Operations for the Commissioning andConfiguration


274

During a new deployment, after the root/lct NE user creates the NE, this user can create anotherNE user. You can log in to the NE with the new NE user name.

B.9 Modifying the Optical NE NameYou can change the optical NE name at any time as required with no effect on the running ofthe NE.

B.10 Modifying GNE ParametersDuring the network optimization and adjustment, you may need to change the GNE type or thecommunication address.

B.11 Changing the GNE for NEsWhen the number of NEs managed by a certain GNE exceeds a certain number (the number isusually 50 and varies depending on different types of equipment), change the GNE for certainNEs so that the communication between the U2000 and the NEs is not affected.

B.12 Changing a GNE to a Normal NEWhen you adjust the communication link between the GNE and the U2000, you can change theGNE to a normal NE.

B.13 Changing a Normal NE to a GNEWhen you adjust the communication link between the GNE and the U2000, you can change anormal NE to a GNE.

B.14 Deleting NEsIf you have created a wrong NE, you can delete the NE from the U2000. Deleting an NE removesall information of the NE from the U2000 but does not affect the running of the equipment.

B.15 Enabling the Proxy ARPThe address resolution protocol (ARP) helps you to query the MAC address of the destinationequipment using its IP address. If you enable proxy ARP for a gateway NE, the gateway NE cananswer ARP requests for other non-gateway NEs, so that you can set IP addresses of NEs of thesame network in the same network segment.

B.16 Configuring the IP Static Route for an NEWhen dynamic routes fail to meet the planning requirements, create the corresponding static IProutes manually.

B.17 Querying the OSPF Protocol StatusEnable the OSPF protocol so that the routing information on the gateway NE can beautomatically diffused to other NEs.

B.18 Configuring the NE DataThough an NE is successfully created, it is not configured. You need to configure the NE firstso that the U2000 can manage and operate the NE.

B.19 Configuring BoardsIn the NE Panel, you can add a board and set port attributes for the board.

B.20 Adding PortsClient-side ports and line-side ports of some OTU boards support color light and colorless light.You need to add different ports on the U2000 according to the SFP optical module used on theequipment.

B.21 Deleting PortsThis section describes how to delete a port.

B.22 Changing Port Types




275

The client-side and line-side ports of the OTU board in the OptiX OSN 1800 equipment can beconfigured as color ports or grey ports. The port type needs to be set according to type of theoptical modules or electrical SFP modules used in the equipment.

B.23 Configuring the Standard NTP KeyOn the U2000, you can use the standard network time protocol (NTP) service to automaticallysynchronize the NE time with the standard NTP server time. To ensure that a reliable server isaccessed, the NTP authentication function must be started. In this case, you need to set the keyand password, which are authenticated together to check whether the server is reliable.

B.24 Synchronizing the NE Time with the Standard NTP Server TimeYou can use the standard network time protocol (NTP) service to automatically synchronize theNE time with the standard NTP server time.

B.25 Setting Automatic Synchronization of the NE Time with the NMS TimeThis section describes how to set automatic synchronization of the NE time with the NMS time.After you set automatic synchronization of the NE time with the NMS time, the NE time isautomatically synchronized with the NMS time at specified intervals.

B.26 Performance ManagementTo ensure the normal functioning of the network, the network management and maintenancepersonnel should periodically check and monitor the network by taking proper performancemanagement measures.

B.27 Modifying the Services ConfigurationAfter a service is configured, you can modify or delete the configuration data of the servicebased on the following task sets.

B.28 Switching the Working Mode of the LQM2The default working mode of the LQM2 board is 2LQM Mode. When the working mode isswitched to AP8 Mode, you need to configure the board and add the IN2/OUT2 optical portaccording to this section.

B.29 Backing Up and Restoring the NE DataFor the security of the NE data, you can back up and restore the NE data.

B.30 Creating Fiber Connections in List ModeIn Fiber/Cable Management, you can manage the fiber connections between NEs and insideNEs in a unified manner. Compared with the graphic mode, the creating fiber connections in thelist mode is not visual. Hence, the list mode is applicable to the scenario where you create a fewfiber connections only.




276

B.1 Creating a VLAN GroupThe VLAN group can extend the number of supported VLAN flows. You can follow theprocedure described in this section to create a VLAN group.

PrerequisiteNone.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000 or Web LCT

Background InformationThe configuration principles are as follows:l The VLAN group is of port attributes. It is valid only at the service input port. Both the

PORT and VCTRUNK ports can be set as a VLAN group.l The configuration of a VLAN group is based on the C-VLAN.l When you create a VLAN group, if a service is configured for a member VLAN (a non-

initial VLAN in the VLAN group), the VLAN group cannot be created. The servicementioned includes services that involve VLAN configuration, such as EPL service andflow configuration.

l When you create a VLAN group, if a service is configured for the initial VLAN, the VLANgroup can be created, but the service may be transiently interrupted.

l Eight VLAN groups are supported by one port. The eight VLAN groups at the same portmust have different VLAN values.

l After you create the port VLAN group, if the VLAN ID of the services to be created iswithin the VLAN group, the services must be created based on the initial VLAN ID. If theVLAN ID is not within the port VLAN group, the services are unrestricted.

CAUTIONCreating a VLAN group may affect the services.

Procedure on the U2000 or Web LCTStep 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet

Line Service from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the VLAN Group tab.

Step 3 Click New. In the dialog box displayed, configure the VLAN group parameters.l The value of Initial VLAN is in the range of 1 to 4095. The formula is as follows: Initial

VLAN = p x 2n. n is an integer from 0 to 12. p is an integer from 1 to 2m. m + n <= 12.l The formula of VLAN Group Member Count depends on the value of the Initial VLAN.

If the value of Initial VLAN is 1, VLAN Group Member Count = 2n - 1. If the value of




277

Initial VLAN is an integer other than 1, VLAN Group Member Count = 2n. The value ofn is the same as that in the formula of the Initial VLAN.

l For example,

– If the value of n is 0, a VLAN group is actually a single VLAN. The value of VLANGroup Member Count is in the range of 1 to 4095.

– If the value of n is 6 and the value of m is 1, the value of VLAN Group MemberCount is in the range from 64 to 127.

Step 4 Click Apply. A confirmation dialog box is displayed. Click OK. and the configuration iscomplete. The created port VLAN group is displayed in the user interface.

----End

B.2 Configuring the Aging Time for MAC AddressesYou can configure the aging time for MAC addresses, to realize the dynamic address agingfunction. If the MAC addresses that do not appear again in the transport network during theaging time, the system considers that no information needs to be sent to these MAC addresses.The MAC addresses are deleted from the MAC address table, so that the MAC address tablecan contain more MAC addresses.

Prerequisite

None.


U2000 or Web LCT


If the aging time is too long, the MAC address table may save many outdated MAC addressitems. This may use up the resources of the MAC address table. As a result, the MAC addresstable may not be updated according to the change in the network.

If the aging time is too short, the effective MAC address items may be deleted. As a result,packets that are broadcasted cannot find the destination MAC address and the performance ofthe network is affected.

Procedure on the U2000 or Web LCT

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Layer-2 SwitchingManagement > Aging Time from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Double-click MAC Address Aging Time and the MAC Address Aging Time dialog box isdisplayed. Enter the value of the aging time.

NOTE

MAC Address Aging Time supports three time units, including minute, hour, and day. The value rangesfrom 1 to 120.

When the unit of the MAC Address Aging Time is set to day, the valid range is 1-12.




278

Step 3 Click OK and then click Apply.

----End

B.3 Configuring Port MirroringYou can configure port mirroring to analyze only packets for mirrored ports. In this way, youcan monitor all mirrored ports. This helps you to manage the ports.

PrerequisiteThe mirror listener port should contain no Ethernet service, and has not be aggregated.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000 or Web LCT

PrecautionsNOTE

A mirror listener port cannot be configured with any service.The concatenation port mirroring function is not supported. For example, if VCTRUNK2 port is configuredto listen to VCTRUNK1 port, you cannot configure any other ports to listen to VCTRUNK2 port.

Procedure on the U2000 or Web LCTStep 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface

Management > Port Mirroring from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Optional: Click Query to query the status of port mirroring that you configure.

Step 3 Click New and the Port Mirror Management window is displayed.

Step 4 Set Mirror Listener Port, Uplink Listened Port, and Downlink Listened Port.NOTE

l You can set Uplink Listened Port or Downlink Listened Port, and the two ports cannot be set at thesame time.

l Do not select a port where services exist from the Mirror Listener Port drop-down list. Otherwise,creating port mirroring fails.

Step 5 Click OK.

----End

B.4 Obtaining NE IP Addresses at the SiteIn the case of onsite commissioning, if the U2000 or Web LCT is unavailable, you can obtainthe IP address of an NE by running a command directly in the Windows operating system.

PrerequisiteThe NMS computer must run on Windows and must be connected to the NE directly by usingan Ethernet cable.




279


None.

Procedure

Step 1 Set the IP address of the NMS computer to ensure that the NMS computer is located on the 129.9network segment. For example, set the IP address to 129.9.0.254.

Step 2 On the Windows, choose Start > Run and then enter cmd in the command line interface to enterthe DOS system. In the DOS system, enter ping 129.9.255.255.

Step 3 When the timeout response is complete, enter arp -a.

Step 4 The IP address of the NE is displayed in the Internet Address column.

----End

B.5 Creating a Single NEAfter the NE is created, you can use the U2000 to manage the NE. Although creating a singleNE is not as fast and exact as creating NEs in batches, you can use this method regardless ofwhether the data is configured on the NE or not. Creating NEs one by one is applicable no matterwhat way of communication an NE adopts. The NEs that use serial ports to communicate do notsupport the NE search function and you must create them one by one.

Prerequisite

l You must be an NM user with "NM operator" authority or higher.

l The NE Explorer instance of the NEs must be created.

Tools, Equipment and Materials

U2000 or Web LCT




280

Background InformationFor U2000:l First create a GNE, and then create a non-gateway NE.l If the NE is not created properly or the communication between the NE and the U2000 is

abnormal, the NE is displayed in gray color.

Procedure on the U20001. Right-click in the blank space of the Main Topology and choose New > NE... from the

shortcut menu. The Create NE dialog box is displayed.2. Select required NE from tree structure at left hand pane.3. Complete the following information: ID, Extended ID, Name and Remarks.4. To create a GNE, proceed to 5. To create a non-gateway NE, proceed to 6.5. Select Gateway from the Gateway Type drop-down list and set the IP address.6. Select Non-Gateway from the Gateway Type drop-down list. Select the GNE to which

this NE is associated, from the Gateway drop-down list.7. Select the optical NE in Associated ONE to which the WDM NE is associated.8. Enter the NE User and Password.

NOTEThe default NE user is root, and the default password is password.

9. Click OK, the cursor is displayed as "+", click on the blank space of the physical view andthe NE is created.

ResultAfter an NE is successfully created, the system automatically saves the information, such as theIP address, subnet mask, and NE ID to the U2000 database.

Procedure on the Web LCT1. Click Add NE in the NE list. The Add NE dialog box is displayed.2. Set the NE Type to Europe, enter the NE ID and Extended ID.3. Select Gateway Type and set related parameters.

l If the gateway type is IP Gateway, set IP Address and Port.l If the gateway type is Serial Port, set Port and Baud Rate.l If the gateway type is SSL Gateway, set IP Address and Port.

4. Enter the User Name and the Password.

NOTE

The default user name is lct and the default password is password.

5. Click OK. One entry is added in the NE list. Usually the NE communicates normally andis in the Logged In state.

PostrequisiteAfter an NE is created, if you fail to log in to the NE, possible causes are listed as follows:




281

l The communication between the U2000 and the NE is abnormal. Check the settings ofcommunication parameters, such as the IP address of the NE and NE ID.

l The password for the NE user is incorrect. Enter the correct password for the NE user.l The NE user is invalid or the NE user is already logged in. Change to use a valid NE user.

B.6 Checking the NE Software VersionThis topic describes how to check the NE software version.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment and MaterialsU2000 or Web LCT

Background InformationThe NE software version refers to the version of the SCC board of the NE.

NOTE

The SCC board refers to the system control and communication unit. The SCC board interoperates withthe U2000 to manage the boards of the equipment and realize the communication between the equipment.

Procedure on the U20001. In the main topology, double-click the desired NE. The NE panel is displayed.2. In the Slot Layout, Right-click the SCC board and then choose SCC Version from the

shortcut menu.3. In the Information dialog box, view the NE software version.4. Click OK.

Procedure on the Web LCT1. In the Slot Layout, Right-click the SCC board and then choose SCC Version from the

shortcut menu.2. In the dialog box, view the NE software version.3. Click OK.

B.7 Creating an NE UserTo ensure NE data security, only the users with NE user authority can log in to the NEs. An NEuser is able to perform operations on the NEs according to the assigned authority. The U2000/Web LCT administrator is advised to create NE users before configuring services.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "NE administrator" authority or higher.




282

l You must log in the NE to create an NE user.


U2000 or Web LCT

Background InformationThe default NE user has the monitor level authority. To ensure NE data security, it isrecommended that you assign NE users with different authorities as required.

Procedure on the U2000

Step 1 Choose Administration > NE Security Management > NE User Management from the MainMenu.

Step 2 In the NE list on the left, select an NE and click . The Result dialog box is displayed,indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

Step 3 Click Add and the Add NE User dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Enter the NE user name in the NE User field.

NOTE

The NE user name must contain letters, or it can be a combination of letters, symbols and numerals. TheNE user name contains at least 4, but not more than 16 characters.

Step 5 Select the User Level as needed.

Step 6 In the NE User Flag field, select a user type according to the type of the terminal through whichthe user logs in to the NE.

Step 7 Enter the password in the New Password field and enter it again in the Confirm Passwordfield.

NOTE

The password is a string of 6-16 characters. It can consist of letters, symbols and numerals, and must containat least one letter and one numeral.

Step 8 In the NE Name field, select the NEs that this NE user is allowed to manage.

Step 9 Click OK.

Step 10 Click Query, and the Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. All created users of the NEare displayed in NE User Management Table.

----End

Procedure on the Web LCT

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Security > NE User Management from theFunction Tree.

Step 2 Click Create and the Add NE User dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Enter the NE user name in the NE User field.




283

Step 4 Select the User Level as needed.

Step 5 Enter the password in the New Password field and enter it again in the Confirm Passwordfield.

NOTE

You also need to set the Whether the password is allowed to be modified immediately parameter.

The password is a string of 6-16 characters. It can consist of letters, symbols and numerals, and must containat least one letter and one numeral.

Step 6 Click OK.

Step 7 Click Query, and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. All created usersof the NE are displayed in NE User Management Table.

----End

B.8 Switching a Logged-In NE UserDuring a new deployment, after the root/lct NE user creates the NE, this user can create anotherNE user. You can log in to the NE with the new NE user name.

Prerequisite

l You must be an NM user with "NE administrator" authority or higher.l The NE user must be created.


An NE user cannot log in to or manage an NE at the same time. After you use an NE user to login to an NE through a U2000/Web LCT server, if you use the same NE user to log in to the sameNE through another U2000/Web LCT server, the NE user is forced to log out from the firstU2000/Web LCT server.


U2000 or Web LCT

Procedure on the U20001. Choose Administration > NE Security Management > NE Login Management from

the Main Menu, click the NE Login Management tab.

2. Select the required NE from the NE list, and click .

NOTE

When this button is used for the first time, or the configuration data is changed, or the selected object onthe Object Tree on the left is changed, this button becomes in a red frame.

3. Click Query to query the current NE user.4. In the NE Login Management Table, select the NE and click Switch NE User. In the

Switch Current NE User dialog box, enter User and Password, and set OfflineSwitching.




284

NOTE

If Offline Switching is selected, the system does not check the user name and password, and thuslater login of the NE may fail, which causes the NE unreachable by the NMS. Therefore, it isrecommended not to select Offline Switching.

5. Click OK.

Procedure on the Web LCT1. In the NE List, select one or more NEs that are logged in and click NE Logout. The NE

status becomes Not Logged In.2. Click NE Login. The NE Login dialog box is displayed.3. Enter the User Name and the Password.4. Click OK. In the NE List, the Login Status changes to Logged In.

B.9 Modifying the Optical NE NameYou can change the optical NE name at any time as required with no effect on the running ofthe NE.


Tools, Equipment and MaterialsU2000

Procedure1. Right-click an NE on the Main Topology and choose Object Attributes from the shortcut

menu. The Attribute dialog box is displayed.2. In the NE Attribute tab, enter the new optical NE name and click OK.3. After the optical NE name is changed successfully, the optical NE is displayed by the new

name on the Main Topology.NOTE

An NE name can contain a maximum of 64 letters, symbols, and numerals, but cannot contain thefollowing special characters: | : * ? " < >.

B.10 Modifying GNE ParametersDuring the network optimization and adjustment, you may need to change the GNE type or thecommunication address.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher.





285

Precautions

CAUTIONThis is a potential service affecting operation. Specifically, it may interrupt the communicationbetween a GNE and the U2000, and the communication between the GNE and the non-gatewayNEs that are managed by the GNE.

NOTE

l It is not recommended to change the Port No..

l In the case of IP GNE, make sure that the IP address of the GNE is in the same network segment asthe IP address of the U2000. When the U2000 server and the GNE are in different network segments,you need to set the network port attributes of the router through which the U2000 server and the GNEare connected. In this way, the U2000 can log in to the GNE.

Procedure on the U20001. Choose Administration > DCN Management from the Main Menu.2. Close the displayed Filter NE dialog box. Click the GNE tab.3. Select the GNE to be modified in the displayed Filter GNE dialog box. The NE is shown

in list of GNE tab.4. Select the NE in the list, right-click and choose Modify GNE from the shortcut menu.5. In the Modify GNE dialog box displayed, set the parameters.6. Click OK. In the Warning dialog box that is displayed, click OK.

B.11 Changing the GNE for NEsWhen the number of NEs managed by a certain GNE exceeds a certain number (the number isusually 50 and varies depending on different types of equipment), change the GNE for certainNEs so that the communication between the U2000 and the NEs is not affected.



U2000

Precautions

CAUTIONThis operation may interrupt the NE communication.




286

Procedure1. In the Main Topology view, choose Administration > DCN Management from the Main

Menu.

2. Select an NE to be modified in the displayed Filter NE dialog box. The NE is shown inthe list of the NE tab.

3. Select the NE in the list. Double-click the Primary GNE1 field and select a GNE.

4. Click OK.

5. Click Refresh in the list window.

B.12 Changing a GNE to a Normal NEWhen you adjust the communication link between the GNE and the U2000, you can change theGNE to a normal NE.



U2000

Precaution

CAUTIONThis operation may interrupt the service.

Procedure1. In the Main Topology view, choose Administration > DCN Management from the main

menu.

2. Close the displayed Filter NE dialog box. Click the GNE tab.

3. Select the GNE to be modified in the displayed Filter NE dialog box. The NE is shown inlist of GNE tab.

4. Right-click the GNE that you want to change in the list, and choose Delete GNE from theshortcut menu. Click OK in the Confirm and Reconfirm dialog box. Click Close in theResult dialog box.

Follow-up ProcedureAfter changing the GNE to a normal NE, modify the attributes of the NE that uses the GNE andselect another GNE.




287

B.13 Changing a Normal NE to a GNEWhen you adjust the communication link between the GNE and the U2000, you can change anormal NE to a GNE.



Procedure1. In the Main Topology view, choose Administration > DCN Management from the main

menu.2. Select an NE to be modified in the displayed Filter NE dialog box. The NE is shown in

the list of the NE tab.3. Select the NE in the list, Right-click a normal NE under the NE Name field and choose

Change to GNE from the shortcut menu.4. In the Change to GNE dialog box, select the Gateway Type, and enter the IP Address or

NSAP Address.5. Click OK. Click OK in the Warning dialog box. Click Close in the Result dialog box.

NOTE

The NE is now changed to a GNE and appears in the GNE tab.

B.14 Deleting NEsIf you have created a wrong NE, you can delete the NE from the U2000. Deleting an NE removesall information of the NE from the U2000 but does not affect the running of the equipment.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "NM maintainer" authority or higher.

Fibers and cables connected to the NE must be deleted.


Background InformationWhen the NE is not logged in, you can delete the NE on the U2000.

Procedure on the U20001. Delete a single WDM NE.




288

(1) Choose an optical NE in the Main Topology. Right-click the NE in the left pane andthen choose Delete from the shortcut menu.

(2) In the Confirm dialog box that is displayed, click Yes.2. Delete NEs in batches.

(1) Choose Configuration > NE Configuration Data Management from the MainMenu. The NE Configuration Data Management window is displayed.

(2) In the left-hand pane, select multiple NEs and click . The Configuration DataManagement List pane displays the configuration data of all the selected NEs.

(3) Select the NEs to be deleted, right-click and choose Delete from the shortcut menu.The Delete the NE dialog box is displayed.

(4) Click OK.

Procedure on the Web LCT1. In the NE List, select the NE you wish to delete, and click Delete NE.2. Click OK.

B.15 Enabling the Proxy ARPThe address resolution protocol (ARP) helps you to query the MAC address of the destinationequipment using its IP address. If you enable proxy ARP for a gateway NE, the gateway NE cananswer ARP requests for other non-gateway NEs, so that you can set IP addresses of NEs of thesame network in the same network segment.


Background InformationWhen the U2000 and the gateway NE are directly connected through LAN and the IP addressesof the U2000 and the gateway NE are in the same network segment, when the remote NEsconnect to the gateway NE through fibers, and when the IP addresses of the remote NEs, thegateway NE, and the U2000 are in the same subnet, there are requirements that the U2000accesses the NEs on the entire network through the gateway NE and the upper layer applicationrequirement of accessing remote NEs based on the IP network layer. To meet the upper layerapplication requirement of accessing remote NEs based on the IP network layer, you need toenable the proxy ARP of the gateway NE.

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE. Choose Communication > IP Stack ProtocolManagement from the Function Tree. Click the Proxy ARP tab.

Step 2 Optional: Click Query.

Step 3 Click Value and select Disabled or Enabled from the drop-down list.

Step 4 Click Apply. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.

----End




289

Follow-up Procedure

After you enable proxy ARP, you need to create a static route for each NE.

B.16 Configuring the IP Static Route for an NEWhen dynamic routes fail to meet the planning requirements, create the corresponding static IProutes manually.

Prerequisite

You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

The user must log in to the NE.

Procedure

Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP StackProtocol Management from the Function Tree. Click the IP Route Management tab.

Step 2 Click New. The system displays the Create an IP Route dialog box.

Step 3 Set the parameters of the static IP route.

Step 4 Click OK.

----End

Parameters

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Destination Address - - You can set thisparameter to an IPaddress or an IPaddress range.

Subnet Mask - - This parameterspecifies the subnetmask of the setDestinationAddress.




290

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Gateway - - This parameterspecifies the IPaddress of thegateway to which theset DestinationAddresscorresponds, that is,the next-hop address.

NOTE

The created static route has a lower priority than a dynamic route.

B.17 Querying the OSPF Protocol StatusEnable the OSPF protocol so that the routing information on the gateway NE can beautomatically diffused to other NEs.


Background InformationThe OSPF protocol is enabled by default.

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE. Choose Communication > IP Stack ProtocolManagement from the Function Tree. Click the OSPF Parameter Settings tab.

Step 2 Click Query to check if the OSPF protocol status is normal.

----End

Follow-up ProcedureIf the OSPF protocol is incorrect, please contact Huawei engineers to adjust the OSPF protocolparameters used by the NEs.

B.18 Configuring the NE DataThough an NE is successfully created, it is not configured. You need to configure the NE firstso that the U2000 can manage and operate the NE.

B.18.1 Configuring the NE Data ManuallyBy configuring NE data manually, you can configure the board slot information of an NE.




291

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "NM operator" authority or higher.l The NE must be created successfully.


Procedure on the U20001. Double-click the optical NE with unconfigured NE on the Main Topology. Then, double-

click the unconfigured NE in the left-hand pane and the NE Configuration Wizard dialogbox is displayed.

2. Select Manual Configuration and click Next. The Confirm dialog box is displayed,indicating that manual configuration clears the data on the NE side.

3. Click OK. The Confirm dialog box is displayed, indicating that manual configurationinterrupts the service on the NE.

4. Click OK. The Set NE Attribute dialog box is displayed.5. Optional: If you need to modify the NE Attribute, set NE Name, Equipment Type, NE

Remarks, Shelf Type, and and so on.6. Click Next, and the NE slot window is displayed.7. Optional: Click Query Logical Information to query the logical boards of the NE.8. Optional: Click Query Physical Information to query the physical boards of the NE.9. Optional: Right-click on the slot to add a board.10. Click Next to display the Send Configuration window.11. Select Verify and Run as required and click Finish.

NOTEVerification involves running the verification command. Click Finish to deliver the configuration tothe NE and complete the basic configurations for the NE. After the verification is successful, the NEstarts to work normally.

12. On the Main Topology, double-click the optical NE where the NE configured previouslyis located. select the NE in the left pane of the window to view the board information ofthe NE. If the configured board information of the NE is displayed in the right pane, itindicates that the NE is configured successfully.

B.18.2 Uploading the NE DataBy uploading the NE data, you can synchronize the current NE configuration data to the networkmanagement system directly.


The NE must be created successfully.





292

Procedure1. In the Main Menu, choose Configuration > NE Configuration Data Management.

2. In the left topology tree, select a created NE and click . In Configuration DataManagement List, select an NE whose NE Status is Unconfigured.

3. Click Upload. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK to start the upload.4. When the upload is complete, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click

Close.

B.19 Configuring BoardsIn the NE Panel, you can add a board and set port attributes for the board.

B.19.1 Adding BoardsWhen manually configuring the NE data, you need to add boards on the NE Panel/Slot Layout.

Prerequisitel For U2000, You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.l The NE must be created.l There must be idle slot on the NE Panel Slot Layout.


Background InformationThe physical boards are the actual boards inserted in the shelf. A logical board refers to a boardthat is created on the U2000 or Web LCT. After a logical board is created, you can configurethe relevant services. If the corresponding physical board is online, the configured services canbe available.

Procedure on the U20001. In the Main topology, double-click the icon of the NE to open the NE Panel.2. Select the NE to be added in the left pane on the NE Panel after performing the preceding

operation and choose the desire shelf.3. Right-click the selected idle slot. Select the board you want to add from the list.

Procedure on the Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, click Slot Layout.2. Select the shelf, right-click the selected idle slot. Select the board you want to add from the

list.

NOTE

For Web LCT, click Add Physical Boards. All the slots in which physical boards are configured,and the system automatically creates corresponding logical boards.




293

B.19.2 Deleting BoardsTo modify the network configuration or the NE configuration, you may need to delete the boardsfrom the NE Panel or Slot Layout.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher.

l The services and protection groups must be deleted.


U2000 or Web LCT

Procedure on the U20001. Double-click the icon of the NE to open the NE Panel and choose the desire subrack.

2. Right-click the board you want to delete and choose Delete from the shortcut menu.

NOTE

When you delete the board, the inactive single-station optical cross-connections are also deleted.

3. Click OK in the Delete Board dialog box.

4. Click OK to delete the board.

Procedure on the Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, click Slot Layout. Click required subrack on which board you want

to delete is present.

2. Right-click the board you want to delete and choose Delete from the shortcut menu.

NOTE

When you delete the board, the inactive single-station optical cross-connections are also deleted.

B.20 Adding PortsClient-side ports and line-side ports of some OTU boards support color light and colorless light.You need to add different ports on the U2000 according to the SFP optical module used on theequipment.

Prerequisite


There are client-side ports or line-side ports that are not added on the U2000.


Web LCT or U2000




294

ContextBy default, each board is added with client side ports. To add ports, you need to delete the clientside ports that are added by default on the U2000.

Procedure on the U2000 or Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, right-click the board and then choose Path View.2. Right-click a blank space on the right of the Path View window, and then choose Add

Port. The Add Port dialog box is displayed.3. Select the port and port type. Click OK.

B.21 Deleting PortsThis section describes how to delete a port.


No service or protection has been configured at the port to be deleted.


Procedure on the U2000 or Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, right-click a desired board, and then choose Path View.2. Select a port that you want to delete, right-click the port, and choose Delete Port.

B.22 Changing Port TypesThe client-side and line-side ports of the OTU board in the OptiX OSN 1800 equipment can beconfigured as color ports or grey ports. The port type needs to be set according to type of theoptical modules or electrical SFP modules used in the equipment.


No service or protection has been configured at the port whose type is to be changed.


Procedure on the U2000 or Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, right-click a desired board, and then choose Path View.




295

2. Select a port whose type you want change, right-click the port, and choose Modify Portfrom the shortcut menu. The Modify Port dialog box is displayed, and set Type to thedesired port type.

NOTE

If you need to modify the client-side port to Electrical Port, you must first delete the port, and then addthe port. Otherwise the port cannot be modified successfully.

3. In the displayed dialog box, select a new port type and click OK.4. Optional: In Path View, right-click the desired port, and click Delete Port.5. Optional: In Path View, right-click a blank space and select Add Port. In the Add Port

dialog box displayed, set the Type of the port. Click OK to apply the configuration.

B.23 Configuring the Standard NTP KeyOn the U2000, you can use the standard network time protocol (NTP) service to automaticallysynchronize the NE time with the standard NTP server time. To ensure that a reliable server isaccessed, the NTP authentication function must be started. In this case, you need to set the keyand password, which are authenticated together to check whether the server is reliable.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.l The NE must support the standard NTP synchronization mode.


ContextThe NTP authentication of the NE must be the same as the standard NTP server. If the standardNTP server is configured with a key for authentication, the key of the NE must be the same asthe key of the server.

Procedure1. In the Main Topology view, choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE

Time Synchronization from the main menu. Click Standard NTP Key Management tab.

2. In the Object Tree, select one or more NEs and click .3. Click Close on the Result dialog box.4. Click Add and the Add Key and Password dialog box is displayed.5. Select the NE in the NE List pane, set Key ID and Password, and set Trusted to Yes.

Then, click Apply.6. In the Result dialog box displayed, click Close.




296

B.24 Synchronizing the NE Time with the Standard NTPServer Time

You can use the standard network time protocol (NTP) service to automatically synchronize theNE time with the standard NTP server time.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

l The key and password of an NE must be set by using the standard NTP key managementfunction.

l The NE must support the standard NTP synchronization mode.


U2000

ContextAfter you change the value of Synchronous Mode from NULL to Standard NTP, when themodification is delivered to the NE, the time synchronization may be successful though theencryption key is incorrect.

Procedure1. In the Main Topology view, choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE

Time Synchronization from the main menu.

2. In the Object Tree, select an NE and click the .

3. In the NE Time Synchronization tab, set the Synchronous Mode to Standard NTP.

4. Set the Standard NTP Authentication to Enabled.

5. Click Apply.

6. In the displayed Result dialog box, click Close.

7. In the pane at the bottom of the window, right-click, and then choose New from the shortcutmenu to create a standard NTP server.

l If the Standard NTP Server Identifier is set to NE ID, enter the NE ID of the standardNTP server and Standard NTP Server Key.

l If the Standard NTP Server Identifier is set to IP, enter the IP address of the standardNTP server and the Standard NTP Server Key.

8. Click Apply to synchronize the NE time.

9. In the Result dialog box displayed, click Close.

10. Click Query. Make sure that the parameter values of the NTP server are the same as theones set previously.




297

B.25 Setting Automatic Synchronization of the NE Timewith the NMS Time

This section describes how to set automatic synchronization of the NE time with the NMS time.After you set automatic synchronization of the NE time with the NMS time, the NE time isautomatically synchronized with the NMS time at specified intervals.

Prerequisitel You must have logged in to an NE.

l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

l The NTP service must not be configured for the U2000 and NEs.


Web LCT or U2000

Procedure on the U20001. In the NE Explorer, select the NE. Choose Configuration > NE Time Synchronization

from the Function Tree. The Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

2. Set Synchronous Mode to NM, and click Apply. The Result dialog box is displayed. ClickClose.

3. Set Start Time and Period (days), and then click Apply. The Auto-SynchronizationSettings dialog box is displayed. Click Yes.

NOTE

Start Time cannot be earlier than the current time.

4. The Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close

Procedure on the Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE. Choose Configuration > NE Time Synchronization


2. Set Synchronous Mode to NM and then click Apply.

3. Set Start Time and Period (days), and then click Apply.

NOTE

Start Time cannot be earlier than the current time.

B.26 Performance ManagementTo ensure the normal functioning of the network, the network management and maintenancepersonnel should periodically check and monitor the network by taking proper performancemanagement measures.




298

B.26.1 Setting the Board Performance ThresholdThe NE reports an event when it detects that a performance value exceeds the specified threshold.According to the requirement, you can set different performance thresholds for a board. On theU2000, if you have already created a performance threshold template, you can set performancethresholds for one or more boards at the same time.



Procedure on the U2000 or Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, select a related board and choose Performance > Performance

Threshold.2. In the Monitor Object pane, select the desired board, port, or channel.3. Set performance thresholds according to the requirement.

NOTE

On the U2000, if you have already created a performance threshold template for the boards, clickUse Template and select the desired template. Click Open.

4. Optional: Click Default to restore the default settings.5. Click Apply.6. Click Query. Confirm that the value of Threshold value is the same as the value that is

set.

B.26.2 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of a BoardYou can set the monitoring status and the automatic reporting status of monitored objects. TheU2000/Web LCT monitors all the performance of board, but the automatic reporting feature isdisabled by default. You can modify the value of the attribute according to the requirement.



Procedure on the U2000 or Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Performance > Performance Monitor

Status from the Function Tree.2. Select a condition from the Monitored Object Filter Criteria drop-down list.3. Set the Monitor Status, 15-Minute Auto-Report and 24-Hour Auto-Report. Click

Apply.




299

4. In the Result dialog box displayed, click Close.5. Click Query. The displayed results are the same as the values that are set.

B.26.3 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NEBy setting performance monitoring parameters of an NE properly and starting the performancemonitoring for the NE, you can obtain the detailed performance record during the running ofthe NE. This facilitates the monitoring and analysis of the NE running status performed bymaintenance personnel.


The NE time must be synchronized with the U2000/Web LCT server time.


Procedure on the U20001. In the Main Topology view, choose Performance > Set NE Performance Monitoring

Time from the Main Menu.

2. Select NEs from the NE list. Click .3. Select one or more NEs, and set 15-minute and 24-hour performance monitor parameters

according to the requirement.

(1) Select Enabled.(2) Set the start time and date.(3) Optional: Select To: check box, set the end time and date.

NOTE

l The start time must be later than the current time of the network management system and the end timemust be later than the start time.

l If the end time is not set, this indicates that the performance monitoring starts from the start time anddoes not stop.

4. Click Apply and then click Close in the Result dialog box.

Procedure on the Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Performance > NE Performance Monitor

Time from the Function Tree.2. Set 15-minute and 24-hour performance monitor parameters as required. Click Apply.3. Click Query. The displayed results are the same as the values that are set.4. When the NE time is later than the monitoring time that is set, you can query the 15-minute

and 24-hour performance monitoring of an NE normally.

B.26.4 Resetting Board Performance RegistersAfter a network test or fault recovery but before the official operation, you need to reset theperformance register so that the system enters a new performance monitoring period.




300



U2000 or Web LCT

Procedure on the U20001. In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Performance > Reset Board Performance

Register from the Function Tree.

2. Select the ports and registers that you want to reset and click Reset.

3. Click OK in the Confirm dialog box. A prompt appears indicating that the operation issuccessful.

4. Click Close.

Procedure on the Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Performance > Reset Board Performance

Register from the Function Tree.

2. Select the registers that you want to reset.

3. Click Reset and the confirmation dialog box is displayed.

NOTE

All registers supported by the NE are provided as options for setting the register.

4. Click OK.

B.27 Modifying the Services ConfigurationAfter a service is configured, you can modify or delete the configuration data of the servicebased on the following task sets.

B.27.1 Activating Cross-ConnectionsDo as follows to apply cross-connections to a board.

Prerequisite


The cross-connections must be created and inactive.


U2000




301


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Managementfrom the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab.

Step 3 Optional: Click Query to query the services on the NE. The Working cross-connection listdisplays all the created cross-connections.

Step 4 Select one or more cross-connections in Inactive state (you can press Ctrl or Shift to selectmultiple cross-connections at the same time), right click and choose Activate. Then, theConfirm dialog box is displayed.

Step 5 Click OK. The Result dialog box is displayed telling you that the operation was successful.

Step 6 Click Close. In WDM Cross-Connection Configuration, Activation Status of the selectedcross-connection(s) changes from Inactive to Active.

----End

B.27.2 Deactivating Cross-Connection ServiceTo release the occupied channel resources, you need to deactivate cross-connections and thendelete the cross-connections.



Precautions

CAUTIONThe deactivation operation may interrupt services.



Step 2 Click the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab.

Step 3 Optional: Click Query to query the services on the NE. The Working cross-connection listdisplays all the created cross-connections.

Step 4 Select one or more cross-connections in Active state (you can press Ctrl or Shift to selectmultiple cross-connections at the same time), click Deactivate. Then, the Confirm dialog boxis displayed.




302

Step 5 Click OK. The Result dialog box is displayed telling you that the operation was successful.

Step 6 Click Close. In WDM Cross-Connection Configuration, Activation Status of the selectedcross-connection(s) changes from Active to Inactive.

----End

B.27.3 Deleting Cross-ConnectionsWhen you need to modify or re-configure cross-connections, you need to first delete them.


The cross-connections must be created and inactive.


Precautions

CAUTIONDeleting cross-connections may interrupt services.



Step 2 Click the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab. Click Query to query the informationabout the existing cross-connections.

Step 3 Optional: Select the cross-connections to be deleted and click Deactivate.

Step 4 Select the cross-connections to be deleted and click Delete.

Step 5 In the Confirm dialog box that is displayed for two times, click OK and then click Close. Inthe Result dialog box.

----End


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-ConnectionService Management from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab. Click Query to query theinformation about the existing cross-connections.

Step 3 Optional: Select the cross-connections to be deleted and click Deactivate.




303

Step 4 Select the cross-connections to be deleted and click Delete.

----End

B.27.4 Converting an Unprotected Service to an SNCP ServiceSNCP protection provides the dual fed and selective receiving function and protection for cross-subnet services. You can convert an unprotected service to an SNCP-protected service (SNCPservice for short) as required to improve service reliability.

Prerequisite


A normal service must be created.

When you convert a normal cross-connection service to an SNCP service, the protection pathmust be idle.


U2000 or Web LCT



Step 2 Select the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab, click Query to query the services onthe NE.

Step 3 Right-click the normal cross-connection service to be converted and choose Convert to SNCPService from the shortcut menu.

NOTE

Only unidirectional services can be converted to SNCP Service.

Step 4 In the Covert to SNCP Service dialog box displayed, configure the protection service. Enterthe attributes for the protection service and click OK to convert the normal service to an SNCPservice, and the protection service route is created.

NOTE

You need to perform the operation on the source and sink NEs of the service or the NE that is set as a dualfed or selective receiving node that crosses protection subnets.

Step 5 Click New. In the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box, create a unidirectional cross-connection from the sink board to the protection board.

NOTE


Step 6 On the intermediate NE that protection services pass through, configure bidirectional pass-through services between line boards.




304

NOTE

You need to perform this operation on all the intermediate NEs that protection services pass through.

----End



Step 2 Select the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab, click Query to query the serviceson the NE.

Step 3 Right-click the normal cross-connection service to be converted and choose To SNCP from theshortcut menu.

NOTE

Only unidirectional services can be converted to SNCP Service.

Step 4 In the To SNCP dialog box displayed, configure the protection service. Enter the attributes forthe protection service and click OK to convert the normal service to an SNCP service, and theprotection service route is created.

NOTE


Step 5 Click New. In the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box, create a unidirectional cross-connection from the sink board to the protection board.

NOTE


Step 6 On the intermediate NE that protection services pass through, configure bidirectional pass-through services between line boards.

NOTE


----End

B.27.5 Converting an SNCP Service to an Unprotected ServiceSNCP protection provides the dual fed and selective receiving function and protection for cross-subnet services. You can convert an SNCP-protected service (SNCP service for short) to anunprotected service as required to release the channel that has been occupied by the SNCPservice.

Prerequisite


An SNCP service must be created.




305


U2000 or Web LCT

Precaution

CAUTIONConverting an SNCP service to an unprotected service may interrupt the service.



Step 2 Select the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab, click Query to query services of theNE.

Step 3 Right-click on the desired SNCP service and choose SNCP Working Service Convert to Non-Protection Service from the shortcut menu. In the prompt dialog box, click OK. In theResult dialog box, click Close. The protection service is deleted automatically, but you need tomanually delete the cross-connection from the sink board to the protection board.

NOTE

You can also choose SNCP Protection Service Convert to Non-Protection Service from the shortcutmenu. In this case, the working service is deleted automatically, but you need to manually delete theunidirectional cross-connection from the sink board to the working board.

Only unidirectional SNCP services can be converted to unprotected services.

Step 4 Right-click the unidirectional cross-connection from the sink board to the protection board, andchoose Deactivate from the shortcut menu. In the Confirm dialog box subsequently, clickOK. In the Result dialog box, click Close.

Step 5 Right-click the unidirectional cross-connection that you deactivated and choose Delete from theshortcut menu. In the Confirm dialog box subsequently, click OK. In the Result dialog box,click Close.

NOTE


Step 6 On the intermediate NE that protection services pass through, delete bidirectional pass-throughservices between line boards.

NOTE


When choose SNCP Protection Service Convert to Non-Protection Service, you need to perform thisoperation on all the intermediate NEs that normal services pass through.

----End




306



Step 2 Select the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab, click Query to query services ofthe NE.

Step 3 Right-click on the desired SNCP service and choose SNCP Working Service Convert to Non-Protection Service from the shortcut menu. In the prompt dialog box, click OK. The protectionservice is deleted automatically, but you need to manually delete the cross-connection from thesink board to the protection board.

NOTE

You can also choose SNCP Protection Service Convert to Non-Protection Service from the shortcutmenu. In this case, the working service is deleted automatically, but you need to manually delete theunidirectional cross-connection from the sink board to the working board.

Only unidirectional SNCP services can be converted to unprotected services.

Step 4 Right-click the unidirectional cross-connection from the sink board to the protection board, andchoose Delete from the shortcut menu. In the Confirm dialog box, click OK.

Step 5 On the intermediate NE that protection services pass through, delete bidirectional pass-throughservices between line boards.

NOTE


When choose SNCP Protection Service Convert to Non-Protection Service, you need to perform thisoperation on all the intermediate NEs that normal services pass through.

----End

B.28 Switching the Working Mode of the LQM2The default working mode of the LQM2 board is 2LQM Mode. When the working mode isswitched to AP8 Mode, you need to configure the board and add the IN2/OUT2 optical portaccording to this section.


The physical and logical LQM2 board must be configured.

Background InformationThis section describes how to configure the LQM2 board and add an optical port when theworking mode of the board is switched from 2LQM Mode to AP8 Mode. When the workingmode of the board is switched from AP8 Mode to 2LQM Mode, the configuration of the boardis similar except that you do not need to add the IN2/OUT2 optical port.

Procedure

Step 1 Delete the cross-connections on the LQM2 board:




307

1. In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > WDM ServiceManagement from the Function Tree. Click Query. The Working cross-connection fielddisplays all the working cross-connections on the LQM2 board.

2. Select all the working cross-connections on the LQM2 board, and then click Deactivate.Click OK. In the displayed prompt dialog box, click OK.

3. A prompt is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.4. Select all the working cross-connections on the LQM2 board, Click Delete. In the displayed

prompt dialog box, click OK.5. A prompt is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

Step 2 Delete the service type on the LQM2 board:1. In the NE Explorer, select the LQM2 board and then choose Configuration > WDM

Interface from the Function Tree.2. On the right of the user interface, select , and select Channel from the drop-down list. On

the tab page, set Service Type of optical port 3 to optical port 10 to None, and then clickApply.

3. A prompt is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

Step 3 Add the IN2/OUT2 optical port of the LQM2 board:1. In the NE Explorer, right-click the LQM2 board and then choose Path View. The Path

View window is displayed.2. Right-click the blank space on the right of the Path View window, and then choose Add

Port.

3. The Add Port dialog box is displayed. Click OK.




308

----End

B.29 Backing Up and Restoring the NE DataFor the security of the NE data, you can back up and restore the NE data.

B.29.1 Comparison of NE Data Backup and Restoration MethodsYou need to back up important NE data during daily maintenance. This ensures that the SCCboard of the NE automatically restores to normal operation after the NE data in the DRDBdatabase of the SCC board is lost or a power failure occurs on the equipment. This sectiondescribes several NE data backup and restoration methods. You can select the method asrequired.

Comparison of Backup and Restoration MethodsThe locations for backing up and restoring the NE database include the SCC board, CF card,local server and remote server. Different storage locations determine different types of backupand restoration methods. See Table B-1.

Table B-1 Backup and restoration methods and application scenarios

Backup and Restoration Method Application Scenario

Back up/Restore the NE database to/from anSCC board

Backs up the NE data in the DRDB databaseof the SCC board to the flash database, whenthe SCC board does not have a CF card.During the restoration, after a warm reset ora cold reset on the SCC board, the SCC boardreads the configuration from the flashdatabase and issues the configuration to otherboards.




309

Backup and Restoration Method Application Scenario

Back up/Restore the NE database to/from aCF card

Backs up the NE data in the DRDB databaseof the SCC board to the CF card.During the restoration, the database isrestored from the CF card to the DRDBdatabase of the SCC board. After a warm reseton the SCC board, the memory database onthe SCC board is updated.

Back up/Restore the NE data to/from an NMSserver

Stores the data in the computer where theNMS server resides.During restoration, you can select the backupfile in the directory where the NE data issaved.

Back up/Restore the NE data to/from an NMSclient

Stores the data in the computer where theNMS client resides.During restoration, you can select the backupfile in the directory where the NE data issaved.

NE DatabaseThe NE configuration data is saved in the NE database. There are three types of NE databasesas follows:l MDB: Memory database. The data in a MDB database is changed when the configuration

information is changed. The data is lost when the SCC board is reset or a power failureoccurs.

l DRDB: Dynamic random database. The data that is verified is automatically saved in theDRDB database. The data is lost when a power failure occurs.

l FDB: Flash database. There are the FDB0 and FDB1 databases. The data need to be copiedto the database manually and can be saved permanently.

When the NE configuration data is issued to the SCC board, it is saved in the MDB database. Ifthe verification is successful, the SCC board automatically copies the contents in the MDBdatabase to the DRDB database and issues the verified configuration data to the boards. Youneed to manually copy the DRDB database to the FDB database, as a backup of the DRDBdatabase. When the NE is restarted after a power failure, the SCC board checks whether thereis configuration data in the DRDB database. If yes, the data are restored from the DRDBdatabase. If the data in the DRDB database is damaged, the data is restored from the FDB0 andFDB1 databases.

NE Configuration DataThe NE configuration data refers to the information in the DRDB database of the NE, such asthe board configuration, clock configuration and protection relationships of the NE. It is theinstruction file of the NE and the key for the NE to perform normally in the entire network.




310

NE Database PackageThe NE database package is a package that contains all database files on an NE and a file listthat defines and manages those files.

The NE database package and NE configuration data are the same data on the NE in differentreleases. You can perform the NE database package backup and restoration on the release 5.00.06NE or the NE of later release.

B.29.2 Restoring the NE Database from the SCC BoardWhen the database file is lost due to the NE maintenance or NE fault, you can restore the NEdata from the DRDB database file that is already backed up to the Flash database on the SCCboard.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.l You must log in to the NE as an NE user with system level authority.l The NE data from DRDB Database must be backed up to Flash database on the SCC board.


Procedure

Step 1 Right-click the active SCC board in the NE panel, choose Warm Reset or Cold Reset. ClickOK in the confirmed dialog box.

NOTE

The reset modes for different SCC board are different. You need to choose the reset mode as required.

Step 2 Click OK.

----End

B.29.3 Recovering Device Data from the NMS Server or the NMSClient

This operation describes how to recover the device data from the NMS Server or the NMS Client.

Prerequisitel The FTP/TFTP/SFTP server is configured and the FTP/TFTP/SFTP service is started.l To perform the Recover operation from client, the SFTP server must be configured, and

the SFTP service is started.

Background Informationl You cannot perform the Recover operation for multiple devices of different device types.l On selecting the device type in the device tree, all the device information related to the

device type is displayed in the NE View table.




311


Procedure1. In the Main Topology view, choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE

Data Backup/Restoration from the Main Menu.2. Right click the device(s) that you want to recover in the NE View table.3. Select Recover... to open the Recover dialog.4. In the File Name drop-down list, select the file to be recovered. If the backup file is not

listed in the File Name drop-down list, select the file to be recovered, and turn to 6. If thebackup file is not listed in the File Name drop-down list, click Browse... to select the backupfile in the Select File dialog box, as shown below.

5. Select NMS Server or NMS Client to recover the backup file for the selected device(s).By default NMS Server is selected.l If NMS Server is selected, you need to select the appropriate backup file from the NMS

server. The selected backup file path is displayed in the File To Be Recovered field.

l If NMS Client is selected, you need to click to select the backup file from theNMS Client. The selected backup file path is displayed in the File To Be Recoveredfield.

6. Click OK.

NOTE

The selected backup file path from the NMS Server or NMS Client is displayed in the File Name drop-down list.

7. Click Start, the Operation Confirmation dialog box is displayed.8. In the Operation Confirmation dialog, click Yes to start the recover operation. The

recover operation status is displayed in the NE View table.

ResultAfter the device data is recovered, right click the device in the NE View table. Select ActivationDatabase... to open the Activation Database dialog box, and then click Start to activate thedevice database.

NOTEIf you do not activate the software within five minutes after the restoration is successfully complete, theU2000 automatically rolls back the software and cancels the restoration operation.

B.30 Creating Fiber Connections in List ModeIn Fiber/Cable Management, you can manage the fiber connections between NEs and insideNEs in a unified manner. Compared with the graphic mode, the creating fiber connections in thelist mode is not visual. Hence, the list mode is applicable to the scenario where you create a fewfiber connections only.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.




312

l The board on relevant NEs must be created.


Procedure on the U20001. Choose Inventory > Fiber/Cable > Fiber/Cable Management from the Main Menu.2. Click Create, and the Bulk Create Fibers/Cables dialog box is displayed.3. Click Select Object, select all the NEs you need to create fiber/cable in the dialog box.4. Click OK.5. Click New in the Bulk Create Fibers/Cables dialog box.6. Double-click the setting area of each attributes. Set Direction, Source NE, Source Port,

Sink NE and Sink Port.7. Click Apply.

TIP

You can create multiple fibers/cables and set parameters in step 5, click Apply.

8. Click Close on the Operation Result dialog box. Repeat Step 6-8 to create another fiberconnection.

9. Click Apply to complete the settings. The created fiber connections are displayed in theFiber/Cable Information list.

10. Move the cursor to the fiber that is created and then information about the fiber is displayed.Read the information to check whether the fiber is created correctly.




313

C Parameter Reference

C.1 NE AttributesIn this user interface, you can view and set NE attributes, including NE ID, subrack type, andIP address.

C.2 Attributes of NE UsersIn this user interface, you can manage NE users for the specific NE. You can query, add, deleteand modify an NE user, and set password for the NE user.

C.3 NE Time SynchronizationIn this user interface, you can set NE time, to keep it synchronized with the U2000 server time.

C.4 WDM Cross-Connection ConfigurationIn this user interface, you can configure the cross-connections of various WDM services.

C.5 Port Protection ParametersIn this user interface, you can create, configure and modify the port protection group. Portprotection is used to switch the service to the protection port when the working port becomesfaulty. It ensures service availability. A working port and the corresponding protection port areregarded as a port protection group.

C.6 SNCP Service Control ParametersIn this user interface, you can query and modify the attributes and status of an SNCP service.

OptiX OSN 1800 Compact Multi-Service Edge OpticalTransport PlatformCommissioning and Configuration Guide C Parameter Reference


314

C.1 NE AttributesIn this user interface, you can view and set NE attributes, including NE ID, subrack type, andIP address.

ParametersField Value Description

ID 1 to 49135 Displays the unique ID of anNE on the NM for identifyingan NE, which is the basis ofcommunication between theNM and an NE.

Extended ID 1 to 254Default: 9

For NE ID extension.Click Extended ID for moreinformation.

Name For example: NE70 Displays the NE name, forthe convenience of searchingfor the NE.

Remarks - Enters extra notes of the NEif desired.

Gateway Type Non-gateway, Gateway The gateway type of an NEdecides the mode ofcommunication between theNE and the NM.

Protocol IP, OSI Displays the protocol usedfor communication betweenthe Gateway NE and the NM.The OptiX OSN 1800 seriessupports only the IP protocol.

IP Address For example: 192.168.0.1 Displays the IP of thegateway NE.

Connection Mode Common, Security SSL Displays the mode ofconnection between theU2000 and the gateway NE.Click Connection Mode (NEAttributes) for moreinformation.

Port Default: 1400 Displays the port of thegateway NE.



315


Affiliated Gateway Protocol IP Displays the protocol usedfor communication betweenthe affiliated Gateway NEand the NM.

C.2 Attributes of NE UsersIn this user interface, you can manage NE users for the specific NE. You can query, add, deleteand modify an NE user, and set password for the NE user.


NE user Up to 8 characters can besupported.

The name of NE user. Click NE User (NE UserManagement) for moreinformation.



316


User Level Monitor level, Operationlevel, Maintenance level,System level, Debug level

The operations carried out bythe NE user are classified intofive levels, namely monitorlevel, operation level,maintenance level, systemlevel and debug level fromthe lowest level to thehighest. Each user of higherlevel can perform all thefunctions that a lower leveluser can do. For example, aoperation level user has allthe rights processed by amonitor level user. Thedetailed right settings foreach level are:l Monitor level: all query

commands, log in/out,and modification of itsown password

l Operation level: allsettings for fault andperformance, partialsecurity settings, andpartial configuration

l Maintenance level:partial security settings,partial configuration,communication settings,and log management

l System level: all securitysettings, allconfiguration.

l Debug level: all securitysettings, allconfiguration, and alldebug commands

Click User Level (NE UserManagement) for moreinformation.



317


NE User Flag LCT NE user, EMS NE user,CMD NE user, General NEuser

Different NE users are usedfor logging in to NEs throughdifferent networkmanagement systems.LCT NE user: NE user usedwhen NEs are managed byLCT.EMS NE user: NE user usedwhen NEs are managed byEMS.CMD NE user: NE user usedwhen NEs are managed byCMD.General NE user: NE userused when NEs are managedby the network managementsystem of any type.Click NE User Flag for moreinformation.

Detailed Description Up to 32 characters can besupported.

Displays the user description.

New Password - New password of the user.The password consists of6-16 characters. It can be acombination of Englishcharacters, digits, space andunderlines. Note that thepassword cannot becomposed all by digits or allby letters. It cannot containspecial characters.

Confirm Password - String, containing 6 to 16characters. It must includeone alphabetic and onenumeric characters at least.The new password and theretyped one must be thesame.

Whether the password isallowed to be modifiedimmediately

Yes, No Sets whether the password isallowed to be modifiedimmediately. This setting issupported only for release 5.0NEs.



318

C.3 NE Time SynchronizationIn this user interface, you can set NE time, to keep it synchronized with the U2000 server time.


NE Name For example: NEW-NE2 Displays the name of the NE.

NE ID Format: Extended ID-ID Displays the ID of the NE.

SynchronousMode

NM, NULL, Standard NTP Displays the synchronization modeof NE Time.NM: Synchronize the NE time withthe NM server time.NULL: No synchronization mode isused.Standard NTP: Synchronize theNE time with the standard NTPserver time.

Standard NTPAuthentication

Enabled, Disabled Displays or sets whether thestandard NTP authentication isenabled.

Server Enabled ECC Server, Disabled Displays or sets whether to set it tothe NTP server and the type of theNTP server.When the ECC protocol is used forcommunication between NEs, thegateway NE is an ECC server. So,the Server Enabled parameter is setto ECC Server. While non-gatewayNEs are ECC clients and the ServerEnabled parameter is set toDisabled.When the IP protocol is used forcommunication between NEs, allNEs are IP clients and the ServerEnabled parameter is set toDisabled.OptiX OSN 1800 series do notsupport.



319


Client Enabled ECC Client, IP Client, Disabled Displays or sets whether to set it tothe NTP client and the type of theNTP client.When the IP protocol is used forcommunication between the NE andthe NTP server, the NE is an IPclient and the Client Enabledparameter are set to IP Client.OptiX OSN 1800 series do notsupport.

SynchronousServer

NE ID, IP address Displays or sets the IP address or NEID of the NTP synchronous server.If the client type is ECC Client, setit to the NE ID of the synchronousserver.If the client type is IP Client, set itto the IP address of the synchronousserver.OptiX OSN 1800 series do notsupport.

Polling Period(min)

2 to 1440 Minutes Displays the period ofsynchronizing the NE time with theNTP server time.OptiX OSN 1800 series do notsupport.

The Number ofSampling

1 to 8 It indicates how many times theNTP server time will be sampled ina querying cycle. The NTP servertime is the average of that sampled.OptiX OSN 1800 series do notsupport.

NE CurrentTime

Format: dd/mm/yyyy hh:mm:ss Displays the current time of the NE.

DaylightSaving Time

Yes, No Displays whether to save the time inthe daytime or not.



320


Recent NESynchronization Time

Format: dd/mm/yyyy hh:mm:ss The latest time when the NE wassynchronized.If the difference between the currentNE time and the latest time when theNE was synchronized is within twoquerying cycles, it indicates theNTP server is running normally.Otherwise, it indicates the NTPserver is not running normally, andthe color of the parameter box willchange to the one that is for "MajorAlarm".

C.4 WDM Cross-Connection ConfigurationIn this user interface, you can configure the cross-connections of various WDM services.

Parameters

C.5 Port Protection ParametersIn this user interface, you can create, configure and modify the port protection group. Portprotection is used to switch the service to the protection port when the working port becomesfaulty. It ensures service availability. A working port and the corresponding protection port areregarded as a port protection group.

Parameters

Table C-1 Protection Group Parameters


Protection Group Name For example: NE811-52910 Displays the protectiongroup name.

Protection Type Optical Line Protection, Intra-Board 1+1 Protection, Client1+1 Protection, Inter-Subrack1+1 Optical ChannelProtection

Displays the protection typeof the protection group.

NE with Working Channel For example: NE811 Sets the NE of the workingchannel.

Board with WorkingChannel

For example: Shelf1-3-OLP Sets the board of the workingchannel.



321


Working Channel For example: 1(RI1/TO1) Sets and queries the workingchannel.

NE with Protection Channel For example: NE811 Sets the NE of the protectionchannel.

Board with ProtectionChannel

For example: Shelf1-3-OLP Sets the board of theprotection channel.

Protection Channel For example: 2(RI2/TO2) Sets and queries theprotection channel.

NE with Control Channel/Detection Channel

For example: NE811 Sets the NE of the controlchannel/monitoring channel.

Board with Control Channel/Detection Channel

For example: 1-LOE Sets the board of the controlchannel/monitoring channel.

Restore Mode Revertive, Non-RevertiveDefault: Non-Revertive

Indicates whether the serviceis automatically switchedfrom the protection channelto the working channel afterthe working channelbecomes normal.Revertive means that theservice can be automaticallyswitched. Non-Revertivemeans that the service is notswitched to the workingchannel after the workingchannel becomes normal.NOTE

In the case of the intra-board 1+1 protection configured byusing the OLP board, when theMonitoring Channel isconfigured, Revertive Modecan be only Non-revertive andcannot be configured.

WTR time (mm:ss) 05:00 to 12:00Default: 10:00

The WTR time parameterindicates the waiting timebefore the services in theprotection group switch backto the working channel if theworking channel isrecovered when theprotection group works in therevertive mode.The WTR Time(mm:ss) isvalid only when the value ofRevertive Mode is set toRevertive.



322


SD Switching Enable, DisableDefault: Disable

The parameter determines ifthe SD switching function ofthe wavelength protectiongroup takes effect.

Switching Status Idle, WTR, Manual toWorking channel, Manual toProtection channel, Force toWorking channel, Force toProtection channel, SDSwitched, SF Switched,Locked, Unknown

Displays the currentswitching status of theprotection group.

Table C-2 Channel Status Parameters


Protection Group Name For example: NE811-52910 Displays the protectiongroup name.

Current Channel Work, Protection, Unknown Displays the path of thecurrent service.

Working Channel NE name- Shelf1()Slot No.-Board name- Optical portnumber (Optical port name)

Displays the workingchannel of the protectiongroup.

Working Channel Status Normal, SD, SF, Unknown Displays the status of theworking channel.

Working Channel Hold-OffTime

0-100Default: 0

The Working ChannelHold-Off Time (100ms)parameter specifies the timeperiod from the time that thesystem detects the switchingcondition in the workingchannel to the time that theswitching is performed. Thisis to prevent protectionswitching from beingperformed repeatedly whenthe service state is unstable.

Control Channel/DetectionChannel

NE name- Slot No.- Boardname- Optical port number(Optical port name)

Displays the channelinformation of the ControlChannel/MonitoringChannel.



323


Control Channel/DetectionChannel Hold-Off Time (100ms)

0 to 100 Displays the hold-off time ofthe control board.NOTE

This parameter cannot be set inoptical line protection.

Protection Channel NE name- Slot No.- Boardname- Optical port number(Optical port name)

Displays the protectionchannel of the protectiongroup.

Protection Channel Status Normal, SD, SF, Unknown Displays the status of theprotection channel.

Protection Channel Hold-OffTime

0-100Default: 0

The Protection ChannelHold-Off Time (100ms)parameter specifies the timeperiod from the time that thesystem detects the switchingcondition in the protectionchannel to the time that theswitching is performed.

C.6 SNCP Service Control ParametersIn this user interface, you can query and modify the attributes and status of an SNCP service.

Navigation Path1. In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service

Management from the navigation tree.2. In the lower portion of the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration window, click Create

SNCP Service. The Create SNCP Service dialog box is displayed.


Source Slot Shelf ID (shelf name)-slotnumber-board name

Sets the source slot of theservice.

Source Optical Port Optical Port No. Sets the source optical port ofthe service.

Source Optical Channel(e.g.1, 3–6)

Optical Channel No. Sets the source opticalchannel of the service.

Sink Slot Shelf ID (shelf name)-slotnumber-board name

Sets the sink slot of theservice.



324


Sink Optical Port Optical Port No. Sets the sink optical port ofthe service.

Sink Optical Channel(e.g.1,3–6)

Optical Channel No. Sets the sink optical channelof the service.

Service Source Source Slot Number-SourceBoard Name-Source PortNumber-Source OpticalChannel Number

Displays the source opticalchannel of the service.

Service Sink Sink Slot Number-SinkBoard Name-Sink PortNumber-Sink OpticalChannel Number

Displays the sink opticalchannel of the service.

Protection Type SW SNCP, ODUk SNCP,MS SNCPDefault: SW SNCP

The Protection Typeparameter provides users anoption for choosing arequired level for the newlycreated SNCP protection.The ODUk SNCP protectionand SW SNCP protectionprotect services of differentcross-connect granularities,which are ODUk and GE/ANY respectively. If theprotection type is changed,the relevant parameters mustalso be changed accordingly.NOTE

OptiX OSN 1800 series supportSW SNCPand ODUK SNCPprotection type only.

Service Type l When Service Type is setto SW SNCP: GE, FE,OTU1, STM-1, STM-4,STM-16, FC100, FC200,FICON, FICON Express,HD-SDI, DVB-ASI, SDI,ESCONDefault: GE

l When Service Type is setto ODUK SNCP: ODU0,ODU1, ODU2, ODUflexDefault: ODU0

Sets the service type of theSNCP.



325


SNCP Type SNC/I, SNC/S, SNC/NDefault: SNC/N

The SNCP Type parameterspecifies the monitoringmode of the ODUk SNCPprotection.NOTE

When you select ProtectionType as ODUK SNCP, you canset this parameter.

OptiX OSN 1800 series supportSNC/I and SNC/N.

OTN Level l When SNCP Type is setto SNC/I, this parameteris invalid

l When SNCP Type is setto SNC/N: PM, TCM1,TCM2, TCM3, TCM4,TCM5, TCM6.Default: PM

l When SNCP Type is setto SNC/S: TCM1, TCM2,TCM3, TCM4, TCM5,TCM6.Default: TCM1

Sets the OTN level.NOTE

When you select SNCP Type isSNC/N or SNC/S, you can setthis parameter.

OptiX OSN 1800 series do notsupport this parameter.

Current Status Normal State, WTR State,Manual (from Protection toWorking) Switching State,Manual (from Working toProtection) Switching State,Forced (from Protection toWorking) Switching State,Forced (from Working toProtection) Switching State,SD Switching, SF Switching,LockoutDefault: None

The Current Statusparameter displays theswitching status of aprotection group.

Revertive Mode Revertive, Non-RevertiveDefault: Non-Revertive

The Revertive Modeparameter provides userswith an option for whether toswitch back the services tothe working channel from theprotection channelautomatically after theworking channel isrecovered.



326


300-720Default: 600

The WTR time (s) parameterindicates the waiting timebefore the services in theprotection group switch backto the working channel if theworking channel is recoveredwhen the protection groupworks in the revertive mode.

Working Channel Hold-OffTime

0-100Default: 0

The Working ChannelHold-Off Time (100ms)parameter specifies the timeperiod from the time that thesystem detects the switchingcondition in the workingchannel to the time that theswitching is performed. Thisis to prevent protectionswitching from beingperformed repeatedly whenthe service state is unstable.

Protection Channel Hold-OffTime

0-100Default: 0

The Protection ChannelHold-Off Time (100ms)parameter specifies the timeperiod from the time that thesystem detects the switchingcondition in the protectionchannel to the time that theswitching is performed.

SD Switching Enabled, DisabledDefault: Disabled

Sets the SD enabling status.



327


Direction Unidirectional, BidirectionalDefault: Unidirectional

Sets the cross-connectiondirection.l When Direction is

Unidirectional, theboards in the ODUkSNCP protection groupcan only selectivelyreceive signals.Therefore, two reverseelectrical cross-connections must becreated after the ODUkSNCP protection group iscreated.

l When Direction isBidirectional, the U2000automatically creates tworoutes in the reversedirection.

ODUflex Timeslots 3-7Default: -

l When Service Type isODUflex of the newlycreated service, setODUflex Timeslotsaccordingly.

l Set ODUflex Timeslotsbased on the service rate.The value ranges from 3to 7, which meansODUflex includes theservice rates in the rangeof 3.75 Gbit/s (3 x 1.25Gbit/s) to 8.75 Gbit/s (7 x1.25 Gbit/s).

NOTEWhen Service Type is only setto ODUflex, this parameter isvalid.



328


Switching Mode Unidirectional, BidirectionalDefault: Unidirectional

Sets the protection switchingmode.l Unidirectional: Services

in only one direction areswitched.

l Bidirectional: Servicesin both directions areswitched.

NOTEThis parameter is valid onlywhen Protection Type is set toODUK SNCP .

Switching Type Near-end, Far-endDefault: Near-end

Indicates the end (the nearend or the far end) that sendsa bidirectional switchingrequest.NOTE

When Switching Mode is onlyset to Bidirectional, thisparameter is valid.

Channel Status Normal, SF, SD, Unknown Displays the status of theworking service or theprotection service in aprotection group.

Current Channel Working Channel, ProtectionChannel, Delay StartDefault: /

The Current Channelparameter indicates the typeof the channel where theservice is currently located inthe SNCP protection group.



329

D Glossary

A

AC See alternating current

access control list A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to have accessto a resource.

ACK See acknowledgement

acknowledgement A response sent by a receiver to indicate successful reception of information.Acknowledgements may be implemented at any level including the physical level (usingvoltage on one or more wires to coordinate transfer), at the link level (to indicatesuccessful transmission across a single hardware link), or at higher levels.

ACL See access control list

add/drop multiplexer Network elements that provide access to all or some subset of the constituent signalscontained within an STM-N signal. The constituent signals are added to (inserted), and/or dropped from (extracted) the STM-N signal as it passed through the ADM.

Add/drop wavelength Add/drop wavelength refers to the wavelength that carries the add/drop services in theOADM equipment.

Address ResolutionProtocol

Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is an Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses toMAC addresses. It allows hosts and routers to determine the link layer addresses throughARP requests and ARP responses. The address resolution is a process in which the hostconverts the target IP address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame.The basic function of the ARP is to query the MAC address of the target equipmentthrough its IP address.

ADM See add/drop multiplexer

administrative unit The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layerand the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher orderVC) and an AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative tothe multiplex section frame start.

Administrator A user who has authority to access all the Management Domains of the EMLCoreproduct. He has access to the whole network and to all the management functionalities.

ADSL See asymmetric digital subscriber line

AGC See automatic gain control

OptiX OSN 1800 Compact Multi-Service Edge OpticalTransport PlatformCommissioning and Configuration Guide D Glossary


330

AID access identifier

AIS See alarm indication signal

alarm A message reported when a fault is detected by a device or by the network managementsystem during the process of polling devices. Each alarm corresponds to a recoveryalarm. After a recovery alarm is received, the status of the corresponding alarm changesto cleared.

alarm cable The cable for generation of visual or audio alarms.

alarm cascading The shunt-wound output of the alarm signals of several subracks or cabinets.

alarm cause A single disturbance or fault may lead to the detection of multiple defects. A fault causeis the result of a correlation process which is intended to identify the defect that isrepresentative of the disturbance or fault that is causing the problem.

alarm indication On the cabinet of an NE, there are four indicators in different colors indicating the currentstatus of the NE. When the green indicator is on, it indicates that the NE is powered on.When the red indicator is on, it indicates that a critical alarm is generated. When theorange indicator is on, it indicates that a major alarm is generated. When the yellowindicator is on, it indicates that a minor alarm is generated. The ALM alarm indicator onthe front panel of a board indicates the current status of the board.

alarm indication signal A code sent downstream in a digital network as an indication that an upstream failurehas been detected and alarmed. It is associated with multiple transport layers.

alarm mask On the host, an alarm management method through which users can set conditions forthe system to discard (not to save, display, or query for) the alarm information meetingthe conditions.

alarm severity The significance of a change in system performance or events. According to ITU-Trecommendations, an alarm can have one of the following severities: Critical, Major,Minor, Warning.

alarm suppression A function used not to monitor alarms for a specific object, which may be thenetworkwide equipment, a specific NE, a specific board and even a specific functionmodule of a specific board.

alarm type Classification of alarms with different attributes. There are six alarm types as following:Communication: alarm indication related with information transfer. Processing: alarmindication related with software or information processing Equipment: alarm indicationrelated with equipment fault Service: alarm indication related with QoS of the equipmentEnvironment: alarm related with the environment where the equipment resides, usuallygenerated by a sensor Security: alarm indication related with security

ALC See automatic level control

ALC link A piece of end-to-end configuration information, which exists in the equipment (singlestation) as an ALC link node. Through the ALC function of each node, it fulfils opticalpower control on the line that contains the link.

ALC node The ALC functional unit. It corresponds to the NE in a network. The power detect unit,variable optical attenuator unit, and supervisory channel unit at the ALC node worktogether to achieve the ALC function.

ALS See automatic laser shutdown

alternating current Electric current that reverses its direction of flow (polarity) periodically according to afrequency measured in hertz, or cycles per second.



331

American NationalStandard Institute

An organization that defines U.S standards for the information processing industry.American National Standard Institute (ANSI) participates in defining network protocolstandards.

American StandardCode for InformationInterchange

American Standard Code for Information Interchange - the standard system forrepresenting letters and symbols. Each letter or symbol is assigned a unique numberbetween 0 and 127.

ANSI See American National Standard Institute

antistatic floor A floor that can quickly release the static electricity of the object contacting it to preventaccumulated static electricity

APD See avalanche photodiode

APE automatic power equilibrium

APID access point identifier

application-specificintegrated circuit

A special type of chip that starts out as a nonspecific collection of logic gates. Late inthe manufacturing process, a layer is added to connect the gates for a specific function.By changing the pattern of connections, the manufacturer can make the chip suitable formany needs.

APS See automatic protection switching

ARP See Address Resolution Protocol

arrayed waveguidegrating

A device, built with silicon planar lightwave circuits (PLC), that allows multiplewavelengths to be combined and separated in a dense wavelength-division multiplexing(DWDM) system.

ASCII See American Standard Code for Information Interchange

ASE amplified spontaneous emission

ASIC See application-specific integrated circuit

ASON See automatically switched optical network

asymmetric digitalsubscriber line

A technology for transmitting digital information at a high bandwidth on existing phonelines to homes and businesses. Unlike regular dialup phone service, ADSL providescontinuously-available, "always on" connection. ADSL is asymmetric in that it uses mostof the channel to transmit downstream to the user and only a small part to receiveinformation from the user. ADSL simultaneously accommodates analog (voice)information on the same line. ADSL is generally offered at downstream data rates from512 Kbps to about 6 Mbps.

AsynchronousTransfer Mode

A protocol for the transmission of a variety of digital signals using uniform 53 byte cells.A transfer mode in which the information is organized into cells; it is asynchronous inthe sense that the recurrence of cells depends on the required or instantaneous bit rate.Statistical and deterministic values may also be used to qualify the transfer mode.

ATAG autonomously generated correlation tag

ATM See Asynchronous Transfer Mode

AU See administrative unit

auto-negotiation An optional function of the IEEE 802.3u Fast Ethernet standard that enables devices toautomatically exchange information over a link about speed and duplex abilities.



332

automatic gain control A process or means by which gain is automatically adjusted in a specified manner as afunction of a specified parameter, such as received signal level.

automatic lasershutdown

A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of laser transmittersand optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels.

automatic level control A well-known application in communication systems with a given input signalconditioned to produce an output signal as possible, while supporting a wide gain rangeand controlled gain-reduction and gain recovery characteristics.

automatic protectionswitching

Capability of a transmission system to detect a failure on a working facility and to switchto a standby facility to recover the traffic.

automatically switchedoptical network

A network which is based on technology enabling the automatic delivery of transportservices. Specifically, an ASON can deliver not only leased-line connections but alsoother transport services such as soft-permanent and switched optical connections.

avalanche photodiode A semiconductor photodetector with integral detection and amplification stages.Electrons generated at a p/n junction are accelerated in a region where they free anavalanche of other electrons. APDs can detect faint signals but require higher voltagesthan other semiconductor electronics.

AWG See arrayed waveguide grating

B

background blockerror ratio

The ratio of background block errors (BBE) to total blocks in available time during afixed measurement interval. The count of total blocks excludes all blocks during SESs.

backup A periodic operation performed on the data stored in the database for the purposes ofdatabase recovery in case that the database is faulty. The backup also refers to datasynchronization between active and standby boards.

bandwidth A range of transmission frequencies that a transmission line or channel can carry in anetwork. In fact, it is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies thetransmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer rate.

BAS See broadband access server

basic input/outputsystem

A firmware stored in the computer mainboard. It contains basic input/output controlprograms, power-on self test (POST) programs, bootstraps, and system settinginformation. The BIOS provides hardware setting and control functions for the computer.

bayonet-neill-concelman

A connector used for connecting two coaxial cables.

BBE background block error

BBER See background block error ratio

BC See boundary clock

BDI Backward Defect Indication

BEI backward error indication

BER See bit error rate

BIAE backward incoming alignment error



333

bill of material Listing of all the subassemblies, parts and raw materials that go into the parent assembly.It shows the quantity of each raw material required to make the assembly. There are avariety of display formats for BOMS, including single level, indented, modular/planning, transient, matrix and costed BOMs [APICs, CMSG].

BIOS See basic input/output system

BIP See bit-interleaved parity

BIP-8 See bit interleaved parity order 8

bit error An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the correspondingbit in the received digital signal.

bit error rate Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index used to measure thecommunications quality of a network.

bit interleaved parityorder 8

A frame is divided into several blocks with 8 bits (one byte)in a parity unit. Then arrangethe blocks in matrix. Compute the number of "1" over each column. Then fill a 1 in thecorresponding bit for the result if the number is odd, otherwise fill a 0.

bit-interleaved parity A method of error monitoring. With even parity an X-bit code is generated by thetransmitting equipment over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that thefirst bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in thecovered portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit ofall X-bit sequences within the specified portion, etc. Even parity is generated by settingthe BIP-X bits so that there is an even number of 1s in each monitored partition of thesignal. A monitored partition comprises all bits which are in the same bit position withinthe X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includesthe BIP-X.

BITS See building integrated timing supply

BMC best master clock

BNC See bayonet-neill-concelman

BOM See bill of material

boundary clock A clock with a clock port for each of two or more distinct PTP communication paths.

BPDU See bridge protocol data unit

BPS board-level protection switching

bridge protocol dataunit

The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended LAN thatuses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information onports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends up where it wasintended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in anetwork topology. The loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridgesinterfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.

bridging The action of transmitting identical traffic on the working and protection channelssimultaneously.

broadband accessserver

A server providing features as user access, connection management, address allocationand authentication, authorization and accounting. It also works as a router featuringeffective route management, high forwarding performance and abundant services.

broadcast A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range isdetermined by the broadcast address.



334

broadcast service The unidirectional services from one service source to multiple service sinks.

building integratedtiming supply

In the situation of multiple synchronous nodes or communication devices, one can usea device to set up a clock system on the hinge of telecom network to connect thesynchronous network as a whole, and provide satisfactory synchronous base signals tothe building integrated device. This device is called BITS.

BWS Backbone WDM System

C

cable tie The tape used to bind the cables.

capex See capital expenditure

capital expenditure Capital expenditures (CAPEX or capex) are expenditures creating future benefits. Acapital expenditure is incurred when a business spends money either to buy fixed assetsor to add to the value of an existing fixed asset with a useful life that extends beyond thetaxable year. Capex are used by a company to acquire or upgrade physical assets suchas equipment, property, or industrial buildings.

CAR See committed access rate

CBS See committed burst size

CC See connectivity check

CCI connection control interface

CCM See continuity check message

CD chromatic dispersion

CDMA See Code Division Multiple Access

CE See customer edge

CENELEC See European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization

central processing unit The computational and control unit of a computer. The CPU is the device that interpretsand executes instructions. The CPU has the ability to fetch, decode, and executeinstructions and to transfer information to and from other resources over the computer'smain data-transfer path, the bus.

centralized alarmsystem

The system that gathers all the information about alarms into a certain terminal console.

CF See compact flash

CGMP Cisco Group Management Protocol

channel A telecommunication path of a specific capacity and/or at a specific speed between twoor more locations in a network. The channel can be established through wire, radio(microwave), fiber or a combination of the three. The amount of information transmittedper second in a channel is the information transmission speed, expressed in bits persecond. For example, b/s (100 bit/s), kb/s (103 bit/s), Mb/s (106 bit/s), Gb/s (109 bit/s),and Tb/s (1012 bit/s).

channel spacing The center-to-center difference in frequency or wavelength between adjacent channelsin a WDM device.

CIR See committed information rate



335

CIST Common and Internal Spanning Tree

CLEI common language equipment identification

CLNP connectionless network protocol

CLNS connectionless network service

clock synchronization Also called frequency synchronization, clock synchronization means that the signalfrequency traces the reference frequency, but the start point need not be consistent.

clock synchronizationcompliant withprecision time protocol

A type of high-decision clock defined by the IEEE 1588 V2 standard. The IEEE 1588V2 standard specifies the precision time protocol (PTP) in a measurement and controlsystem. The PTP protocol ensures clock synchronization precise to sub-microseconds.

clock tracing The method to keep the time on each node being synchronized with a clock source in anetwork.

CM See configuration management

CMEP connection monitoring end point

CMI coded mark inversion

coarse wavelengthdivision multiplexing

A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels intothe same fiber. CWDM widely spaces wavelengths at a spacing of several nm. CWDMdoes not support optical amplifiers and is applied in short-distance chain networking.

Code Division MultipleAccess

A communication scheme that forms different code sequences by using the frequencyexpansion technology. In this case, subscribers of different addresses can use differentcode sequences for multi-address connection.

committed access rate A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface.CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classifiedinto QoS (Quality of Service) groups, and by which the input or output transmission ratecan be defined.

committed burst size committed burst size. A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is,the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committedinformation rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that thisparameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might beforwarded.

committed informationrate

The rate at which a frame relay network agrees to transfer information in normalconditions. Namely, it is the rate, measured in bit/s, at which the token is transferred tothe leaky bucket.

Common ObjectRequest BrokerArchitecture

A specification developed by the Object Management Group in 1992 in which pieces ofprograms (objects) communicate with other objects in other programs, even if the twoprograms are written in different programming languages and are running on differentplatforms. A program makes its request for objects through an object request broker, orORB, and thus does not need to know the structure of the program from which the objectcomes. CORBA is designed to work in object-oriented environments. See also IIOP,object (definition 2), Object Management Group, object-oriented.

compact flash Compact flash (CF) was originally developed as a type of data storage device used inportable electronic devices. For storage, CompactFlash typically uses flash memory ina standardized enclosure.

concatenation A process that combines multiple virtual containers. The combined capacities can beused a single capacity. The concatenation also keeps the integrity of bit sequence.



336

Configuration Data A command file defining hardware configurations of an NE. With this file, an NE cancollaborate with other Nes in an entire network. Thus, configuration data is the key factorfor normal running of an entire network.

configurationmanagement

1. A network management function defined by the International Standards Organization(ISO). It involves installing, reinitializing & modifying hardware & software.

2. Configuration Management (CM) is a system for collecting the configurationinformation of all nodes in the network.

configure To set the basic parameters of an operation object.

congestion An extra intra-network or inter-network traffic resulting in decreasing network serviceefficiency.

connecting plate A metallic plate which is used to combine two cabinets.

connection point A reference point where the output of a trail termination source or a connection is boundto the input of another connection, or where the output of a connection is bound to theinput of a trail termination sink or another connection. The connection point ischaracterized by the information which passes across it. A bidirectional connection pointis formed by the association of a contradirectional pair.

connectivity check Ethernet CFM can detect the connectivity between MEPs. The detection is achieved byeach MEP transmitting a Continuity Check Message (CCM) periodically.

continuity checkmessage

CCM is used to detect the link status.

convergence 1. A process in which multiple channels of low-rate signals are multiplexed into one orseveral channels of required signals.

2. It refers to the speed and capability for a group of networking devices to run a specificrouting protocol. It functions to keep the network topology consistent.

convergence service A service that provides enhancements to an underlying service in order to provide forthe specific requirements of the convergence service user.

CORBA See Common Object Request Broker Architecture

corrugated pipe Used to protect optical fibers.

CPLD Complex Programmable Logical Device

CPU See central processing unit

CRC See cyclic redundancy check

CSA Canadian Standards Association

CSES consecutive severely errored second

CSMA carrier sense multiple access

CST Common Spanning Tree

current alarm An alarm not handled or not acknowledged after being handled.

current performancedata

Performance data stored currently in a register. An NE provides two types of registers,namely, 15-minute register and 24-hour register, to store performance parameters of aperformance monitoring entity. The two types of registers stores performance data onlyin the specified monitoring period.



337

customer edge A part of BGP/MPLS IP VPN model. It provides interfaces for direct connection to theService Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host.

CWDM See coarse wavelength division multiplexing

cyclic redundancycheck

A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking usesa complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sendingdevice performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that itsends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation aftertransmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmissionwas error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmissionincludes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.

D

DAPI destination access point identifiers

Data backup A method that is used to copy key data to the standby storage area, to prevent data lossin the case of the damage or failure in the original storage area.

data communicationnetwork

A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the DataCommunication Function (DCF).

data communicationschannel

The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal totransmit information on operation, management, maintenance and provision (OAM&P)between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of bytes D1-D3 is referred to as the192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel that are composed of bytes D4-D12is referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel.

DBPS distribute board protect system

DCC See data communications channel

DCF See dispersion compensation fiber

DCM See dispersion compensation module

DCM frame A frame which is used to hold the DCM (Dispersion Compensation Module).

DCN See data communication network

DDF See digital distribution frame

DDN See digital data network

demultiplexer A device that separates signals that have been combined by a multiplexer for transmissionover a communications channel as a single signal.

dense wavelengthdivision multiplexing

Technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation ofsingle mode optical fiber, employs multiple wavelengths with specific frequency spacingas carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in the same fiber.

device set A collection of multiple managed devices. By dividing managed devices into differentdevice sets, users can manage the devices by using the U2000 in an easier way. If anoperation authority over one device set is assigned to a user (user group), the authorityover all the devices in the device set is assigned to the user (user group), thus making itunnecessary to set the operation authority over all the devices in a device set separately.It is recommended to configure device set by geographical region, network level, devicetype, or another criterion.

DHCP See Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol



338

diamond-shaped nut A type of nut that is used to fasten the wiring frame to the cabinet.

digital data network A high-quality data transport tunnel that combines the digital channel (such as fiberchannel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel) and the cross multiplextechnology.

digital distributionframe

A type of equipment used between the transmission equipment and the exchange withtransmission rate of 2 to 155 Mbit/s to provide the functions such as cables connection,cable patching, and test of loops that transmitting digital signals.

digital subscriber lineaccess multiplexer

A network device, usually situated in the main office of a telephone company thatreceives signals from multiple customer Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) connections andputs the signals on a high-speed backbone line using multiplexing techniques.

dispersioncompensation fiber

A kind of fiber which uses negative dispersion to compensate for the positive dispersionof transmitting fiber to maintain the original shape of the signal pulse.

dispersioncompensation module

A module, which contains dispersion compensation fibers to compensate for thedispersion of transmitting fiber.

Distance VectorMulticast RoutingProtocol

An Internet gateway protocol mainly based on the RIP. The protocol implements a typicaldense mode IP multicast solution. The DVMRP protocol uses IGMP to exchange routingdatagrams with its neighbors.

distributed linkaggregation group

The distributed link aggregation group (DLAG) is a board-level port protectiontechnology used to detect unidirectional fiber cuts and to negotiate with the opposite end.In the case of a link down failure on a port or a hardware failure on a board, the servicescan automatically be switched to the slave board, thus realizing 1+1 protection for theinter-board ports.

DLAG See distributed link aggregation group

DMUX; DEMUX See demultiplexer

DNI Dual Node Interconnection

domain A logical subscriber group based on which the subscriber rights are controlled.

DQPSK differential quadrature phase shift keying

DRDB dynamic random database

DRZ differential phase return to zero

DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point

DSCR dispersion slope compensation rate

DSLAM See digital subscriber line access multiplexer

DSP Digital Signal Processing

DTE Data Terminal Equipment

DTMF See dual tone multiple frequency

DTR data terminal ready

dual tone multiplefrequency

In telephone systems, multifrequency signaling in which standard set combinations oftwo specific voice band frequencies, one from a group of four low frequencies and theother from a group of four higher frequencies, are used.

dual-ended switching A protection operation method which takes switching action at both ends of the protectedentity (e.g. "connection", "path"), even in the case of a unidirectional failure.



339

DVB Digital Video Broadcasting

DVMRP See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol

DWDM See dense wavelength division multiplexing

Dynamic HostConfiguration Protocol

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking protocol.A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client hostrequesting, generally, information required by the host to participate on the Internetnetwork. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to hosts.

E

E2E End to End

EAPE enhanced automatic power pre-equilibrium

EBS See excess burst size

ECC See embedded control channel

EDFA See erbium doped fiber amplifier

eDQPSK enhanced differential quadrature phase shift keying

EFM See Ethernet in the first mile

ejector lever A lever for removing circuit boards from an electronic chassis.

electric supervisorychannel

A technology realizes the communication among all the nodes and transmits themonitoring data in the optical transmission network. The monitoring data of ESC isintroduced into DCC service overhead and is transmitted with service signals.

electromagneticcompatibility

Electromagnetic compatibility is the condition which prevails when telecommunicationsequipment is performing its individually designed function in a common electromagneticenvironment without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentionalelectromagnetic interference to or from other equipment in the same environment.

electromagneticinterference

Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades orlimits the effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment.

electrostatic discharge The sudden and momentary electric current that flows between two objects at differentelectrical potentials caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field.

element managementsystem

An element management system (EMS) manages one or more of a specific type ofnetwork elements (NEs). An EMS allows the user to manage all the features of each NEindividually, but not the communication between NEs - this is done by the networkmanagement system (NMS).

embedded controlchannel

A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer,to enable transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM)information between NEs.

EMC See electromagnetic compatibility

EMI See electromagnetic interference

EMS See element management system

enterprise systemconnection

A path protocol which connects the host with various control units in a storage system.It is a serial bit stream transmission protocol. The transmission rate is 200 Mbit/s.

EPL See Ethernet private line



340

EPLAN See Ethernet private LAN service

erbium doped fiberamplifier

An optical device that amplifies the optical signals. The device uses a short length ofoptical fiber doped with the rare-earth element Erbium and the energy level jump ofErbium ions activated by pump sources. When the amplifier passes the external lightsource pump, it amplifies the optical signals in a specific wavelength range.

ESC See electric supervisory channel

ESCON See enterprise system connection

ESD See electrostatic discharge

ESD jack Electrostatic discharge jack. A hole in the cabinet or shelf, which connect the shelf orcabinet to the insertion of ESD wrist strap.

eSFP enhanced small form-factor pluggable

Ethernet A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/CollisionDetection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining..

Ethernet in the firstmile

Last mile access from the broadband device to the user community. The EFM takes theadvantages of the SHDSL.b is technology and the Ethernet technology. The EFMprovides both the traditional voice service and internet access service of high speed. Inaddition, it meets the users' requirements on high definition television system (HDTV)and Video On Demand (VOD).

Ethernet private LANservice

An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over adedicated bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, orMPLS server layer networks.

Ethernet private line A type of Ethernet service that is provided with dedicated bandwidth and point-to-pointconnections on an SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer network.

Ethernet virtualprivate LAN service

An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a sharedbridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS serverlayer networks.

Ethernet virtualprivate line

An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over sharedbandwidth, point-to-point connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS serverlayer networks.

ETS European Telecommunication Standards

ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute

ETSI 300mm cabinet A cabinet which is 600mm in width and 300mm in depth, compliant with the standardsof the ETSI.

European Committeefor ElectrotechnicalStandardization

The European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization was established in 1976in Brussels. It is the result of the incorporation of two former organizations. It aims toreduce internal frontiers and trade barriers for electrotechnical products, systems andservices.

EVOA electrical variable optical attenuator

EVPL See Ethernet virtual private line

EVPLAN See Ethernet virtual private LAN service



341

excess burst size A parameter related to traffic. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode, thetraffic control is achieved by the token buckets C and E. Excess burst size is a parameterused to define the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet sizewhen the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parametermust be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than themaximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.

Extended ID The number of the subnet that an NE belongs to, for identifying different networksegments in a WAN. The extended ID and ID form the physical ID of the NE.

External cable The cables and optical fibers which are used for connecting electrical interfaces andoptical interfaces of one cabinet to interfaces of other cabinets or peripherals.

eye pattern An oscilloscope display of synchronized pseudo-random digital data (signal amplitudeversus time), showing the superposition of accumulated output waveforms.

F

F1 byte The user path byte, which is reserved for the user, but is typically special for networkproviders. The F1 byte is mainly used to provide the temporary data or voice path forspecial maintenance objectives. It belongs to the regenerator section overhead byte.

fast Ethernet Any network that supports transmission rate of 100Mbits/s. The Fast Ethernet is 10 timesfaster than 10BaseT, and inherits frame format, MAC addressing scheme, MTU, and soon. Fast Ethernet is extended from the IEEE802.3 standard, and it uses the followingthree types of transmission media: 100BASE-T4 (4 pairs of phone twisted-pair cables),100BASE-TX (2 pairs of data twisted-pair cables), and 100BASE-FX (2-core opticalfibers).

fault A failure to implement the function while the specified operations are performed. A faultdoes not involve the failure caused by preventive maintenance, insufficiency of externalresources and intentional settings.

FBG fiber Bragg grating

FC See fiber channel

FDB flash database

FDDI See fiber distributed data interface

FE See fast Ethernet

FEC See forward error correction

fiber channel A high-speed transport technology used to build storage area networks (SANs). Fiberchannel can be on the networks carrying ATM and IP traffic. It is primarily used fortransporting SCSI traffic from servers to disk arrays. Fiber channel supports single-modeand multi-mode fiber connections. Fiber channel signaling can run on both twisted paircopper wires and coaxial cables. Fiber channel provides both connection-oriented andconnectionless services.

fiber distributed datainterface

A standard developed by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for high-speed fiber-optic local area networks (LANs). FDDI provides specifications fortransmission rates of 100 megabits (100 million bits) per second on networks based onthe token ring network.

fiber management tray A device used to coil up extra optical fibers.



342

fiber patch cord A kind of fiber used for connections between the subrack and the ODF, and forconnections between subracks or inside a subrack.

fiber spool A device used in coiling up an extra length of optical fibers.

Fiber trough The trough that is used for routing fibers.

fiber/cable Fiber & Cable is the general name of optical fiber and cable. It refers to the physicalentities that connect the transmission equipment, carry transmission objects (userinformation and network management information) and perform transmission functionin the transmission network. The optical fiber transmits optical signal, while the cabletransmits electrical signal. The fiber/cable between NEs represents the optical fiberconnection or cable connection between NEs. The fiber/cable between SDH NEsrepresents the connection relation between NEs. At this time, the fiber/cable is of opticalfiber type.

field programmablegate array

A type of semi-customized circuit used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit(ASIC) field. It is developed on the basis of the programmable components, such as thePAL, GAL, and EPLD. It not only remedies the defects of customized circuits, but alsoovercomes the disadvantage of the original programmable components in terms of thelimited number of gate arrays.

FIFO See First in First out

File Transfer Protocol A member of the TCP/IP suite of protocols, used to copy files between two computerson the Internet. Both computers must support their respective FTP roles: one must be anFTP client and the other an FTP server.

First in First out A stack management mechanism. The first saved data is first read and invoked.

Flow An aggregation of packets that have the same characteristics. On the networkmanagement system or NE software, flow is a group of classification rules. On boards,it is a group of packets that have the same quality of service (QoS) operation. At present,two flows are supported: port flow and port+VLAN flow. Port flow is based on port IDand port+VLAN flow is based on port ID and VLAN ID. The two flows cannot coexistin the same port.

FMT See fiber management tray

FOADM fixed optical add/drop multiplexer

FOAs fixed optical attenuator

Forced switch For normal traffic signals, switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unlessan equal or higher priority switch command is in effect or SF condition exists on theprotection section, by issuing a forced switch request for that traffic signal.

forward errorcorrection

A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload atthe transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated duringtransmission are corrected at the receive end.

four-wave mixing Four-Wave Mixing (FWM), also called four-photon mixing, occurs when the interactionof two or three optical waves at different wavelengths generates new optical waves,called mixing products or sidebands, at other wavelengths.

FPGA See field programmable gate array



343

frame A frame, starting with a header, is a string of bytes with a specified length. Frame lengthis represented by the sampling circle or the total number of bytes sampled during a circle.A header comprises one or a number of bytes with pre-specified values. In other words,a header is a code segment that reflects the distribution (diagram) of the elements pre-specified by the sending and receiving parties.

frame alignment signal A distinctive signal inserted in every frame or once in every n frames, always occupyingthe same relative position within the frame, and used to establish and maintain framealignment.

FTP See File Transfer Protocol

full-duplex A full-duplex, or sometimes double-duplex system, allows communication in bothdirections, and, unlike half-duplex, allows this to happen simultaneously. Land-linetelephone networks are full-duplex, since they allow both callers to speak and be heardat the same time. A good analogy for a full-duplex system would be a two-lane road withone lane for each direction.

G

gain The ratio between the optical power from the input optical interface of the opticalamplifier and the optical power from the output optical interface of the jumper fiber,which expressed in dB.

gain flattening filter Gain Flattening Filter (GFFs), also known as gain equalizing filters, are used to flattenor smooth out unequal signal intensities over a specified wavelength range. This unequalsignal intensity usually occurs after an amplification stage (for example, EDFA and/orRaman). Typically, GFFs are used in conjunction with gain amplifiers to ensure that theamplified channels all have the same gain. A static spectral device that flattens the outputspectrum of an erbium-doped fiber amplifier.

Gateway IP When an NE accesses a remote network management system or NE, a router can be usedto enable the TCP/IP communication. In this case, the IP address of the router is thegateway IP. Only the gateway NE requires the IP address. The IP address itself cannotidentify the uniqueness of an NE. The same IP addresses may exist in different TCP/IPnetworks. An NE may have multiple IP addresses, for example, one IP address of thenetwork and one IP address of the Ethernet port.

gateway networkelement

A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer andthe NM application layer

Gb See gigabit

GCC general communication channel

GCP See GMPLS control plan

GE See gigabit Ethernet

GE ADM The technology can optimize GE service transport over WDM for Metro network. Itowns the capability of GE service convergence and grooming and benefits to use thenetwork resource more effectively.

generic framingprocedure

A framing and encapsulated method which can be applied to any data type. It has beenstandardized by ITU-T SG15.

GFF See gain flattening filter

GFP See generic framing procedure



344

gigabit In data communications, a gigabit is one billion bits, or 1,000,000,000 (that is, 10^9)bits. It's commonly used for measuring the amount of data that is transferred in a secondbetween two telecommunication points.

gigabit Ethernet GE adopts the IEEE 802.3z. GE is compatible with 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s Ethernet.It runs at 1000 Mbit/s. Gigabit Ethernet uses a private medium, and it does not supportcoaxial cables or other cables. It also supports the channels in the bandwidth mode. IfGigabit Ethernet is, however, deployed to be the private bandwidth system with a bridge(switch) or a router as the center, it gives full play to the performance and the bandwidth.In the network structure, Gigabit Ethernet uses full duplex links that are private, causingthe length of the links to be sufficient for backbone applications in a building and campus.

Global PositioningSystem

A global navigation satellite system. It provides reliable positioning, navigation, andtiming services to worldwide users.

GMPLS generalized multiprotocol label switching

GMPLS control plan The OptiX GMPLS control plan (GCP) is the ASON software developed by Huawei.The OptiX GCP applies to the OptiX OSN product series. By using this software, thetraditional network can evolve into the ASON network. The OptiX OSN product seriessupport the ASON features.

GNE See gateway network element

GPS See Global Positioning System

graphical user interface A visual computer environment that represents programs, files, and options withgraphical images, such as icons, menus, and dialog boxes, on the screen.

grounding The connection of sections of an electrical circuit to a common conductor, called theground, which serves as the reference for the other voltages in the circuit.

GSSP General Snooping and Selection Protocol

GUI See graphical user interface

H

Hardware loopback A connection mode in which a fiber jumper is used to connect the input optical interfaceto the output optical interface of a board to achieve signal loopback.

HCS See hierarchical cell structure

HDB high density bipolar code

HDLC See high level data link control

hierarchical cellstructure

This is a term typically used to describe the priority of cells within a mixed environment.That is when Macro, Micro, and Pico cells may be viewed as candidates for cellreselection the priority described by the HCS will be used in the associated calculations.

high level data linkcontrol

The HDLC protocol is a general purpose protocol which operates at the data link layerof the OSI reference model. Each piece of data is encapsulated in an HDLC frame byadding a trailer and a header.

History alarm The confirmed alarms that have been saved in the memory and other external memories.

History PerformanceData

The performance data that is stored in the history register or that is automatically reportedand stored in the NMS.



345

I

IAE incoming alignment error

IC See integrated circuit

ICC ITU carrier code

ICMP See Internet Control Message Protocol

ID See identity

identity The collective aspect of the set of characteristics by which a thing is definitivelyrecognizable or known.

Idle resource opticalNE

When the U2000 is started successfully, an NE icon called "Idle ONE" will be displayedon the topological view. In this NE, the subracks and boards that are not divided to otheroptical NEs (such as OTM, OADM and other NEs) are retained. In this NE, idle DWDMsubracks and boards are reserved, which can be distributed to other ONEs. Double-clickthe NE icon to view all the currently idle DWDM subracks or boards in the network.

IE See Internet Explorer

IEC See International Electrotechnical Commission

IEEE See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IETF See Internet Engineering Task Force

IGMP See Internet Group Management Protocol

Input jitter tolerance The maximum amplitude of sinusoidal jitter at a given jitter frequency, which, whenmodulating the signal at an equipment input port, results in no more than two erroredseconds cumulative, where these errored seconds are integrated over successive 30second measurement intervals.

Institute of Electricaland ElectronicsEngineers

A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States butboasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical,electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters.

integrated circuit A combination of inseparable associated circuit elements that are formed in place andinterconnected on or within a single base material to perform a microcircuit function.

integrated servicesdigital network

A network defined in CCITT, providing comprehensive transmission service for thevoice, video, and data. The ISDN enables the voice, video, and data transmission on asmall number of data channels simultaneously, thus implementing a comprehensivetransmission service.

intelligent poweradjustment

A technology that the system reduces the optical power of all the amplifiers in an adjacentregeneration section in the upstream to a safety level if the system detects the loss ofoptical signals on the link. The loss of optical signals may due to the fiber is broken, theperformance of equipments trend to be inferior or the connector is not plugged well.Thus, the maintenance engineers are not hurt by the laser being sent out from the sliceof broken fiber.

Internal cable The cables and optical fibers which are used for interconnecting electrical interfaces andoptical interfaces within the cabinet.

internal spanning tree A segment of CIST in a certain MST region. An IST is a special MSTI whose ID is 0.



346

InternationalElectrotechnicalCommission

The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is an international and non-governmental standards organization dealing with electrical and electronical standards.

InternationalOrganization forStandardization

An international association that works to establish global standards for communicationsand information exchange. Primary among its accomplishments is the widely acceptedISO/OSI reference model, which defines standards for the interaction of computersconnected by communications networks.

InternationalTelecommunicationUnion

A United Nations agency, one of the most important and influential recommendationbodies, responsible for recommending standards for telecommunication (ITU-T) andradio networks (ITU-R).

InternationalTelecommunicationUnion-TelecommunicationStandardization Sector

An international body that develops worldwide standards for telecommunicationstechnologies. These standards are grouped together in series which are prefixed with aletter indicating the general subject and a number specifying the particular standard. Forexample, X.25 comes from the "X" series which deals with data networks and opensystem communications and number "25" deals with packet switched networks.

Internet ControlMessage Protocol

A network-layer (ISO/OSI level 3) Internet protocol that provides error correction andother information relevant to IP packet processing. For example, it can let the IP softwareon one machine inform another machine about an unreachable destination. See alsocommunications protocol, IP, ISO/OSI reference model, packet (definition 1).

Internet EngineeringTask Force

A worldwide organization of individuals interested in networking and the Internet.Managed by the Internet Engineering Steering Group (IESG), the IETF is charged withstudying technical problems facing the Internet and proposing solutions to the InternetArchitecture Board (IAB). The work of the IETF is carried out by various working groupsthat concentrate on specific topics, such as routing and security. The IETF is the publisherof the specifications that led to the TCP/IP protocol standard.

Internet Explorer Microsoft's Web browsing software. Introduced in October 1995, the latest versions ofInternet Explorer include many features that allow you to customize your experience onthe Web. Internet Explorer is also available for the Macintosh and UNIX platforms.

Internet GroupManagement Protocol

The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups amongthe TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establishand maintain multicast group memberships.

Internet Protocol The TCP/IP standard protocol that defines the IP packet as the unit of information sentacross an internet and provides the basis for connectionless, best-effort packet deliveryservice. IP includes the ICMP control and error message protocol as an integral part. Theentire protocol suite is often referred to as TCP/IP because TCP and IP are the twofundamental protocols. IP is standardized in RFC 791.

IP See Internet Protocol

IP address A 32-bit (4-byte) binary number that uniquely identifies a host (computer) connected tothe Internet for communication with other hosts in the Internet by transferring packets.An IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation, consisting of the decimal valuesof its 4 bytes, separated with periods; for example, 127.0.0.1. The first three bytes of theIP address identify the network to which the host is connected, and the last byte identifythe host itself.

IP over DCC The IP Over DCC follows TCP/IP telecommunications standards and controls the remoteNEs through the Internet. The IP Over DCC means that the IP over DCC uses overheadDCC byte (the default is D1-D3) for communication.

IPA See intelligent power adjustment



347

IPG inter-packet gap

ISDN See integrated services digital network

ISO See International Organization for Standardization

IST See internal spanning tree

ITU See International Telecommunication Union

ITU-T See International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication StandardizationSector

J

Jitter Short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and control systeminstability.

Jitter transfer The physical relationship between jitter applied at the input port and the jitter appearingat the output port.

L

label switched path A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through labelswitching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically, based onnormal routing mechanisms, or through configuration.

LACP See Link Aggregation Control Protocol

LAG See link aggregation group

LAN See local area network

LAPD link access procedure on the D channel

LAPS link access protocol-SDH

Laser A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laserlight has better coherence than ordinary light. The fiber system takes the semi-conductorlaser as the light source.

layer A concept used to allow the transport network functionality to be described hierarchicallyas successive levels; each layer being solely concerned with the generation and transferof its characteristic information.

LB See loopback

LCAS See link capacity adjustment scheme

LCD See liquid crystal display

LCN local communication network

LCT local craft terminal

LED See light emitting diode

LHP long hop



348

light emitting diode A display and lighting technology used in almost every electrical and electronic producton the market, to from a tiny on/off light to digital readouts, flashlights, traffic lights andperimeter lighting. LEDs are also used as the light source in multimode fibers, opticalmice and laser-class printers.

Link AggregationControl Protocol

A method of bundling a group of physical interfaces together as a logical interface toincrease bandwidth and reliability. For related protocols and standards, refer to IEEE802.3ad.

link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a linkaggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it werea single link.

link capacityadjustment scheme

LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides acontrol mechanism to hitlessly increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet thebandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member linksthat have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity initiation,increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path is theresponsibility of the Network and Element Management Systems.

Link Control Protocol In the Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP), the Link Control Protocol (LCP) establishes,configures, and tests data-link Internet connections.

link stateadvertisement

The link in LSA is any type of connection between OSPF routers, while the state is thecondition of the link.

linktrace message The message sent by the initiator MEP of 802.1ag MAC Trace to the destination MEPis called Linktrace Message(LTM). LTM includes the Time to Live (TTL) and the MACaddress of the destination MEP2.

linktrace reply For 802.1ag MAC Trace, the destination MEP replies with a response message to thesource MEP after the destination MEP receives the LTM, and the response message iscalled Linktrace Reply (LTR). LTR also includes the TTL that equals the result of theTTL of LTM minus 1.

liquid crystal display A type of display that uses a liquid compound having a polar molecular structure,sandwiched between two transparent electrodes.

LLC See logical link control

LMP link management protocol

LOC loss of clock

local area network A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few squarekilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet,FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANsare generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).

Locked switching When the switching condition is satisfied, this function disables the service from beingswitched from the working channel to the protection channel. When the service has beenswitched, the function enables the service to be restored from the protection channel tothe working channel.

logical link control According to the IEEE 802 family of standards, Logical Link Control (LLC) is the uppersublayer of the OSI data link layer. The LLC is the same for the various physical media(such as Ethernet, token ring, WLAN).

logical port A logical port is a logical number assigned to every application.



349

loopback A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that thesignal or message can be analyzed for errors.

LOP See loss of pointer

LOS See Loss Of Signal

loss of pointer Loss of Pointer: A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in thePHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost the pointer to the start ofcell in the payload. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer.

Loss Of Signal Loss of signal (LOS) indicates that there are no transitions occurring in the receivedsignal.

Lower subrack The subrack close to the bottom of the cabinet when a cabinet contains several subracks.

LP See logical port

LPT link-state pass through

LSA See link state advertisement

LSP See label switched path

LT linktrace

LTM See linktrace message

LTR See linktrace reply

M

MA Maintenance Associations

MAC See media access control

MADM multiple add/drop multiplexer

main distributionframe

A device at a central office, on which all local loops are terminated.

main path interface atthe transmitter

A reference point on the optical fiber just after the OM/OA output optical connector.

main topology A interface that displays the connection relation of NEs on the NMS (screen display).The default client interface of the NMS, a basic component of the human-machineinteractive interface. The topology clearly shows the structure of the network, the alarmsof different NEs, subnets in the network, the communication status as well as the basicnetwork operation status. All topology management functions are accessed here.

maintenance domain The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by CFM. Thedevices in an MD are managed by a single ISP.

maintenance point Maintenance Point (MP) is one of either a MEP or a MIP.

MAN See metropolitan area network

managed object The management view of a resource within the telecommunication environment that maybe managed via the agent. Examples of SDH managed objects are: equipment, receiveport, transmit port, power supply, plug-in card, virtual container, multiplex section, andregenerator section.



350

Managementinformation

The information that is used for network management in a transport network.

managementinformation base

A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network. Itcomprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage entities (such asrouters and switches) in a network.

manual switch Switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless a failure condition existson other sections (including the protection section) or an equal or higher priority switchcommand is in effect, by issuing a manual switch request for that normal traffic signal.

Mapping A procedure by which tributaries are adapted into virtual containers at the boundary ofan SDH network.

marking-off template A quadrate cardboard with four holes. It is used to mark the positions of the installationholes for the cabinet.

MD See maintenance domain

MDB Memory Database

MDF See main distribution frame

MDP message dispatch process

MDS message distribution service software

ME maintenance entities

mean launched power The average power of a pseudo-random data sequence coupled into the fiber by thetransmitter.

Mean Time BetweenFailures

The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a measureof the reliability of the system.

media access control A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of thedata link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connectingthe physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocolchecks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain controlinformation is added to the data, and then the data and the control information aretransmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MACprotocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmittedcorrectly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the controlinformation is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.

MEP maintenance end point

metropolitan areanetwork

A metropolitan area network (MAN) is a network that interconnects users with computerresources in a geographic area or region larger than that covered by even a large localarea network (LAN) but smaller than the area covered by a wide area network (WAN).The term is applied to the interconnection of networks in a city into a single largernetwork (which may then also offer efficient connection to a wide area network). It isalso used to mean the interconnection of several local area networks by bridging themwith backbone lines. The latter usage is also sometimes referred to as a campus network.

MFAS See multiframe alignment signal

MIB See management information base

MIP maintenance intermediate point

MLD See multicast listener discovery



351

MLM laser See multi-longitudinal mode laser

MO See managed object

mother board A printed board assembly that is used for interconnecting arrays of plug-in electronicmodules.

mounting ear A piece of angle plate with holes in it on a rack. It is used to fix network elements orcomponents.

MP See maintenance point

MPI main path interface

MPI-R main path interface at the receiver

MPI-S See main path interface at the transmitter

MPLS See Multiprotocol Label Switching

MS Multiplex Section

MSA Multiplex Section Adaptation

MSI multi-frame structure identifier

MSOH See multiplex section overhead

MSP See multiplex section protection

MSPP multi-service provisioning platform

MST See multiplex section termination

MSTI See multiple spanning tree instance

MSTP See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol

MTA Mail Transfer Agent

MTBF See Mean Time Between Failures

MTU Maximum Transmission Unit

multi-longitudinalmode laser

An injection laser diode which has a number of longitudinal modes.

multicast listenerdiscovery

The MLD is used by the IPv6 router to discover the multicast listeners on their directlyconnected network segments, and set up and maintain member relationships. On IPv6networks, after MLD is configured on the receiver hosts and the multicast router to whichthe hosts are directly connected, the hosts can dynamically join related groups and themulticast router can manage members on the local network.

multiframe alignmentsignal

A distinctive signal inserted in every multiframe or once in every n multiframes, alwaysoccupying the same relative position within the multiframe, and used to establish andmaintain multiframe alignment.

multiple spanning treeinstance

Multiple spanning tree instance. One of a number of Spanning Trees calculated by MSTPwithin an MST Region, to provide a simply and fully connected active topology forframes classified as belonging to a VLAN that is mapped to the MSTI by the MSTConfiguration. A VLAN cannot be assigned to multiple MSTIs.



352

Multiple SpanningTree Protocol

Multiple spanning tree protocol. The MSTP can be used in a loop network. Using analgorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmedas a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoidedin the loop network. The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs andmultiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwardedin a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.

multiplex sectionoverhead

The overhead that comprises rows 5 to 9 of the SOH of the STM-N signal. See SOHdefinition.

multiplex sectionprotection

A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between andincluding two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a"protection" channel.

multiplex sectiontermination

The function performed to generate the MSOH in the process of forming an SDH framesignal and terminates the MSOH in the reverse direction.

multiplexer Equipment which combines a number of tributary channels onto a fewer number ofaggregate bearer channels, the relationship between the tributary and aggregate channelsbeing fixed.

Multiplexing A procedure by which multiple lower order path layer signals are adapted into a higherorder path or the multiple higher order path layer signals are adapted into a multiplexsection.

Multiprotocol LabelSwitching

A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different linklayers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis ofIP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost performance and expandability ofnetworks, and is beneficial to routing.

MUX See multiplexer

MVOA mechanical variable optical attenuator

N

NA No Acknowledgment

NCP See Network Control Protocol

NE See network element

NE database There are three types of database on NE SCC board as following:

(1) DRDB: a dynamic database in a dynamic RAM, powered by battery;

(2) SDB: a static database in a power-down RAM;

(3) FDB0, FDB0: permanently saved databases in a Flash ROM.

In efficient operation, the NE configuration data is saved in DRDB and SDB at the sametime. Backing up an NE database means backing up the NE configuration data from SDBto FDB0 and FDB1. When an NE is restarted after power-down, the NE database isrestored in the following procedures: As the SDB data is lost due to power-down, themain control restores the data first from DRDB. If the data in DRDB is also lost due tothe exhaustion of the battery, the data is restored from FDB0 or FDB1.



353

NE Explorer The main operation interface, of the NMS, which is used to manage thetelecommunication equipment. In the NE Explorer, the user can query, manage andmaintain the NE, boards, and ports on a per-NE basis.

NE ID An ID that indicates a managed device in the network. In the network, each NE has aunique NE ID.

NE Panel A graphical user interface, of the network management system, which displays subracks,boards, and ports on an NE. In the NE Panel, the user can complete most of theconfiguration, management and maintenance functions for an NE.

NE-side data The NE configuration data that is stored on the SCC board of the equipment. The NE-side data can be uploaded to the network management system(NMS) and thus is storedon the NMS side.

NEBS Network Equipment Building System

NEF See network element function

Network ControlProtocol

This is the program that switches the virtual circuit connections into place, implementspath control, and operates the Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC) link.

network element A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. OneNE is at least equipped with one system control and communication(SCC) board whichmanages and monitors the entire network element. The NE software runs on the SCCboard.

network elementfunction

A function block which represents the telecommunication functions and communicateswith the TMN OSF function block for the purpose of being monitored and/or controlled.

network management The process of controlling a network so as to maximize its efficiency and productivity.ISO's model divides network management into five categories: fault management,accounting management, configuration management, security management andperformance management.

Network ManagementSystem

A system in charge of the operation, administration, and maintenance of a network.

network node interface The interface at a network node which is used to interconnect with another network node.

network segment A part of an Ethernet or other network, on which all message traffic is common to allnodes, that is, it is broadcast from one node on the segment and received by all others.

network service accesspoint

A network address defined by ISO, through which entities on the network layer canaccess OSI network services.

Network Time Protocol The Network Time Protocol (NTP) defines the time synchronization mechanism. Itsynchronizes the time between the distributed time server and the client.

NM See network management

NMS See Network Management System

NNI See network node interface

NOC network operation center

Noise figure An index that represents the degrade extent of optical signals after the signals passing asystem.

NSAP See network service access point

NTP See Network Time Protocol



354

O

OA See optical amplifier

OADM See optical add/drop multiplexer

OADM frame A frame which is used to hold the OADM boards.

OAM See operation, administration and maintenance

OC See optical coupler

OCI open connection indication

OCP See optical channel protection

OD optical demultiplexing

ODB optical duobinary

ODF See optical distribution frame

ODUk optical channel data unit-k

OEQ optical equalizer

OFC open fiber control

OLA See optical line amplifier

OLP See optical line protection

OM optical multiplexing

OMS optical multiplexing section

ONE See optical network element

Online Help The capability of many programs and operating systems to display advice or instructionsfor using their features when so requested by the user.

OOF See out of frame

OPA optical power adjust

open shortest path first A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing. Dijkstra'salgorithm is used to calculate the shortest path tree. It uses cost as its routing metric. Alink state database is constructed of the network topology which is identical on all routersin the area.

Open SystemsInterconnection

A framework of ISO standards for communication between different systems made bydifferent vendors, in which the communications process is organized into seven differentcategories that are placed in a layered sequence based on their relationship to the user.Each layer uses the layer immediately below it and provides a service to the layer above.Layers 7 through 4 deal with end-to-end communication between the message sourceand destination, and layers 3 through 1 deal with network functions.

operation,administration andmaintenance

A group of network support functions that monitor and sustain segment operation,activities that are concerned with, but not limited to, failure detection, notification,location, and repairs that are intended to eliminate faults and keep a segment in anoperational state and support activities required to provide the services of a subscriberaccess network to users/subscribers.

OpEx; OPEX operation expenditure

OPS optical physical section



355

optic fiber connector A device installed at the end of a fiber, optical source or receive unit. It is used to couplethe optical wave to the fiber when connected to another device of the same type. Aconnector can either connect two fiber ends or connect a fiber end and a optical source(or a detector).+

optical add/dropmultiplexer

A device that can be used to add the optical signals of various wavelengths to one channeland drop the optical signals of various wavelengths from one channel.

optical amplifier Devices or subsystems in which optical signals can be amplified by means of thestimulated emission taking place in a suitable active medium.

optical attenuator A passive device that increases the attenuation in a fiber link. It is used to ensure that theoptical power of the signals received at the receive end is not extremely high. It isavailable in two types: fixed attenuator and variable attenuator.

optical channel A signal transmitted at one wavelength in a fiber-optic system.

optical channelprotection

In an optical transmission link that contains multiple wavelengths, when a certainwavelength goes faulty, the services at the wavelength can be protected if the opticalchannel protection is configured.

optical coupler A coupler for coupling light in an optical system. Multiple discrete layers of alternatingoptical materials have respective first and second indexes of refraction. The thickness ofeach layer is a fraction of the light wavelength.

optical distributionframe

A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers.

optical line amplifier A piece of equipment that functions as an OLA to directly amplify the input opticalsignals and to compensate for the line loss. Currently, the key component of the OLA isthe EDFA amplifier.

optical line protection A protection mechanism that adopts dual fed and selective receiving principle and single-ended switching mode. In this protection, two pairs of fibers are used. One pair of fibersforms the working route. The working route transmits line signals when the line isnormal. The other pair of fibers forms the protection route. The protection route carriesline signals when the line is broken or the signal attenuation is extremely large.

optical networkelement

A transport entity that implements the NE functions (terminal multiplexing, add/dropmultiplexing, cross-connection and regeneration) in a DWDM layer network. The typesof ONEs include OTM, OADM, OLA, REG and OXC. The locating of an ONE isequivalent to that of a common NE. In a view, an ONE is displayed with an icon, like acommon NE and its alarm status can be displayed with colors. Logically, an ONE consistsof different subracks. Like a common NE, an ONE cannot be expanded or entered likea sub-network. Similar to a common NE, an ONE provides a list of the subracks thatform the NE to display the board layout.

optical signal-to-noiseratio

The most important index of measuring the performance of a DWDM system. The ratioof signal power and noise power in a transmission link. That is, OSNR = signal power/noise power.

optical spectrumanalyzer

A device that allows the details of a region of an optical spectrum to be resolved.Commonly used to diagnose DWDM systems.

optical supervisorychannel

A technology that realizes communication among nodes in optical transmission networkand transmits the monitoring data in a certain channel (the wavelength of the workingchannel for it is 1510 nm and that of the corresponding protection one is 1625 nm).

Optical switch A passive component possessing two or more ports which selectively transmits, redirects,or blocks optical power in an optical fiber transmission line.



356

optical time domainreflectometer

A device that sends a very short pulse of light down a fiber optic communication systemand measures the time history of the pulse reflection to measure the fiber length, the lightloss and locate the fiber fault.

optical transmissionsection

Optical transmission section allows the network operator to perform monitoring andmaintenance tasks between NEs.

optical transponderunit

A device or subsystem that converts the accessed client signals into the G.694.1/G.694.2-compliant WDM wavelength.

optical transportnetwork

A network that uses the optical signal to transmit data

optical wavelengthshared protection

In the optical wavelength shared protection (OWSP), the service protection betweendifferent stations can be achieved by using the same wavelength, realizing wavelengthsharing. This saves the wavelength resources and lowers the cost. The optical wavelengthshared protection is mainly applied to the ring network which is configured withdistributed services. It is achieved by using the OWSP board. In a ring network whereservices are distributed at adjacent stations, each station requires one OWSP board. Then,two wavelengths are enough for configuring the shared protection to protect one serviceamong stations.

OPU optical channel payload unit

OPUk optical channel payload unit-k

orderwire A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers ormaintenance engineers of different stations.

original equipmentmanufacturer

An original equipment manufacturer, or OEM is typically a company that uses acomponent made by a second company in its own product, or sells the product of thesecond company under its own brand.

OSA See optical spectrum analyzer

OSC See optical supervisory channel

OSI See Open Systems Interconnection

OSN optical switch node

OSNR See optical signal-to-noise ratio

OSPF See open shortest path first

OTDR See optical time domain reflectometer

OTM optical terminal multiplexer

OTN See optical transport network

OTS See optical transmission section

OTU See optical transponder unit

OTUk optical channel transport unit-k

out of frame An NE transmits an OOF downstream when it receives framing errors in a specifiednumber of consecutive frame bit positions.

Output optical power The ranger of optical energy level of output signals.

overhead cabling Cables or fibers connect the cabinet with other equipment from the top of the cabinet.

OWSP See optical wavelength shared protection



357

P

PA pre-amplifier

packet over SDH/SONET

A MAN and WAN technology that provides point-to-point data connections. The POSinterface uses SDH/SONET as the physical layer protocol, and supports the transport ofpacket data (such as IP packets) in MAN and WAN.

packet switchednetwork

A telecommunication network which works in packet switching mode.

Packing case A case which is used for packing the board or subrack.

Paired slots Two slots of which the overheads can be passed through by using the bus on thebackplane.

pass-through The action of transmitting the same information that is being received for any givendirection of transmission.

PBS See peak burst size

PCB See printed circuit board

PCC protection communication channel

PCC See policy and charging control

PCS See physical coding sublayer

PDH See plesiochronous digital hierarchy

PDL See polarization dependent loss

PDU Protocol Data Unit

PE Provider Edge

peak burst size A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the maximum burstIP packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate. Thisparameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be notless than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.

peak information rate Peak Information Rate. A traffic parameter, expressed in bit/s, whose value should benot less than the committed information rate.

Performance register Performance register is the memory space for performance event counts, including 15-min current performance register, 24-hour current performance register, 15-min historyperformance register, 24-hour history performance register, UAT register and CSESregister. The object of performance event monitoring is the board functional module, soevery board functional module has a performance register. A performance register isused to count the performance events taking place within a period of operation time, soas to evaluate the quality of operation from the angle of statistics.

PGND protection ground

phase-locked loop A circuit that consists essentially of a phase detector which compares the frequency ofa voltage-controlled oscillator with that of an incoming carrier signal or reference-frequency generator; the output of the phase detector, after passing through a loop filter,is fed back to the voltage-controlled oscillator to keep it exactly in phase with theincoming or reference frequency.

PHY See physical sublayer & physical layer



358

physical codingsublayer

The PCS further helps to define physical layer specifications for 10 gigabit Ethernet afterhaving been broken down into their Physical Media Dependent Sublayer or PMD. Eachsublayer places the 10GBASE standards into either LAN or WAN specifications.

physical sublayer &physical layer

1. physical sublayer: One of two sublayers of the FDDI physical layer. 2. physical layer:In ATM, the physical layer provides the transmission of cells over a physical mediumthat connects two ATM devices. The PHY is comprised of two sublayers: PMD and TC

PID photonics integrated device

PIM-DM protocol independent multicast-dense mode

PIM-SM See protocol independent multicast sparse mode

PIN See Positive Intrinsic Negative

PIR See peak information rate

plesiochronous digitalhierarchy

A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimumrate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s rates.

PLL See phase-locked loop

PMD polarization mode dispersion

PMI payload missing indication

POH path overhead

point to multipoint A communications network that provides a path from one location to multiple locations(from one to many).

Point-to-Point Protocol A protocol on the data link layer, provides point-to-point transmission and encapsulatesdata packets on the network layer. It is located in layer 2 of the IP protocol stack.

Point-to-Point Protocolover Ethernet

PPPoE, point-to-point protocol over Ethernet, is a network protocol for encapsulatingPPP frames in Ethernet frames. It is used mainly with DSL services. It offers standardPPP features such as authentication, encryption, and compression.

Pointer An indicator whose value defines the frame offset of a virtual container with respect tothe frame reference of the transport entity on which it is supported.

polarization dependentloss

The maximum, peak-to-peak insertion loss (or gain) variation caused by a componentwhen stimulated by all possible polarization states. It is specified in dB units.

policy and chargingcontrol

Short for Policy and Charging Control, the PCC is defined in 3GPP R7. The PCCprovides the QoS control and service-based charging functions in the wireless bearernetwork.

POS See packet over SDH/SONET

Positive IntrinsicNegative

Photodiode. A semiconductor detector with an intrinsic (i) region separating the p- andn-doped regions. It has fast linear response and is used in fiber-optic receivers.

Power box A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which suppliespower for the subracks in the cabinet.

power distribution box A power box through which the power enters the cabinet and is re-distributed to variouscomponents, at the mean time, the Power Distribution Box protects the electric devicesfrom current overload.

PPP See Point-to-Point Protocol

PPPoE See Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet



359

PRBS See pseudo random binary sequence

PRC primary reference clock

PRI See primary rate interface

primary rate interface An interface consisting of 23 channel Bs and a 64 kbit/s channel D that uses the T1 line,or consisting of 30 channel Bs and a channel D that uses the E1 line.

printed circuit board A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic componentsusing conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated ontoa non-conductive substrate.

protection groundcable

A cable which connects the equipment and the protection grounding bar. Usually, onehalf of the cable is yellow; while the other half is green.

Protection path A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.

Protection policy In case the service route provides multiple service protections, different protectionpolicies can be selected as required. Protection policy refers to the protection mode giventhe priority in use for the trail: protection, no protection, and extra traffic. Of the above,the protection preference is divided into trail protection and subnet connectionprotection.

Protection service A specific service that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.

protocol independentmulticast sparse mode

It is applicable to large-scale multicast networks with scattered members.

pseudo random binarysequence

A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an element is independent of thevalues of any of the other elements, similar to real random sequences.

PSI payload structure identifier

PSN See packet switched network

PSTN See public switched telephone network

PT payload type

PTMP See point to multipoint

PTN packet transport network

PTP Point-To-Point

public switchedtelephone network

A telecommunications network established to perform telephone services for the publicsubscribers. Sometimes called POTS.

Q

QA Q adaptation

QoS See quality of service

quality of service A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel.Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet lossratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality of thetransmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of aservice provider to meet the demands of users.



360

R

radio networkcontroller

An equipment in the RNS which is in charge of controlling the use and the integrity ofthe radio resources.

RAI remote alarm indication

RAM See random access memory

random access memory Semiconductor-based memory that can be read and written by the central processing unit(CPU) or other hardware devices. The storage locations can be accessed in any order.Note that the various types of ROM memory are capable of random access but cannotbe written to. The term RAM, however, is generally understood to refer to volatilememory that can be written to as well as read.

Rapid Spanning TreeProtocol

An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning treeconvergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible withthe STP protocol.

Receiver Sensitivity Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of average receivedpower at point R to achieve a 10-12 (The FEC is open).

reconfiguration opticaladd/drop multiplexer

The WDM equipment supports the ROADM. It flexibly and dynamically adjusts add/drop wavelengths of sites on the network by adjusting the pass-through or block statusof any wavelength without affecting the service transmission in the main optical channel.This implements wavelength allocation among sites on the network. After the ROADMis used, the existing services are not affected during upgrade. The wavelength can bemodified quickly and efficiently during network maintenance, which reducesmaintenance cost. In addition, the ROADM supports the equalization for optical power,which equalizes the optical power at the channel level.

Reed Solomon Code A type of forward error correcting codes invented in 1960 by Irving Reed and GustaveSolomon, which has become commonplace in modern digital communications.

reference clock A kind of stable and high-precision autonous clock providing frequencies for other clocksfor reference.

Reflectance The ratio of the reflected optical power to the incident optical power.

REG A piece of equipment or device that regenerates electrical signals.

Regeneration The process of receiving and reconstructing a digital signal so that the amplitudes,waveforms and timing of its signal elements are constrained within specified limits.

REI Remote Error Indication

Resource ReservationProtocol

The Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) is designed for Integrated Service and isused to reserve resources on every node along a path. RSVP operates on the transportlayer; however, RSVP does not transport application data. RSVP is a network controlprotocol like Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP).

RF Radio Frequency

RFC Requirement for Comments

RFI remote failure indication

ring network A type of network topology in which each node connects to exactly two other nodes,forming a circular pathway for signals.

RIP See Routing Information Protocol



361

RMON remote network monitoring

RNC See radio network controller

ROADM See reconfiguration optical add/drop multiplexer

route A route is the path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. In a TCP/IP network, each IP packet is routed independently. Routes can change dynamically.

Routing InformationProtocol

A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a routebased on the smallest hop count between source and destination. RIP is a distance vectorprotocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its neighboring routers and isknown to waste bandwidth.

RS Code See Reed Solomon Code

RS232 In the asynchronous transfer mode and there is no hand-shaking signal. It cancommunicate with RS232 and RS422 of other stations in point-to-point mode and thetransmission is transparent. Its highest speed is 19.2kbit/s.

RSTP See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

RSVP See Resource Reservation Protocol

RZ return to zero code

S

S1 byte In an SDH network, each network element traces step by step to the same clock referencesource through a specific clock synchronization path, thus realizing the synchronizationof the whole network. If a clock reference source traced by the NE is missing, this NEwill trace another clock reference source of a lower level. To implement protectionswitching of clocks in the whole network, the NE must learn about clock qualityinformation of the clock reference source it traces. Therefore, ITU-T defines S1 byte totransmit network synchronization status information. It uses the lower four bits of themultiplex section overhead S1 byte to indicate 16 types of synchronization qualitygrades. Auto protection switching of clocks in a synchronous network can beimplemented using S1 byte and a proper switching protocol.

Safe control switch The IPA safe switch is set in consideration of the long-span networking requirement,which cannot allow too low output optical power. If the safe control switch is turned off,IPA restarting optical power is the specified output power of the OAU. Otherwise, theIPA restarting optical power is restricted to less than 10 dBm.

SAN See storage area network

SAP service access point

SAPI source access point identifiers

SBS stimulated Brillouin scattering

SC See square connector

SD See signal degrade

SD trigger flag SD stands for signal degrade. The SD trigger flag determines whether to perform aswitching when SD occurs. The SD trigger flag can be set by using the networkmanagement system.

SDH See synchronous digital hierarchy



362

SDI See Serial Digital Interface

SDP serious disturbance period

Search domain Search field refers to the range of IP addresses being searched. In the TCP/IP, the IPaddresses include: Category A address (1.0.0.0---126.255.255.255). For example,10.*.*.*, whose search field is 10.255.255.255, all 10.*.*.* to be searched. Category Baddress (128.0.0.0---191. 255. 255. 255). For example, 129.9.*.*, whose search field is129.9.255.255, all 129.9.*.* to be searched. Category C address (192.0.0.0---223. 255.255. 255). For example, 192.224.9.*, whose search field is 192.224.9.255, all192.224.9.* to be searched. Category D address (224.0.0.0---230.255.255.255), whichis reserved. Category E address (240.0.0.0---247.255.255.255), which is reserved. Net-id 127.*.*.*, in which .*.*.* can be any number. This net-ID is a local address.

Secure File TransferProtocol

A network protocol designed to provide secure file transfer over SSH.

Self-healing Self-healing is the establishment of a replacement connection by network without theNMC function. When a connection failure occurs, the replacement connection is foundby the network elements and rerouted depending on network resources available at thattime.

Serial Digital Interface An interface for transmitting digital signals.

Serial Line InterfaceProtocol

Serial Line Interface Protocol, defines the framing mode over the serial line to implementtransmission of messages over the serial line and provide the remote host interconnectionfunction with a known IP address.

service level agreement A service contract between a customer and a service provider that specifies theforwarding service a customer should receive. A customer may be a user organization(source domain) or another differentiated services domain (upstream domain). A SLAmay include traffic conditioning rules which constitute a traffic conditioning agreementas a whole or partially.

Service protection A measure that ensures that the services can be received at the receive end.

SES See severely errored second

SETS See synchronous equipment timing source

settings Parameters of a system or operation that can be selected by the user.

severely errored second A one-second period which has a bit error ratio >= 10-3 or at least one defect. Timeinterval of one second during which a given digital signal is received with an error ratiogreater than 10-3 (Rec. ITU R F. 592 needs correction) .

SF See signal fail

SFP See small form-factor pluggable

SFTP See Secure File Transfer Protocol

shock-proof reinforce A process by which the cabinet is fastened to the wiring frame or the top of the equipmentroom so that the cabinet stands stably.

shortcut menu A menu that is displayed when right-clicking an object's name or icon. This is alsoreferred to a context menu.

side door The side door of a cabinet is used to protect the equipment inside the cabinet againstunexpected touch and environment impact.



363

side mode suppressionratio

The Side Mode Suppression Ratio (SMSR) is the ratio of the largest peak of the totalsource spectrum to the second largest peak.

side trough The trough on the side of the cable rack, which is used to place nuts so as to fix thecabinet.

signal cable Common signal cables cover the E1 cable, network cable, and other non-subscribersignal cable.

signal degrade A signal indicating the associated data has degraded in the sense that a degraded defect(e.g., dDEG) condition is active.

signal fail A signal that indicates the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defectcondition (non-degrade defect) is active.

signal to noise ratio The ratio of the amplitude of the desired signal to the amplitude of noise signals at agiven point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times the logarithm of the power ratio andis usually expressed in dB (Decibel).

Simple NetworkManagement Protocol

A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modifythe management information of a network element. This protocol ensures thetransmission of management information between any two points. The pollingmechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, whichcan be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on thenetwork and report these activities to the network console workstation. Controlinformation about each device is maintained by a management information block.

single-ended switching A protection operation method which takes switching action only at the affected end ofthe protected entity (e.g. "trail", "subnetwork connection"), in the case of a unidirectionalfailure.

single-mode fiber A type of fiber optic cable through which only one type of light signal with a fixed wavelength can travel at a time. The inner diameter of the single-mode fiber is less than 10microns. This type of fiber is used to transmit data in long distance.

SLA See service level agreement

SLIP See Serial Line Interface Protocol

SLM single longitudinal mode

SM section monitoring

small form-factorpluggable

A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers.

SMF See single-mode fiber

SMSR See side mode suppression ratio

SNCP See subnetwork connection protection

SNCTP See subnetwork connection tunnel protection

SNMP See Simple Network Management Protocol

SNR See signal to noise ratio

soft permanentconnections

An ASON connection which features flexible and dynamic adjustment of routes. SPCincludes different classes of services (CoS).

SONET See synchronous optical network



364

span The physical reach between two pieces of WDM equipment. The number of spansdetermines the signal transmission distance supported by a piece of equipment and variesaccording to transmission system type.

Spanning Tree Protocol STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop. STP applies to the redundantnetwork to block some undesirable redundant paths through certain algorithms and prunea loop network into a loop-free tree network.

SPC See soft permanent connections

SPM self phase modulation

SQL See structured query language

square connector Cables may use two styles of connectors: "square" and "D-style".

SRLG Shared Risk Link Group

SRS stimulated Raman scattering

SSM See Synchronization Status Message

SSMB synchronization status message byte

SSU synchronization supply unit

STM Synchronous Transfer Mode

STM-1 See synchronous transport mode 1

STM-4 Synchronous Transport Module of order 4

storage area network An architecture to attach remote computer storage devices such as disk array controllers,tape libraries and CD arrays to servers in such a way that to the operating system thedevices appear as locally attached devices.

STP See Spanning Tree Protocol

structured querylanguage

A database query and programming language widely used for accessing, querying,updating, and managing data in relational database systems.

sub-network Sub-network is the logical entity in the transmission network and comprises a group ofnetwork management objects. The network that consists of a group of interconnected orcorrelated NEs, according to different functions. For example, protection subnet, clocksubnet and so on. A sub-network can contain NEs and other sub-networks. Generally, asub-network is used to contain the equipments which are located in adjacent regions andclosely related with one another, and it is indicated with a sub-network icon on atopological view. The U2000 supports multilevels of sub-networks. A sub-networkplanning can better the organization of a network view. On the one hand, the view spacecan be saved, on the other hand, it helps the network management personnel focus onthe equipments under their management.

sub-network number A number used to differentiate network sections in a sub-network conference. A sub-network ID consists of the first several digits (one or two) of a user phone number. Anoderwire phone number consists of the sub-network ID and the user number.

subnet mask The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets aredestined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine,server or router and is matched with the IP address.

subnetwork connectionprotection

A function, which allows a working subnetwork connection to be replaced by a protectionsubnetwork connection if the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performancefalls below a required level.



365

subnetwork connectiontunnel protection

SNCTP provides a VC-4 level channel protection. When the working channel is faulty,the services of the entire VC-4 path can be switched over to the protection channel.

support A part used to support and fix a cabinet on the antistatic floor, it is made of welded steelplates and is used to block the cabinets up, thus facilitating floor paving and cabling.Before the whole set of equipment is grounded, insulation plates must be installed underthe supports, and insulating coverings must be added to the expansion bolts to satisfythe insulation requirements.

Suppression state An attribute set to determine whether an NE monitors the alarm. Under suppressionstatus, NE will not monitor the corresponding alarm conditions and the alarm will notoccur even when the alarm conditions are met.

Switching priority There may be the case that several protected boards need to be switched; thus the tributaryboard switching priority should be set. If the switching priority of each board is set thesame, the tributary board that fails later cannot be switched. The board with higherpriority can preempt the switching of that with lower priority.

Synchronization StatusMessage

A message that carries quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing link.Nodes on an SDH network and a synchronization network acquire upstream clockinformation through this message. Then the nodes can perform proper operations on theirclocks, such as tracing, switching, or converting to holdoff, and forward thesynchronization information to downstream nodes.

synchronize NE time To send the system time of the server of the network management system to NEs so asto synchronize all NEs with the server.

synchronous digitalhierarchy

A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines thetransmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode,transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and B-ISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speedcounterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is only used only for signals. SDH issuitable for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity sinceit uses synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure.

synchronousequipment timingsource

The SETS function provides timing reference to the relevant component parts ofmultiplexing equipment and represents the SDH network clement clock.

synchronous opticalnetwork

A high-speed network that provides a standard interface for communications carriers toconnect networks based on fiberoptic cable. SONET is designed to handle multiple datatypes (voice, video, and so on). It transmits at a base rate of 51.84 Mbps, but multiplesof this base rate go as high as 2.488 Gbps (gigabits per second).

synchronous transportmode 1

Synchronous Transfer Mode at 155 Mbit/s.

T

TCM Tandem Connection Monitoring

TCP See Transmission Control Protocol

TDM See time division multiplexing

TE See traffic engineering



366

TelecommunicationManagement Network

A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communicationsnetwork. An architecture for management, including planning, provisioning, installation,maintenance, operation and administration of telecommunications equipment, networksand services.

terminal multiplexer A device used at a network terminal to multiplex multiple channels of low rate signalsinto one channel of high rate signals, or to demultiplex one channel of high rate signalsinto multiple channels of low rate signals.

TFTP See Trivial File Transfer Protocol

TIM trace identifier mismatch

time divisionmultiplexing

A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots(TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3 and so on), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engrosstime slots in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to betransmitted over one channel.

Time Slot Continuously repeating interval of time or a time period in which two devices are ableto interconnect.

Time Synchronization Also called the moment synchronization, time synchronization means that thesynchronization of the absolute time, which requires that the starting time of the signalskeeps consistent with the UTC time.

time to live A technique used in best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets that loop endlessly.The TTL is set by the sender to the maximum time the packet is allowed to be in thenetwork. Each router in the network decrements the TTL field when the packet arrives,and discards any packet if the TTL counter reaches zero.

TL1 See Transaction Language 1

TLV Type/Length/Value

TM See terminal multiplexer

TMN See Telecommunication Management Network

TP traffic Policing

traffic engineering A technology that is used to dynamically monitor the traffic of the network and the loadof the network elements, to adjust in real time the parameters such as traffic managementparameters, route parameters and resource restriction parameters, and to optimize theutilization of network resources. The purpose is to prevent the congestion caused byunbalanced loads.

Transaction Language1

Transaction Language One is a widely used telecommunications management protocol.TL1 is a vendor-independent and technology-independent man-machine language. TL1facilities can be provided as part of an OSS for interacting with either underlyingmanagement systems or NEs. One popular application is for a management system (orNE) to package its trap/notification data in TL1 format and forward it to an OSScomponent. ...(from authors.phptr.com/morris/glossary.html) Transaction Language 1(TL1) is a widely used, "legacy", management protocol in telecommunications. It is across-vendor, cross-technology man-machine language, and is widely used to manageoptical (SONET) and broadband access infrastructure in North America. It is defined inGR-831 by Bellcore (now Telcordia). (from en.wikipedia.org/wiki/TL1)



367

Transmission ControlProtocol

The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets tobe sent via IP (Internet Protocol), and the reassembly and verification of the completemessages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliablein the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer inthe ISO/OSI reference model.

tray A component that can be installed in the cabinet for holding chassis or other devices.

tributary unit group One or more Tributary Units, occupying fixed, defined positions in a higher order VC-n payload is termed a Tributary Unit Group (TUG). TUGs are defined in such a way thatmixed capacity payloads made up of different size Tributary Units can be constructedto increase flexibility of the transport network

Trivial File TransferProtocol

A small and simple alternative to FTP for transferring files. TFTP is intended forapplications that do not need complex interactions between the client and server. TFTPrestricts operations to simple file transfers and does not provide authentication. TFTP issmall enough to be contained in ROM to be used for bootstrapping diskless machines.

trTCM Two Rate Three Color Marker

TTI trail trace identifier

TTL See time to live

TU tributary unit

TUG See tributary unit group

U

UAS unavailable second

UAT See unavailable time event

UDP See User Datagram Protocol

unavailable time event A UAT event is reported when the monitored object generates 10 consecutive severelyerrored seconds (SES) and the SESs begin to be included in the unavailable time. Theevent will end when the bit error ratio per second is better than within 10 consecutiveseconds.

UNI See user network interface

universal timecoordinated

The world-wide scientific standard of timekeeping. It is based upon carefully maintainedatomic clocks and is kept accurate to within microseconds worldwide.

Unprotected Pertaining to the transmission of the services that are not protected, the services cannotbe switched to the protection channel if the working channel is faulty or the service isinterrupted, because protection mechanism is not configured.

upload An operation to report some or all configuration data of an NE to the NMS(NetworkManagement system). The configuration data then covers the configuration data storedat the NMS side.

Upper subrack The subrack close to the top of the cabinet when a cabinet contains several subracks.

User A client user of the NMS. The user name and password uniquely identifies the operationrights of a user in the NMS.



368

User DatagramProtocol

A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send adatagram to an application program on another. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) uses IPto deliver datagrams. UDP provides application programs with the unreliableconnectionless packet delivery service. Thus, UDP messages can be lost, duplicated,delayed, or delivered out of order. UDP is used to try to transmit the data packet, that is,the destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet isreceived.

user network interface The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (forexample, ATM switches).

UTC See universal time coordinated

V

VB virtual bridge

VC See virtual container

VCG See virtual concatenation group

VCI See virtual channel identifier

virtual channelidentifier

A 16-bit field in the header of an ATM cell. The VCI, together with the VPI, is used toidentify the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches onits way to its destination.

virtual concatenationgroup

A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the samevirtual concatenation link

virtual container The information structure used to support path layer connections in the SDH. It consistsof information payload and path Overhead (POH) information fields organized in a blockframe structure which repeats every 125 μs or 500 μs.

virtual local areanetwork

A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same physicalnetwork segment but which share the same IP network number. This is often associatedwith switched Ethernet.

virtual path identifier The field in the ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode) cell header that identifies to whichVP (Virtual Path) the cell belongs.

virtual private network A system configuration, where the subscriber is able to build a private network viaconnections to different network switches that may include private network capabilities.

VLAN See virtual local area network

VOA Variable Optical Attenuator

voice over IP An IP telephony term for a set of facilities used to manage the delivery of voiceinformation over the Internet. VoIP involves sending voice information in a digital formin discrete packets rather than by using the traditional circuit-committed protocols of thepublic switched telephone network (PSTN).

VoIP See voice over IP

VPI See virtual path identifier

VPN See virtual private network

VRRP Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol



369

W

WAN See wide area network

wavelength divisionmultiplexing

A technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation ofsingle mode optical fiber, uses multiple wavelengths as carriers, and allows multiplechannels to transmit simultaneously in a single fiber.

Wavelength protectiongroup

The wavelength protection group is important to describe the wavelength protectionstructure. Its function is similar to that of the protection subnet in the SDH NE. Thewavelength path protection can only work with the correct configuration of thewavelength protection group.

WDM See wavelength division multiplexing

WEEE waste electrical and electronic equipment

wide area network A network composed of computers which are far away from each other which arephysically connected through specific protocols. WAN covers a broad area, such as aprovince, a state or even a country.

Working path The channels allocated to transport the normal traffic.

Working service A specific service that is part of a protection group and is labeled working.

WRR weighted round Robin

WSS wavelength selective switching

WTR Wait To Restore

WXCP wavelength cross-connection protection

WXCP service The WXCP service is also called the GE ADM protection service. The WXCP is a typeof channel protection based on ring network. It adopts the dual fed and selective receivingprinciple and uses the cross-connection function to achieve service switching betweenworking and protection channels.

X

XFP 10Gbit/s Small Form-Factor Pluggable

XPM cross-phase modulation



370

Commissioning and Configuration Guide(V100R003C01_01)

Documents

Transcript of Commissioning and Configuration Guide(V100R003C01_01)